JP7461070B2 - Gaming Machines - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine.

In conventional gaming machines, when a game ball enters the starting hole, a special game judgment is made to determine whether or not to generate a special game advantageous to the player, and a variable performance is performed based on the result of the special game judgment. There is a system that performs a suggestive performance that suggests the result of a special game determination while the variable performance is performed (for example, Patent Document 1).

JP 2017-221253 A

However, there was a problem in that interest in playing games tended to wane.

In view of these circumstances, the present invention aims to prevent a decline in interest in games.

In order to solve such problems, a gaming machine according to the present invention is a gaming machine that includes a main control means , an effect control means , and an operation means that can be operated by a player , and the main control means is , a determining means for determining whether or not to perform a special game advantageous to the player; and an identification information display for displaying the result of the determination by displaying the identification information in a variable manner and then stopping the display when the determination is made; and a command transmitting means for transmitting a predetermined command, the effect control means being capable of receiving the predetermined command from the command transmitting means, and varying the symbol corresponding to the identification information. , it is possible to perform a fluctuating performance that stops the symbols, it is possible to audibly output music from a sound output means, it is possible to perform a reach performance in accordance with the result of the determination in the fluctuation performance, and it is possible to start the reach performance. The result of the determination is notified at a predetermined timing after the determination, and after the reach effect is terminated by the notification of the result of the determination, a predetermined effect that is different from the reach effect and that corresponds to the result of the determination is performed. The music can be audibly output while the reach effect is being executed, and the music can not be audibly output while the predetermined effect is being executed, and the symbol is a first symbol. and a second symbol different from the first symbol, wherein both the first symbol and the second symbol can be visually recognized before the predetermined effect is executed, and the first symbol and the second symbol are both visible before the predetermined effect is executed. In the middle, it is difficult to make the first symbol visible, but it is possible to make the second symbol visible, and the operating means is operated during the effective period that occurs during the execution of the variable production. It is possible to execute an operation performance that makes the player look forward to it depending on the situation, and before the execution of the predetermined performance, it is possible to cause the validity period related to the operation performance to occur. During execution, generation of the validity period related to the operation performance is restricted, and while the predetermined performance is executed, it is possible to not output the music audibly, but the volume may be changed by a predetermined player operation. It is possible to adjust .

According to the present invention, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in gaming.

It is an example of the front view of a gaming machine. 1 is an example of a perspective view of a gaming machine with a glass frame open. 1 is an example of a perspective view of the rear side of the gaming machine. This is an example of a block diagram of the entire gaming machine. It is a diagram showing an example of a jackpot determination table for a jackpot lottery. It is a diagram showing an example of a special symbol determination table. A figure showing an example of a setting data table at the end of a big win game. It is a figure which shows an example of the special electric accessory operation mode determination table. It is a figure which shows an example of the big prize opening mode determination table for a big hit. A figure showing an example of a special chart variation pattern determination table. A figure showing an example of a table regarding normal patterns and starting movable pieces. FIG. 2 is a diagram illustrating an example of various storage areas of a main RAM. FIG. 4 is a diagram showing main processing in a main control board. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing timer interrupt processing in the main control board. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing input control processing in the main control board. A diagram showing the first starting hole detection switch input processing on the main control board. A diagram showing the second starting hole detection switch input processing on the main control board. It is a figure which shows the special figure special electric control process in a main control board. It is a diagram showing special symbol storage determination processing in the main control board. A diagram showing the jackpot determination process on the main control board. A diagram showing special pattern change processing on the main control board. It is a diagram showing special symbol stop processing in the main control board. It is a diagram showing jackpot game processing on the main control board. It is a diagram showing jackpot game end processing on the main control board. A diagram showing the general-purpose power control processing on the main control board. A diagram showing normal pattern change processing on the main control board. It is a diagram showing auxiliary game processing on the main control board. It is a figure which shows the main processing in a production control part. It is a diagram showing timer interrupt processing in the production control section. A diagram showing command analysis process (1) in the performance control unit. It is a diagram showing command analysis processing (2) in the production control section. It is a figure which shows the variable production pattern determination process in a production control part. A figure showing an example of a variable performance pattern determination table. A diagram showing the jackpot preview performance decision process in the performance control unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of a pre-reach notice determination table. (a) is a diagram showing an example of a dialogue pattern determination table, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of a step-up pattern determination table. FIG. 1C is a diagram showing an example of a roulette pattern determination table. (a) is a diagram illustrating an example of a reach notice determination table, (b) is a diagram illustrating an example of a character group pattern determination table, and (c) is a diagram illustrating an example of a decorative member operation number determination table. be. FIG. 4 is a diagram illustrating a main process in a central control unit. 13A is a diagram showing command reception interrupt processing in the central control unit, and FIG. 13B is a diagram showing V blank interrupt processing in the central control unit. FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating animation pattern setting processing in the overall control unit. It is a time chart 1 showing details of each variable performance pattern. This is animation 1 that corresponds to the change performance pattern. This is animation 2 corresponding to the variable performance pattern. This is animation 3 which corresponds to the variable presentation pattern. This is animation 4 which corresponds to the change performance pattern. A diagram showing the music composition for each variable performance pattern. This is time chart 2 showing details of each variable performance pattern. It is a time chart 3 showing details of each variable performance pattern. This is a time chart 4 showing details of each variable performance pattern. This is a time chart 5 showing details of each variable performance pattern. It is a time chart 6 showing details of each variable performance pattern. (a) is a diagram showing the relationship between the number of pseudo-runs and the degree of appearance of a specific image, and (b) is a diagram showing the relationship between the degree of appearance of a specific image when there is a loss and when there is a jackpot. This is animation 5 corresponding to the variable performance pattern. This is animation 6 which corresponds to the variable presentation pattern. This is animation 7 which corresponds to the variable presentation pattern. This is animation 8 corresponding to the variable presentation pattern. 13A is a diagram showing the distribution ratio of the performance symbols when a normal reach is missed, and FIG. 13B is a diagram showing the distribution ratio of the performance symbols when an SP reach or higher is missed. This is animation 9 corresponding to the variable performance pattern. FIG. 13A is a diagram showing the distribution ratio of the performance symbols when the symbol fanning is successful, and FIG. 13B is a diagram showing the distribution ratio of the performance symbols when the symbol fanning is unsuccessful. This is animation 10 that corresponds to the variable presentation pattern. This is animation 11 that corresponds to the variable presentation pattern. A diagram showing the operation prompting images that can be displayed for each variable performance pattern and the timing at which they can be executed. It is a figure which shows the correspondence of the 1st operation promotion image and the 2nd operation promotion image of SP reach or more (at the time of loss). (a) is a diagram showing the selection ratio of operation promotion images at the time of loss and at the time of jackpot (SP reach or higher) in the high probability gaming state and the low probability gaming state, and (b) is a diagram showing the selection ratio of the operation promotion image in the high probability gaming state and the low probability gaming state. It is a figure which shows the selection ratio of the 2nd operation promotion image at the time of a loss and the time of a jackpot (SP reach or more) in a state. A diagram showing the number of vibrations of the effect button and the execution timing for each variable effect pattern. It is a time chart 7 showing details of each variable performance pattern. This is animation 12 that corresponds to the change presentation pattern. It is a time chart 8 showing details of each variable performance pattern. This is animation 13 corresponding to the variable performance pattern. FIG. 13 is a diagram illustrating error-related commands and priorities. This is animation 14 that corresponds to the change presentation pattern. This is animation 15 corresponding to the variable performance pattern. This is an animation 16 corresponding to the variable performance pattern. A figure showing modified examples of the number of vibrations of the effect button and the execution timing for each variable effect pattern.

Embodiments of the present invention will be specifically described below with reference to the drawings.

(Configuration of gaming machine 1)
First, the configuration of the gaming machine 1 will be specifically explained with reference to FIGS. 1 to 3. FIG. 1 is an example of a front view of a gaming machine 1 in an embodiment of the present invention. Further, FIG. 2 is an example of a perspective view of the gaming machine 1 with the glass frame opened according to the embodiment of the present invention. Further, FIG. 3 is a perspective view of the back side of the gaming machine 1 in the embodiment of the present invention.

The gaming machine 1 includes an outer frame 60 that is attached to island equipment of a gaming parlor, and a glass frame 50 that is rotatably supported by the outer frame 60 (see FIGS. 1 and 2). Further, the outer frame 60 is provided with a game board 2 in which a game area 6 in which a game ball 200 flows is formed.

The glass frame 50 is provided with an audio output device 32 consisting of a speaker, a frame lighting device 34b having multiple lamps (LEDs), a performance button 35 for changing the performance mode by pressing it, and a cross button 36 that can be pressed in at least two directions (four directions in this embodiment).

The audio output device 32 outputs background music (BGM), sound effects (SE), etc., to create a sound-based effect. The frame lighting devices 34b are installed in multiple positions and change the direction and color of the light emitted by each lamp to create a lighting effect.

The effect button 35 is provided with an effect button detection switch 35a, and when this effect button detection switch 35a detects the player's operation, a further effect is executed in response to this operation. Similarly, the cross button 36 is provided with a cross button detection switch 36b, and is configured so that the player can input predetermined information into the gaming machine 1 (see FIG. 4). In particular, in this embodiment, the effect button 35 is configured so that it can be moved up and down by the effect button drive motor 35b (see FIG. 4). In addition, the effect button 35 can be changed from a first state (non-vibrating state) to a second state (vibrating state) by the effect button drive motor 35b (not shown).

The glass frame 50 is also provided with an operating handle 3 that can be rotated to launch game balls towards the game area 6, and a tray 40 that stores multiple game balls, with the tray 40 having a downward slope so that the game balls flow down the side of the operating handle 3 (see Figure 2). An inlet for receiving game balls is provided at the end of the downward slope of the tray 40, and the game balls received in this inlet are sent out one by one to a ball feed opening 41 provided on the back surface of the glass frame 50 by driving a ball feed solenoid 4b.

The game balls sent out to the ball feed opening 41 are guided to the downwardly sloping end of the launch rail 42 by the launch rail 42, which has a downward slope toward the striking member 4c. A stopper 43 is provided above the downwardly sloping end of the launch rail 42 to stop the game ball, and one game ball sent out from the ball feed opening 41 is stopped at the downwardly sloping end of the launch rail 42 (see Figure 2).

When the player touches the operating handle 3, the touch sensor 3a (see FIG. 4) provided inside the operating handle 3 detects that the operating handle 3 and the player are in contact. After that, when the player rotates the operating handle 3, the firing volume 3b directly connected to the operating handle 3 also rotates, the firing volume 3b adjusts the firing intensity of the game ball, and the game ball is fired at the adjusted firing intensity. The punching member 4c directly connected to the solenoid 4a rotates. By rotating this ejecting member 4c, the ejecting member 4c ejects the game ball 200 stored at the downwardly inclined end of the ejecting rail 42, and the game ball is ejected into the game area 6.

The game ball fired as described above rises between the rails 5a and 5b from the launch rail 42 and passes the ball return prevention piece 5c, reaches the game area 6, and then falls freely within the game area 6. do. At this time, the game ball will fall unpredictably due to the plurality of nails and windmills provided in the game area 6.

In the game area 6 of the game board 2, there are various winning holes (general winning hole 12, normal symbol gate 13, first starting hole 14, second starting hole 15, first big winning hole 16, second big winning hole). 17), an image display device 31, and a decorative member 7 surrounding the display area of the image display device 31.

Further, a starting port lamp 14b is provided inside the first starting port 14, and the starting port lamp 14b changes the color of a hold icon, which will be described later, when a game ball enters the first starting port 14, for example. When the hold icon is displayed, it is possible to emit light in a color that corresponds to the color of the hold icon. For example, when a game ball enters the first starting port 14 and the pending icon is changed to a green pending icon, the starting port lamp 14b can also emit green light.
In addition to the normal color of white, the hold icon can change to blue, yellow, green, red, or rainbow colors, and the starting port lamp 14b can also emit light in a color corresponding to this color. .

In contrast, outside the play area 6 of the game board 2, there are provided a first special symbol display device 20, a second special symbol display device 21, a normal symbol display device 22, a first special symbol reserved display device 23, a second special symbol reserved display device 24, and a normal symbol reserved display device 25.

On the lower left side of the play area 6, there are three general winning holes 12 through which game balls shot toward the left side of the play area 6 (so-called left hits) can win (enter), but game balls shot toward the right side of the play area 6 (so-called right hits) cannot win, and on the lower right side of the play area 6, there is one general winning hole 12 through which game balls shot to the right can win (enter), but game balls shot to the left cannot win.

Here, each general winning hole 12 is provided with a general winning hole detection switch 12a for detecting winning of a game ball. Then, when it is detected that a game ball has entered the general winning hole 12, a predetermined number of prize balls (for example, 10 game balls) will be paid out from the payout device for paying out game balls. .

At the bottom center of the game area 6, a first starting hole 14 is provided vertically in a row, forming a starting area where game balls hit from the left can win but game balls hit from the right cannot win, and a second starting hole 15 is provided vertically in a row, forming a starting area where game balls hit from the left and game balls hit from the right can win (enter).

The second starting port 15 includes a starting movable piece 15b that constitutes a normal electric accessory (starting port opening/closing device) for facilitating the winning of game balls into the second starting port 15, and a second starting port opening/closing solenoid. 15c, and a closed state (closed mode) in which the movable starting piece 15b stands vertically by the operation of the second starting port opening/closing solenoid 15c and restricts the entry of game balls into the second starting port 15. , the starting movable piece 15b is tilted and controlled to be converted into an open state (open mode) in which the game ball is allowed to enter the second starting port 15. When the second starting port 15 is in the open state, the movable starting piece 15b functions as a tray that guides the game ball to the second starting port 15, so the game ball is more easily directed to the second starting port 15 than when it is in the closed state. The chances of winning a prize (winning ratio) will increase.

The first start hole 14 is provided with a first start hole detection switch 14a for detecting the entry of a game ball, and the second start hole 15 is provided with a second start hole detection switch 15a for detecting the entry of a game ball. When the entry of a game ball into the first start hole 14 or the second start hole 15 is detected, a random number value for jackpot determination is obtained to perform a "jackpot lottery (jackpot determination)" described below.

When the entry of a game ball into the first start hole 14 or the second start hole 15 is detected, in addition to the random number value for determining a jackpot, a random number value for determining a special pattern to determine the special pattern to be displayed as a stop, and a random number value for determining a reach and a random number value for a special pattern change to determine the change time of the special pattern are also obtained. The random number value for determining a jackpot, the random number value for determining a special pattern, the random number value for determining a reach, and the random number value for a special pattern change are called special pattern determination information. The change of the special pattern is called a "change display", and the stop display of the special pattern (completely stopped and displayed without moving) is sometimes called a "confirmed stop display".

Further, when it is detected that a game ball enters the first starting port 14, a predetermined number of prize balls (for example, three game balls) are paid out from the payout device. Further, when it is detected that a game ball enters the second starting port 15, a predetermined number of prize balls (for example, one game ball) are paid out from the payout device. Note that the number of prize balls paid out when a game ball enters the first starting port 14 and the number of prize balls paid out when a game ball enters the second starting port 15 may be the same.

On the left and right sides of the game area 6, there are normal symbol gates 13 that form a normal area through which game balls can pass.

The normal symbol gate 13 is provided with a gate detection switch 13a for detecting the passage (entry) of a gaming ball. When the passage of a gaming ball through the normal symbol gate 13 is detected, a random number value for hit determination is obtained for performing a "hit lottery (hit determination)" described below.

When the passage of the game ball through the normal symbol gate 13 is detected, in addition to the above-mentioned random number value for winning judgment, a random number value for normal symbol judgment to determine the normal symbol to be stopped and a random number value for normal symbol fluctuation to determine the fluctuation time of the normal symbol are also obtained. The random number value for winning judgment, the random number value for normal symbol judgment, and the random number value for normal symbol fluctuation are referred to as normal symbol judgment information.

In the area on the right side of the gaming area 6, there is a first grand prize opening 16 in which a game ball hit to the right can win a prize, but a game ball hit to the left cannot win a prize, and a second grand prize opening. The openings 17 are vertically spaced apart (separated by a width that allows a game ball to pass through).

The first large prize opening 16 has a first large prize opening opening door 16b and a first large prize opening opening solenoid 16c which constitute a first special electric device (first large prize opening opening device) for facilitating the entry of game balls into the first large prize opening 16. By operation of the first large prize opening opening solenoid 16c, the first large prize opening opening door 16b stands approximately vertically and is controlled to switch between a closed state (closed mode) which restricts the entry of game balls into the first large prize opening 16, and an open state (open mode) which allows the entry of game balls into the first large prize opening 16 by tilting the first large prize opening opening door 16b. When the first large prize opening 16 is open, the first large prize opening door 16b functions as a tray that guides game balls to the first large prize opening 16, increasing the chances of game balls winning (winning rate) in the first large prize opening 16 compared to when it is closed.

Here, the first big winning hole 16 is provided with a first big winning hole detection switch 16a for detecting winning of a game ball. Then, when it is detected that a game ball has entered the first big prize opening 16, a preset number of prize balls (for example, 15 game balls) are paid out.

The second large prize opening 17 has a second large prize opening opening door 17b and a second large prize opening opening solenoid 17c which constitute a second special electric device (second large prize opening opening device) for facilitating the entry of game balls into the second large prize opening 17. By operation of the second large prize opening opening solenoid 17c, the second large prize opening opening door 17b stands approximately vertically and is controlled to switch between a closed state (closed mode) which restricts the entry of game balls into the second large prize opening 17, and an open state (open mode) which allows the entry of game balls into the second large prize opening 17 by tilting the second large prize opening opening door 17b. When the second large prize opening 17 is open, the second large prize opening opening door 17b functions as a tray that guides game balls to the second large prize opening 17, increasing the chances of game balls winning (winning rate) at the second large prize opening 17 compared to when it is closed.

The second large prize opening 17 is provided with a second large prize opening detection switch 17a for detecting the entry of a game ball (ball entry). When the entry of a game ball into the second large prize opening 17 is detected, a preset number of prize balls (for example, 15 game balls) are paid out. Note that the number of prize balls paid out when a game ball enters the first large prize opening 16 may be different from the number of prize balls paid out when a game ball enters the second large prize opening 17.

At the bottom of the game area 6, there is an outlet 11 for discharging game balls that have not won (entered) any of the general winning hole 12, the first starting hole 14, the second starting hole 15, the first large winning hole 16, and the second large winning hole 17 out of the game area.

In addition, an image display device 31 configured with an LCD (Liquid Crystal Display) or the like is provided in the center of the play area 6. Note that two or more image display devices 31 may be provided.

This image display device 31 displays customer waiting performance images during waiting when no game is being played, and displays game performance images according to the progress of the game. In particular, in the variable performance described below, three performance patterns 38 (left performance pattern 38a, center performance pattern 38b, right performance pattern 38c) for notifying the result of the lottery for a jackpot are displayed in a variable manner, and a jackpot is notified as the lottery result for a jackpot when a combination of specific performance patterns 38 (e.g., 777, etc.) is displayed as a fixed stop, and a miss is notified as the lottery result for a jackpot when a combination other than the specific performance patterns 38 (e.g., 289, etc.) is displayed as a fixed stop.

This production pattern 38 starts to be displayed in a variable manner in accordance with the start of the variable display of the special symbol that is executed based on the winning (ball entry) of a game ball into the first starting port 14 or the second starting port 15. , A fixed stop display is performed in accordance with the fixed stop display of the special symbol after a predetermined variable time has elapsed. That is, the timing of the variable display of the production pattern 38 and the special symbol and the timing of the fixed stop display of the production pattern 38 and the special symbol correspond to each other. Incidentally, the fact that the performance symbols 38 are being varied is sometimes referred to as a "fluctuating display," and the fact that the performance symbols 38 have stopped fluctuating and displayed in a stopped state is sometimes referred to as a "determined stop display." In addition, in the production pattern 38, a ``temporary stop display'' may be performed before the ``confirmed stop display'', but the ``temporary stop display'' will be described later.

As shown in Figure 43 (b) T1 to T2, etc., one performance pattern 38 is composed of a character image, which is a first component, and a number image, which is a second component.
In addition, in the variable performance described below, the performance pattern 38 has scenes (e.g., T6 to T7 in FIG. 43(c)) consisting of a character image, which is the first component, and a number image, which is the second component, and scenes (e.g., T4 to T5 in FIG. 43(c)) consisting only of the number image, which is the second component.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, even when a game ball enters the first starting port 14 or when a game ball enters the second starting port 15, fluctuations occur. In the performance, the same type of performance symbols 38 are displayed in a variable manner and fixedly stopped. However, when a game ball enters the first starting port 14 and when a game ball enters the second starting port 15, different types of performance symbols 38 are displayed in a variable manner and fixedly stopped. It may be configured as follows. Incidentally, the fluctuating display (fluctuation direction, fluctuating manner) of the performance pattern 38, and performances performed together with the fluctuating display (display performance, sound performance, light emission performance) are sometimes referred to as "fluctuation performance."

Among the combinations of specific effect symbols 38 that indicate a jackpot, the combination "777" is a combination that determines the third jackpot (a combination that can only be selected at the time of the third jackpot) in FIG. 7 described later.
On the other hand, among the combinations of specific performance patterns 38 that indicate a jackpot, combinations other than "777" (for example, "666") are combinations that can result in either the first or third jackpot in Figure 7 described below (combinations that are selected in either the first or third jackpot).
In other words, the "7 symbol" can be said to be a symbol that suggests that a second special game (e.g., a second jackpot) that is more advantageous to the player than the first special game (e.g., a first jackpot) will be played, and a symbol other than the 7 symbol, for example, the "6 symbol," can be said to be a symbol that suggests that the first special game (e.g., a first jackpot) will be played.

In addition, if a combination other than 7 symbols, for example a "6 symbol" combination, is displayed and a jackpot is reached, a predetermined presentation will be used to notify the player during the jackpot game whether the game will enter a low probability game state or a high probability game state after the jackpot game ends.

In addition, on the lower right side of the display section of the image display device 31, three small performance patterns 38d (see FIG. 43, etc.) for notifying the lottery result of the jackpot in the variable performance are displayed by scrolling vertically (from top to bottom in this embodiment).

The display of the small effect pattern 38d begins in response to the start of the display of the first or second special pattern, and ends in response to the stop of the display of the first or second special pattern. In other words, the display of the small effect pattern 38d is performed in response to the display of the first or second special pattern, and the execution status of the display of the first or second special pattern is notified (suggested) to the player by the state of the change in the small effect pattern 38d.

In addition, like the performance pattern 38, the small performance pattern 38d is composed of, for example, a pattern showing numbers from "1" to "9", and in the fixed stop display of the small performance pattern 38d, the small performance pattern is It is designed to stop for a predetermined period of time in a predetermined mode (loss mode, jackpot mode, etc.) indicating the result of the jackpot lottery. The jackpot mode (special result mode) is a combination of the same small effect symbols 38d such as "777" or a combination of regular small effect symbols 38d such as "357", and the losing mode is a combination of small effect symbols 38d with regularity such as "357". This is an aspect other than that.
It should be noted that the small presentation pattern 38d is a pattern with a smaller display size compared to the presentation pattern 38. For example, the display size etc. of the effect pattern 38 may change before reaching SP reach and after reaching SP reach, but even if the display size changes, the size of the small effect pattern 38d may change. The relationship remains unchanged. That is, the small effect pattern 38d is always a pattern whose display size is smaller than the effect pattern 38.
Note that the small effect pattern 38d may always be displayed in a larger size than the effect pattern 38, or the small effect pattern 38d may be displayed in a larger size than the effect pattern 38.

In addition, the display area of the image display device 31 is provided with a reserved icon display area 31b for displaying, as an icon, the first special pattern reserved number (U1) indicating the number of special pattern determination information for which the jackpot lottery (jackpot determination) has not been executed (not yet determined) among the special pattern determination information obtained based on the entry of a gaming ball into the first starting hole 14, so that the player can easily grasp it, and a reserved icon display area 31b for displaying, as an icon, the second special pattern reserved number (U2) indicating the number of special pattern determination information for which the jackpot lottery (jackpot determination) has not been executed (not yet determined) among the special pattern determination information obtained based on the entry of a gaming ball into the second starting hole 15, so that the player can easily grasp it, and a variable icon display area 31a for displaying, as an icon, the information indicating the special pattern determination information in which a variable display (variable performance) is being executed, so that the player can easily grasp it (see FIG. 43, etc.).

Although the description is omitted in FIG. 43 etc., when both the first special symbol reservation number (U1) and the second special symbol reservation number (U2) exist, one of the respective reservation icons is displayed in the reservation icon display area 31b. The parts are displayed overlapping each other. In addition, the reservation icon display area 31b may be provided for the first special symbol reservation number (U1) and the second special symbol reservation number (U2), respectively.

In addition, in the following explanation, the icon displayed in the pending icon display area 31b is referred to as the "pending icon (special figure determination information for which jackpot determination has not been performed and corresponds to pending information)" and the icon displayed in the variable icon display area 31a. The displayed icon is referred to as "the relevant variable icon (special figure determination information for which the jackpot determination has been executed and the variable display (variable effect) is being executed, and corresponds to execution information)".

The decorative member 7 surrounding the display area of the image display device 31 is provided with a wall portion standing up from the game board 2 on its outer periphery so that the game ball does not pass in front of the display area of the image display device 31. It is being

In addition, board lighting devices 34a having multiple lamps (LEDs, etc.) are provided on both the left and right sides of the decorative member 7, a first decorative member 33a (a special feature) imitating a "signboard" with the title (model name) of the gaming machine 1 is provided on the top of the decorative member 7, and a second decorative member 33b (a special feature) imitating a "sword" is provided on the right side of the decorative member 7.

This first decorative member 33a is driven by a panel drive device 33 composed of a solenoid, a motor, etc., and can move vertically (actuate from an initial position to an operating position). By movement, it can be moved to the front of the image display device 31 (operated from the initial position to the operating position). Similarly, the second decorative member 33b is also driven by the board drive device 33, and can be moved to the front of the image display device 31 by falling to the left using the lower part of the second decorative member 33b as a fulcrum. The second decorative member 33b is composed of a sheath portion 33b1 imitating a sheath and a blade portion 33b2 housed in the sheath, and the blade portion is driven by the board drive device 33 to move in the vertical direction ( from the initial position to the operating position).

Note that a liquid crystal display may be provided on at least one of the first decorative member 33a and the second decorative member 33b, and at least one of the pending icon display area and the variable icon display area may be provided on the liquid crystal display. The reserved icon display area may be provided on one of the liquid crystal display provided on the decorative member 33a and the liquid crystal display provided on the second decorative member 33b, and the variable icon display area may be provided on the other.

The first special symbol display device 20 displays the first special symbol for a predetermined period of time to display the lottery result (judgment result) of a jackpot lottery (jackpot determination) that is executed based on the winning of a game ball into the first starting port 14. The first special symbol of the type corresponding to the lottery result is displayed in a variable manner, and then the first special symbol of the type corresponding to the lottery result is permanently displayed.

The second special symbol display device 21 displays the lottery result (judgment result) of the jackpot lottery (jackpot determination) executed based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 15, and displays the second special symbol for a predetermined period of time. The notification is made by displaying the second special symbol of the type corresponding to the lottery result in a fixed manner after being displayed in a variable manner, and is composed of a plurality of lighting members such as LEDs.

The first special symbol display device 20 and/or the second special symbol display device 21 can also be constituted by a 7-segment LED. For example, if the player wins a jackpot, the number "7" may be permanently displayed, and if the player loses, the number "-" may be displayed.

Here, the "jackpot lottery" refers to the process (jackpot determination) of obtaining a random number value for jackpot determination when a gaming ball enters (enters) the first starting hole 14 or the second starting hole 15, and determining whether the obtained random number value for jackpot determination is a random number value corresponding to a "jackpot."

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, a "jackpot" refers to a jackpot game ( This means that the player has acquired the right to play a special game that is advantageous to the player.

In the "jackpot game", a round game in which the first big prize opening 16 (first special electric accessory) or the second big prize opening 17 (second special electric accessory) is opened is played with a special electric accessory. A predetermined number of times (for example, 2 times or 16 times) is performed by operating the accessory continuous operation device for continuously operating the .

A predetermined time is set for the maximum opening time (operating time of the special electric accessory) of the first big winning hole 16 or the second big winning hole 17 in each round game, and during this time the first big winning hole When a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 9 balls) enter the winning hole 16 or the second large winning hole 17, one round game ends. In other words, a "jackpot game" is a game in which a game ball enters the first grand prize opening 16 or the second grand prize opening 17 and the player can win a prize ball corresponding to the entered ball. It is. In addition, in this embodiment, multiple types of jackpot games are provided, which will be described in detail later.

In addition, even if a game ball enters the first start hole 14 or the second start hole 15 during the changing display of special symbols or during a jackpot game (special game), if the jackpot lottery cannot be held immediately, the right to the jackpot lottery will be reserved under certain conditions.

More specifically, the special symbol determination information obtained when the game ball enters (enters) the first starting hole 14 is stored as a first reservation up to a maximum of four pieces, and the special symbol determination information obtained when the game ball enters (enters) the second starting hole 15 is stored as a second reservation up to a maximum of four pieces. The first special symbol reservation number (U1), which is the number of first reservations, and the second special symbol reservation number (U2), which is the number of second reservations, are displayed on the first special symbol reservation indicator 23 and the second special symbol reservation indicator 24, respectively.

When there is one first reserve, the leftmost LED of the first special pattern reserve display 23 lights up, and when there are two first reserves, the two leftmost LEDs of the first special pattern reserve display 23 lights up. When there are three first reserves, the three leftmost LEDs of the first special pattern reserve display 23 flash and the rightmost LED lights up, and when there are four first reserves, the four leftmost LEDs of the first special pattern reserve display 23 lights up. Similarly, the second special pattern reserve display 24 also displays the number of second reserves in the same manner as above.

The normal symbol display device 22, which is provided outside the game area 6 of the game board 2, notifies the result (judgment result) of the winning lottery (winning judgment) that is triggered by the passing of the game ball through the normal symbol gate 13 by displaying normal symbols in a variable manner for a predetermined period of time and then displaying a normal symbol of the type corresponding to the lottery result in a static manner, and is composed of multiple lighting members such as LEDs.

Here, the "winning lottery" means that when a game ball passes through the normal symbol gate 13, a random number value for hit determination is acquired, and the acquired random number value for hit determination is a random number value that corresponds to a "win". Refers to the process of determining whether or not the item is true (hit determination).

In this embodiment, a "win" refers to the player gaining the right to play an advantageous auxiliary game in a winning lottery that is executed based on the game ball passing through the normal symbol gate 13. In an "auxiliary game", the start movable piece 15b of the second start hole 15 is controlled to be converted to an open state for a predetermined period of time. In other words, an "auxiliary game" is a game in which a game ball enters (wins) the second start hole 15 and the player can win prize balls corresponding to the win. Note that in this embodiment, multiple types of auxiliary games are provided, which will be described in detail later.

In addition, as with special symbols, under certain conditions, if a game ball passes through the normal symbol gate 13 and a winning lottery cannot be performed immediately during the fluctuating display of the normal symbol or during auxiliary games, The right to draw a winning lottery ticket is reserved.

More specifically, the normal symbol determination information obtained when the game ball passes through the normal symbol gate 13 is stored as the third reservation up to a maximum of four pieces. The number of normal symbol reservations (G), which is the number of third reservations, is displayed on the normal symbol reservation indicator 25 in a manner similar to that of the first special symbol reservation indicator 23 and the second special symbol reservation indicator 24.

As shown in FIG. 2, the glass frame 50 supports a glass plate 52 that visibly covers the playing area 6 at the front (player side) of the playing board 2. The glass plate 52 is removably fixed to the glass frame 50.

The glass frame 50 is connected to an outer frame 60 via a hinge mechanism section 51 at one end side in the left-right direction (for example, on the left side when facing the gaming machine 1), and the glass frame 50 is connected to an outer frame 60 via a hinge mechanism section 51. The other end side (for example, the right side when directly facing the gaming machine 1) can be rotated in a direction in which the outer frame 60 is opened. The glass frame 50 covers the game board 2 together with the glass plate 52, and can open the inner part of the outer frame 60 including the game board 2 by rotating like a door about the hinge mechanism part 51 as a fulcrum.

A locking mechanism is provided on the other left-right end of the glass frame 50 to secure the other end of the glass frame 50 to the outer frame 60. The locking mechanism can be released with a special key. The glass frame 50 is also provided with a door opening switch 133 that detects whether the glass frame 50 is released from the outer frame 60.

As shown in FIG. 3, the rear surface of the gaming machine 1 is provided with a main control board 110, a performance control board 120, a payout control board 130, a power supply board 140, a game information output terminal board 30, etc. In addition, the power supply board 140 is provided with a power plug 141 for supplying power to the gaming machine 1, and a power switch (not shown).

(Overall block diagram of gaming machine 1)
Next, a control means for controlling the progress of a game will be described with reference to the overall block diagram of the gaming machine 1 in Fig. 4. Fig. 4 is an overall block diagram of the gaming machine 1.

The main control board 110 controls the basic operation (progress) of the game, inputs various detection signals such as the first starting opening detection switch 14a, and inputs various detection signals such as the first starting opening detection switch 14a and the first special symbol display device 20 and the first winning opening opening/closing solenoid 16c. etc. to control the game.

This main control board 110 is connected to the performance control board 120, the payout control board 130, and the power supply board 140. Communication between the main control board 110 and the performance control board 120 is configured to allow data to be communicated in only one direction, from the main control board 110 to the performance control board 120, while communication between the main control board 110 and the payout control board 130 is configured to allow data to be communicated in both directions. In addition, the main control board 110 inputs power supply voltage from the power supply board 140.

The main control board 110 also includes at least a main CPU 110a that performs arithmetic processing, a main ROM 110b that stores game control programs and various data and tables required for game control, and a one-chip microcomputer 110m that incorporates a main RAM 110c that serves as a work area during arithmetic processing, an input port and an output port (not shown) for main control, and a RAM clear switch 111a.

To this main control input port, the payout control board 130, the general winning hole detection switch 12a that detects when a game ball enters the general winning hole 12, the gate detection switch 13a that detects when a game ball passes through the normal symbol gate 13, the first start hole detection switch 14a that detects when a game ball enters the first start hole 14, the second start hole detection switch 15a that detects when a game ball enters the second start hole 15, the first large winning hole detection switch 16a that detects when a game ball enters the first large winning hole 16, the second large winning hole detection switch 17a that detects when a game ball enters the second large winning hole 17, and the RAM clear switch 111a for inputting a signal to clear the contents of the main RAM 110c are connected. Various signals are input to the main control board 110 through this main control input port.

In addition, the output port for main control includes a performance control board 120, a payout control board 130, a second start opening/closing solenoid 15c that opens and closes the start movable piece 15b of the second start opening 15, a first large prize opening opening/closing solenoid 16c that operates the first large prize opening opening/closing door 16b, a second large prize opening opening opening/closing solenoid 17c that operates the second large prize opening opening opening/closing door 17b, a first special pattern display device 20 and a second special pattern display device 21 that display special patterns, and a normal pattern display device that displays normal patterns. 22, a first special symbol reserved indicator 23 and a second special symbol reserved indicator 24 that display the number of reserved special symbols, a normal symbol reserved indicator 25 that displays the number of reserved normal symbols, a round number indicator 66 that displays the corresponding number of rounds when multiple round numbers are provided, a right-hit indicator 67 that notifies the player that the ball will be fired toward the right area of the play area 6 in a time-saving play state or a high-probability play state, and a game information output terminal board 30 that outputs external information signals are connected. Various signals are output by this main control output port.

The main CPU 110a reads the program stored in the main ROM 110b and performs arithmetic processing based on input signals from each detection switch and timer, and also directly controls each device and display, or uses the results of the arithmetic processing. Send commands to other boards accordingly.

In addition to the game control program, the main ROM 110b contains a jackpot determination table used for jackpot lottery (see Figure 5), a special symbol determination table (see Figure 6) for determining the special symbol to be displayed as a fixed stop, and a jackpot determination table (see Figure 6). A setting data table at the end of the jackpot game to determine the gaming state after the end (see Figure 7), a special electric accessory operation mode determination table (see Figure 8) that determines the opening/closing conditions of the big prize opening opening/closing door, and a big prize A mouth opening mode determination table (see FIG. 9), a special symbol fluctuation pattern determination table (see FIG. 10) that determines the fluctuation pattern of special symbols, a hit determination table (see FIG. 11) that is referred to in the winning lottery, etc. are stored. There is. Note that the above-mentioned tables are merely listed as examples of characteristic tables among the tables in this embodiment, and many other tables and programs (not shown) may be provided in the course of the game. ing.

The main RAM 110c includes a special pattern special electric processing data storage area, a general pattern general electric processing data storage area, a normal pattern reservation number (G) storage area, a normal pattern reservation storage area, a stopped general pattern data storage area, and a first special pattern reservation. number (U1) storage area, second special symbol retention number (U2) storage area, first random number storage area for jackpot determination, second random number storage area for jackpot determination, number of round games (R) storage area, number of openings (K) Storage area, big winning opening winning ball counter (C) Storage area, 2nd starting opening winning ball counter (D), starting opening number counter, high probability game flag storage area, time saving game flag storage area, high probability game Number of times (X) storage area, number of time-saving games (J) storage area, game status buffer, stop special pattern data storage area, stop regular pattern data storage area, production transmission data storage area, special symbol time counter, special game timer counter , various timer counters such as an auxiliary game timer counter are provided. Note that the storage area described above is only an example, and many other storage areas are provided.

The game information output terminal board 30 is a board for outputting external information signals generated in the main control board 110 and the payout control board 130 to a hall computer or the like of a game parlor. The game information output terminal board 30 is connected to the main control board 110 by wiring, and is provided with a plurality of connectors (terminals) for connecting external information to a hall computer of a game parlor or the like.

The performance control board 120 is a slave control board (slave control means) that controls the performance related to the game (performed in the gaming machine 1) based on the reception of performance commands from the main control board 110. The performance control board 120 is equipped with a sub-CPU 120a that performs arithmetic processing, a sub-ROM 120b that stores a performance control program, a performance control unit 120m that includes a sub-RAM 120c that serves as a work area during arithmetic processing, a display/audio control unit 150 that controls the image display device 31 and audio output device 32 (speaker), etc., a lamp/drive control unit 160 that controls the board lighting device 34a, frame lighting device 34b, board drive device 33, performance button drive motor 35b, etc., input ports and output ports for performance control, etc.

The sub-CPU 120a receives an operating clock from a crystal oscillator, reads out the game program stored in the sub-ROM 120b, and performs calculation processing related to the presentation while utilizing the sub-RAM 120c as a work area, thereby controlling (outputting data and commands) the various control units (display/audio control unit 150, lamp/drive control unit 160) to execute various presentations in response to commands received from the main control board 110 and input signals from the presentation button detection switch 35a and the cross button detection switch 36b.

When the sub-CPU 120a receives a variation pattern designation command indicating the variation mode of the special symbol from the main control board 110, it analyzes the contents of the received variation pattern designation command and determines performance data (such as the performance pattern designation command described below) for causing the image display device 31, the audio output device 32, the board drive device 33, the board lighting device 34a, the frame lighting device 34b, and the performance button drive motor 35b to execute a specified performance. Then, it transmits the determined performance data to the display/audio control unit 150 and the lamp/drive control unit 160, thereby controlling the execution of the variable performance.

In addition to the program for effect control, the sub ROM 120b stores a variable effect pattern determination table for determining a variable effect pattern for executing a variable effect, and the like. Note that the above-mentioned tables are merely listed as examples of characteristic tables among the tables in this embodiment, and many other tables and programs (not shown) may be provided in the course of the game. ing.

The sub-RAM 120c functions as a data work area during arithmetic processing by the sub-CPU 120a, and has a plurality of storage areas.

The input port of the performance control board 120 is connected to a performance button detection switch 35a, a cross button detection switch 36b, and the like. When a performance button detection signal indicating that the performance button 35 has been operated is input from the performance button detection switch 35a, or a cross button detection signal indicating that the cross button 36 has been operated (up button detection signal, left button detection signal, down button detection signal, right button detection signal) is input from the cross button detection switch 36b, the performance control board 120 performs processing to execute a performance corresponding to the detection signal.

Here, by operating the up and down buttons of the cross button 36, it is possible to "adjust the volume" to adjust the volume of the background music, sound effects, etc. output from the audio output device 32. For example, the volume value can be adjusted in a range of five levels, from the lowest volume value "1" to the highest volume value "5". Also, it is configured so that the volume value can be increased in stages by operating the up button, and decreased in stages by operating the down button.

In addition, by operating the left and right buttons of the cross button 36, it is possible to "adjust the light intensity" to adjust the light intensity of the various LEDs of the board illumination device 34a and the frame illumination device 34b, and the light intensity of the backlight of the image display device 31. For example, the light intensity value can be adjusted in a range of five levels, from the lowest light intensity value "1" to the highest light intensity value "5". In addition, the light intensity value is configured to be increased in stages by operating the right button, and decreased in stages by operating the left button.

The display/audio control unit 150 receives commands from the production control unit 120m, and controls the image display device 31 to display a predetermined image, and the audio output device 32 to output a predetermined sound. do.

The display/audio control unit 150 includes an overall CPU 152 that performs arithmetic processing, an overall ROM 153 that stores an overall control program, an overall control unit 151 that includes an overall RAM 154 that serves as a work area during arithmetic processing, an image control unit 155 consisting of a VDP (Video Display Processor) as an image processor, a CGROM 156 that stores image data and the like, a VRAM 157 that is provided inside the image control unit 155 and has a frame buffer or the like that temporarily stores drawing data generated from image data, an audio control unit 158 as an audio processor, an audio ROM 159 that stores audio data and the like, and input/output ports, etc.

The general CPU 152 receives the operation clock from the crystal oscillator, reads out the display control program stored in the general ROM 153, and performs arithmetic processing related to the effect while utilizing the general RAM 154 as a work area, thereby executing the operation clock received from the effect control unit 120m. In response to production instruction commands and the like, it controls the image control unit 155 and the audio control unit 158 to execute various productions (outputs data and commands).

The general ROM 153 is composed of a mask ROM etc., and stores a display control program for displaying images, a display list generation program for generating a display list consisting of a group of drawing control commands, animation patterns for displaying animations of performance patterns, animation scene information, etc.

This animation pattern is referenced when displaying the animation that constitutes the specific content of the image-based production, and the animation pattern is associated with animation scene information and the display order of each animation scene. The animation scene information includes various information such as wait frames (display time), target data (sprite identification number, source address, etc.), drawing parameters (sprite display position, display magnification, transparency, etc.), drawing method, and duty ratio, which is a parameter for the brightness of the image display device 31.

The image control unit 155 is connected to a CGROM 156 in which various image data is stored, and generates drawing data that is the source of a video signal (RGB signal, etc.) based on commands (display list, drawing commands, etc.) from the overall control unit 151 (overall CPU 152) and the image data stored in the CGROM 156. The image data is material data that represents individual images such as the image (frame) to be displayed on the image display device 31, for example, the performance pattern image, the background image that constitutes the background of the performance pattern, the character image, and the dialogue image. On the other hand, the drawing data is composite data that represents the image of the entire frame that is composed of individual images compounded (superimposed).

The CGROM 156 is composed of flash memory, EEPROM, EPROM, mask ROM, etc., and compresses and stores image data (sprite, movie), etc., which is a collection of pixel information in a predetermined range of pixels (for example, 32 x 32 pixels). ing. Note that the pixel information is composed of color number information that specifies a color number for each pixel and an α value that indicates the transparency of the image. The CGROM 156 is read out in units of image data by the image control unit 155, and image processing is performed in units of image data of this frame.

CGROM 156 also stores uncompressed palette data in which color number information that specifies a color number is associated with display color information for actually displaying the color. Note that CGROM 156 may be configured to compress only a portion of the image data, rather than compressing all of it. Movie compression methods may include various well-known compression methods, such as MPEG4.

The VRAM 157 is composed of an SRAM that can write or read image data at high speed. This VRAM 157 has a display list storage area for temporarily storing a display list output from the overall control unit 151 (overall CPU 152), a frame buffer area corresponding to the image display device 31, and the like.

This frame buffer area is a storage area for drawing or displaying images, and further includes a first frame buffer area and a second frame buffer area. The first frame buffer area and the second frame buffer area are alternately switched to a "drawing frame buffer" and a "display frame buffer" each time drawing starts.

Therefore, the image control unit 155 draws the drawing data stored in the CGROM 156 in the “drawing frame buffer” of the frame buffer area of the VRAM 157 based on the instruction (display list) from the overall control unit 151 (the overall CPU 152). , reads drawing data from the "display frame buffer" in the frame buffer area, generates a video signal (RGB signal, etc.) based on the read drawing data, and outputs it to the image display device 31 to display various images. .

The image control unit 155 receives an operating clock from a crystal oscillator, and by dividing the operating clock, generates synchronization signals (horizontal synchronization signal and vertical synchronization signal) for synchronizing with the image display device 31, and outputs them to the image display device 31. In this embodiment, the frame rate of the image control unit 155 is 30 fps (1/30 sec = approximately 33 ms) so that 30 drawings (image displays) are performed per second, but it may also be 60 fps (1/60 sec = approximately 16.6 ms) so that 60 drawings (image displays) are performed per second.

Further, a general-purpose board 39 is connected between the image control section 155 and the image display device 31, which converts image data into a predetermined image format and outputs the converted image data. The general-purpose board 39 has a bridge function that converts image data into an image format compatible with the performance of the image display device 31 that displays the image data. It absorbs the difference in resolution between when connected and when an XGA (1024 dots x 768 dots) 17-inch liquid crystal display device is connected.

The audio control unit 158 is connected to the audio output device 32, and controls the audio output device 32 to output audio data, music data (BGM, SE), etc. in accordance with the display on the image display device 31, based on various performance data (including commands) sent from the performance control unit 120m.

The lamp/drive control unit 160 includes a lamp CPU 160a that performs arithmetic processing, a lamp ROM 160b that stores a lamp/drive control program, a lamp RAM 160c that serves as a work area during arithmetic processing, and input/output ports.

The lamp CPU 160a receives an operating clock from a crystal oscillator, reads out the lamp and drive control program stored in the lamp ROM 160b, and performs calculation processing related to the performance while using the lamp RAM 160c as a work area, thereby controlling (outputting data and commands) the controlled devices such as various lighting devices and various drive devices to perform a specified performance in accordance with the performance instruction commands received from the performance control unit 120m.

A board lighting device 34a, a frame lighting device 34b, a board drive device 33, and a production button drive motor 35b are connected to the input/output ports of the lamp/drive control unit, and are connected to the production control unit 120m (sub CPU 120a). Based on the various kinds of effect data (including commands) sent, lighting control of various LEDs of the board lighting device 34a and the frame lighting device 34b is performed to perform light emitting effects, etc. By controlling drive sources such as the motor of the button drive motor 35b and a solenoid, motion effects (the movement effects described above), etc. are performed.

The payout control board 130 includes a payout control section 131 that controls the payout of game balls, and a launch control section 132 that controls the launch of the game balls.

This payout control board 130 is connected to the main control board 110 and the power supply board 140, and as described above, the communication between the payout control board 130 and the main control board 110 is configured so that data can be communicated in both directions. The payout control board 130 receives power supply voltage from the power supply board 140.

The payout control unit 131 is composed of a one-chip microcomputer including a payout CPU 131a, a payout ROM 131b, and a payout RAM 131c.

The payout CPU 131a reads out the program stored in the payout ROM 131b and performs calculations based on input signals from the payout ball count detection switch 135, which detects whether game balls have been paid out, the door opening switch 133, and the timer, and transmits corresponding payout data to the main control board 110 based on this processing.

The output side of the payout control board 130 is connected to a payout motor 134 of a payout device for paying out a predetermined number of game balls from the game ball storage section. The payout CPU 131a reads out a predetermined program from the payout ROM 131b and performs calculation processing based on a payout number designation command sent from the main control board 110, and controls the payout motor 134 of the payout device to pay out a predetermined number of game balls. At this time, the payout RAM 131c functions as a data work area during the calculation processing of the payout CPU 131a.

The firing control unit 132 has a touch sensor 3a and a firing volume 3b connected to its input side, and a firing solenoid 4a and a ball feeding solenoid 4b to its output side. The firing control unit 132 inputs the touch signal from the touch sensor 3a, and controls the firing solenoid 4a and the ball feed solenoid 4b to be energized based on the voltage supplied from the firing volume 3b.

The touch sensor 3a is provided inside the operating handle 3 and is composed of a capacitance-type proximity switch that utilizes the change in capacitance caused by the player touching the operating handle 3. When the touch sensor 3a detects that the player has touched the operating handle 3, it outputs a touch signal to the launch control unit 132 to allow the launch solenoid 4a to be energized. As a basic premise, the launch control unit 132 is configured not to launch the game ball 200 into the game area 6 unless a touch signal is input from the touch sensor 3a.

The launch volume 3b is directly connected to the rotating part where the operating handle 3 rotates, and is composed of a variable resistor. The launch volume 3b divides the constant voltage (e.g., 5V) applied to the launch volume 3b using the variable resistor, and supplies the divided voltage to the launch control unit 132 (varies the voltage supplied to the launch control unit 132). The launch control unit 132 energizes the launch solenoid 4a based on the voltage divided by the launch volume 3b, and rotates the firing member 4c directly connected to the launch solenoid 4a, thereby launching the game ball 200 into the game area 6.

The firing solenoid 4a is composed of a rotary solenoid, and the firing solenoid 4a is directly connected to the striking member 4c, and the rotation of the firing solenoid 4a rotates the striking member 4c.

The rotation speed of the launch solenoid 4a is set to approximately 99.9 (times/minute) based on the frequency based on the output cycle of the crystal oscillator provided in the launch control unit 132. As a result, the number of games launched per minute is approximately 99.9 (games/minute), since one game ball is launched each time the launch solenoid rotates once. In other words, one game ball is launched approximately every 0.6 seconds.

The ball feeding solenoid 4b is composed of a straight-moving solenoid, and sends out the game balls in the receiving tray 40 one by one toward the hitting member 4c directly connected to the firing solenoid 4a.

The power supply board 140 is equipped with a backup power supply consisting of a capacitor, supplies power supply voltage to the gaming machine 1, monitors the power supply voltage supplied to the gaming machine 1, and when the power supply voltage falls below a predetermined value, A power outage detection signal is output to the main control board 110. More specifically, when the power interruption detection signal becomes high level, the main CPU 110a becomes operational, and when the power interruption detection signal becomes low level, the main CPU 110a becomes inactive. Note that the backup power source is not limited to a capacitor, but may be a battery, for example, or a combination of a capacitor and a battery may be used.

(Explanation of gaming status)
Next, the game state when the game progresses will be explained. In this embodiment, the state regarding the jackpot lottery includes a "low probability gaming state" and the "high probability gaming state", and the state regarding the movable starting piece 15b of the second starting port 15 includes a "non-time saving gaming state". It has a "time saving gaming state". The states related to this jackpot lottery (low probability gaming state, high probability gaming state) and the states related to the starting movable piece 15b (non-time-saving gaming state, time-saving gaming state) can be related to each other, or can be independent. can. In other words,
(1) "Low probability time saving gaming state" which is a low probability gaming state and time saving gaming state;
(2) “Low probability non-time saving gaming state” which is a low probability gaming state and non-time saving gaming state;
(3) “High probability time saving gaming state” which is a high probability gaming state and time saving gaming state;
(4) It becomes possible to provide a "high probability non-time-saving gaming state" which is a high-probability gaming state and a non-time-saving gaming state.
Note that the gaming state when the game is started, that is, the initial gaming state of the gaming machine 1, is set to the "low probability non-time saving gaming state", and this gaming state is referred to as the "normal gaming state" in this embodiment. I will call it . Furthermore, the "low probability time-saving gaming state" will be referred to as the "time-saving gaming state" in this embodiment. Furthermore, the "high probability time saving gaming state" will be referred to as the "high probability gaming state" in this embodiment. Note that the "normal gaming state" and the "time-saving gaming state" may be collectively referred to as the "low probability gaming state."

In this embodiment, the "low probability game state" refers to a game state in which the probability of winning a jackpot is set low, for example, to 1/300, in a jackpot lottery that is held on the condition that a game ball has entered the first starting hole 14 or the second starting hole 15. In contrast, the "high probability game state" refers to a game state in which the probability of winning a jackpot is improved compared to the low probability game state, and the probability of winning a jackpot is set high, for example, to 1/60. Therefore, in the "high probability game state," it is easier to win a jackpot than in the "low probability game state." Note that the change from the low probability game state to the high probability game state is made after the end of the jackpot game, which will be described later.

In this embodiment, the "non-time-saving game state" means that in the winning lottery executed based on the passage of a game ball to the normal symbol gate 13, the average fluctuation time of the normal symbols corresponding to the lottery result is "non-time-saving game state". This refers to a gaming state in which the opening time of the second starting port 15 when a winning is won is likely to be set to be shorter than the "state". For example, when a game ball passes through the normal symbol gate 13, a winning lottery is carried out, and a variable display of the normal symbol is performed on the normal symbol display device 22, but the normal symbol is displayed for 30 seconds after the variable display starts. Stop and display after. If the lottery result is a win, the second starting port 15 is controlled to be open for 0.2 seconds after the normal symbol is stopped and displayed.

In contrast, the "time-saving game state" refers to a game state in which, in a winning lottery executed based on the passage of a game ball through the normal pattern gate 13, the average fluctuation time of the normal pattern corresponding to the lottery result is set shorter than in the "non-time-saving game state," and the opening time of the second start port 15 when a winning lottery is won is set to, for example, 3 seconds, longer than in the "non-time-saving game state." Furthermore, in the "non-time-saving game state," the probability of winning a winning lottery is set low, for example, 1/16, while in the "time-saving game state," the probability of winning a winning lottery is set high, for example, 15/16. Therefore, in the "time-saving game state," when a game ball passes through the normal pattern gate 13, the second start port 15 is more easily controlled to an open state than in the "non-time-saving game state." As a result, in the "time-saving game state," the player can play the game while reducing the consumption of game balls.

In addition, in the embodiment, the "time-saving gaming state" is set so that the fluctuation time of the normal symbol, the opening time of the second starting port 15, and the winning probability of the winning lottery are more advantageous than the "non-time-saving gaming state". It is set. However, the "time-saving gaming state" may be set so that only one of the variation time of the normal symbol, the opening time of the second starting port 15, and the winning probability of the winning lottery is advantageous.

Next, the various tables stored in main ROM 110b will be described in detail with reference to Figures 5 to 12.

(Jackpot Judgment Table for Jackpot Lottery)
Fig. 5 is a diagram showing a jackpot determination table. Specifically, Fig. 5(a) is a jackpot determination table for a jackpot lottery triggered by a game ball entering the first starting hole 14, and Fig. 5(b) is a jackpot determination table for a jackpot lottery triggered by a game ball entering the second starting hole 15. The jackpot probability is the same in the tables of Fig. 5(a) and Fig. 5(b).

As shown in Figures 5(a) and 5(b), the jackpot determination table associates probability game states, random numbers for jackpot determination, and jackpot determination results.

The main CPU 110a refers to the jackpot determination table for the jackpot lottery shown in FIGS. 5(a) and 5(b), and determines that it is a "jackpot" based on the current probability game state and the acquired random value for jackpot determination. or “lost”.

For example, according to the jackpot determination table for the jackpot lottery shown in FIG. 5(a), when the game is in a low probability game state, the two random numbers for jackpot determination, "7" and "8," are determined to be jackpots. On the other hand, when the game is in a high probability game state, the ten random numbers for jackpot determination, from "7" to "16," are determined to be jackpots. If the random number is any other than the above, it is determined to be a "miss."

Therefore, since the random number range for jackpot determination random numbers is from 0 to 599, the probability that it will be determined as a jackpot in the low probability gaming state is 1/300, and the probability that it will be determined as a jackpot in the high probability gaming state is 1/300. The probability is increased by 5 times to 1/60.

(Special design determination table)
FIG. 6 is a diagram showing a special symbol determination table for determining the type of special symbol that is fixed and displayed as a result of the variable display. Specifically, FIG. 6(a) is a special symbol determination table for a loss, and FIG. 6(b) is a special symbol determination table for a jackpot.

As shown in FIG. 6(a), the special symbol determination table in case of a loss includes the type of special symbol display device and information obtained when the game ball enters the first starting port 14 or the second starting port 15. The special symbol determination random number value and the losing special symbol (stop special symbol data) are associated with each other. In addition, a plurality of loss special symbols and a random number value for special symbol determination may be associated with each other so that a plurality of special symbols can be determined even in the case of a loss.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 6(b), the special symbol determination table for the jackpot includes the type of special symbol display device (the type of starting hole where the game ball won) and the first starting hole 14 or the second starting hole. A special symbol determination random number value obtained when a game ball enters the mouth 15 is associated with a jackpot special symbol (stop special symbol data).

The main CPU 110a refers to the special symbol determination table shown in FIG. 6 and determines the type of special symbol (stop special symbol data) based on the type of special symbol display device, random number value for special symbol determination, etc.

Then, when the special symbols start changing, a performance symbol designation command is determined as special symbol information based on the determined special symbol type (stop special symbol data). Here, each production design designation command is composed of 2 bytes of data, including 1 byte of MODE data to identify the classification of the control command, and 1 byte of DATA indicating the content of the control command to be executed. It consists of data. This also applies to the variation pattern designation command, etc., which will be described later.

Here, as will be described later, the type of special symbol (stop special symbol data) determines the gaming state after the end of the jackpot game (see Figure 7) and the type of jackpot game (see Figure 8). It can be said that the type of special symbol determines the gaming state after the jackpot game and the type of jackpot game. Therefore, in the column of special symbols in FIG. 6(b), explanations corresponding to the types of jackpot games are supplementarily described.

(Setting data table at the end of a big win game)
FIG. 7 is a setting data table for determining the game state after the end of a big win game.

As shown in FIG. 7, the jackpot game end setting data table associates the special stop pattern data, game state buffer, time-saving game state, number of time-saving games (J), probability game state, and number of high-probability games (X).

Here, the "gaming state buffer" is information indicating the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot. The gaming state is composed of a combination of a time-saving gaming state (or a non-time-saving gaming state) and a high-probability gaming state (or a low-probability gaming state).

Specifically, if the game state buffer is "00H", it indicates game state information of a low probability game state and a non-time-saving game state where both the time-saving game flag and the high probability game flag are not set (i.e., a normal game state). If the game state buffer is "01H", it indicates game state information of a high probability game state and a non-time-saving game state where the time-saving game flag is not set but the high probability game flag is set. If the game state buffer is "02H", it indicates game state information of a low probability game state and a time-saving game state where the time-saving game flag is set but the high probability game flag is not set (i.e., a time-saving game state). If the game state buffer is "03H", it indicates game state information of a high probability game state and a time-saving game state where both the time-saving game flag and the high probability game flag are set (i.e., a high probability game state). In addition, with the gaming machine specifications (specs) in this embodiment, the gaming state buffer will never become "01H", but if the gaming machine specifications (specs) include a so-called "latent probability change" in which the game is in a high probability gaming state but no visible notification is given, the gaming state buffer may become "01H".

The main CPU 110a refers to the jackpot game end setting data table shown in FIG. 7, and determines the time-saving game state, the number of time-saving games (J), and the probability based on the stop special symbol data of the special symbol and the game state buffer. Determine the gaming state and the number of high probability games (X).

The features of the jackpot play end setting data table shown in FIG. 7 in this embodiment are that the "first jackpot" is awarded 100 times as the number of time-saving play times (J) and 0 times as the number of high-probability play times (X), the "second jackpot" is awarded 10,000 times as the number of time-saving play times (J) and 10,000 times as the number of high-probability play times (X), and the "third jackpot" is awarded 10,000 times as the number of time-saving play times (J) and 10,000 times as the number of high-probability play times (X). In addition, the "first jackpot" is awarded a low-probability play state, and the "second jackpot" and "third jackpot" are awarded a high-probability play state.

(Special electric accessory operation mode determination table)
FIG. 8 is a special electric accessory operation mode determination table for determining the grand prize opening mode table. As will be described later, since a jackpot game is executed based on this jackpot opening mode table, it can be said that the jackpot opening mode table indicates the type of jackpot game. In this embodiment, the term "table" will be abbreviated as "TBL" as appropriate.

As shown in FIG. 8, the special electric device operation mode determination table associates the special stop pattern data with the large prize opening mode table.

The main CPU 110a refers to the special electric device operation mode determination table shown in FIG. 8, and determines the large prize opening mode table based on the special stop pattern data of the special pattern.

(Big prize opening table)
Figure 9 is a diagram showing the configuration of the large prize opening opening mode table determined in Figure 8, and the opening and closing conditions of the first large prize opening opening door 16b or the second large prize opening opening door 17b are determined by the large prize opening opening mode table.

Specifically, this is a group of tables for determining the jackpot opening mode for jackpots that are referred to during jackpot games, and are comprised of a first jackpot table, a second jackpot table, and a third jackpot table.

The big winning hole opening mode determination table shown in FIG. 9 includes the type of big winning hole to be opened (first big winning hole 16 or second big winning hole 17) and the maximum number of rounds in one jackpot game. , the specified number indicating the maximum number of prizes that can be won in the big prize opening in one round, the opening time from the start of the jackpot game until the execution of the first round game, and the maximum number of openings of the big winning hole in each round game. , one opening time of the big winning slot in each round game, one closing time of the big winning slot in each round game, the interval time until the next round game is executed, and the end of the last round game. The ending time from to the end of the jackpot game is associated with it.

The main CPU 110a executes the first jackpot game based on the first jackpot TBL, the second jackpot game based on the second jackpot TBL, and the third jackpot game based on the third jackpot TBL. Become.

According to the first jackpot TBL shown in FIG. 9, the first jackpot opening/closing door 16b can be operated to execute a first jackpot game in which the first jackpot 16 on the right side of the game area 6 is opened for a maximum of 29 seconds per round. However, if a specified number (9 balls) of game balls enter the first jackpot 16 before the opening time reaches 29 seconds, one round of play ends. And when the 16 rounds of play end, the first jackpot game ends.

According to the second jackpot TBL shown in FIG. 9, the first jackpot opening/closing door 16b can be operated to execute a second jackpot game in which the first jackpot 16 on the right side of the game area 6 is opened for a maximum of 1.8 seconds for two rounds (two times). However, if a specified number (nine) of game balls enter the first jackpot 16 before the opening time of 1.8 seconds has elapsed, one round of play ends. And when the two rounds of play end, the second jackpot game ends.

According to the third jackpot TBL shown in FIG. 9, the second jackpot opening/closing door 17b is operated to open the second jackpot 17 on the right side of the gaming area 6 for up to 29 seconds per round. A third jackpot game can be executed. However, if a specified number (9) of game balls enter the second grand prize opening 17 before the opening time elapses for 29 seconds, one round of gaming ends. When the 16th round game ends, the third jackpot game ends.

In this way, in this embodiment, three types of "jackpot games (special games)" are provided, namely the first jackpot game to the third jackpot game, which have different jackpot openings and opening actions for the jackpot openings, allowing players to enjoy a variety of special games.

Also, the opening time of the second jackpot game (1.8 seconds) is shorter than, for example, the opening time of the first jackpot game (29 seconds) and the opening time of the third jackpot game (29 seconds). Therefore, it can be said to be an "unfavorable opening mode."

(Special chart variation pattern determination table)
FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a special symbol fluctuation pattern determination table for determining the fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time, etc.) of the special symbol, as described later.

As shown in FIG. 10, the special symbol fluctuation pattern determination table includes a special symbol display device (type of starting opening), jackpot determination result, special symbol (stop special symbol data), random number value for reach determination, and special symbol. The number of reservations (U1 or U2), the random number value for special symbol variation, the variation pattern of the special symbol, and the variation time of the special symbol are associated.

Therefore, the "special symbol fluctuation pattern" can be said to determine at least the result of the jackpot determination and the time for the special symbol to fluctuate. In addition, since the system is configured so that a reach is always performed when a jackpot is reached, the random number value for reach determination is not referenced when a jackpot is reached. The random number value for reach determination has a random number range of 97 (0-96), and the random number value for special symbol fluctuation has a random number range of 100 (0-99).

In addition, in the special symbol fluctuation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 10, fluctuation pattern (1) (normal fluctuation ) The variation time (T2) of variation pattern (2) (shortened variation) is set to be shorter than the variation time (T1) of variation pattern (2) (shortened variation). In addition, although the maximum number of balls "4" may be stored as the number of reserved special symbols, the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol is determined after subtracting 1 from the number of reserved special symbols. Therefore, "4" will not be referenced as the pending number. Note that hereinafter, "normal fluctuation 1" and "normal fluctuation 2" may be collectively referred to simply as "normal fluctuation."

The main CPU 110a refers to the special symbol change pattern determination table shown in FIG. 10 and determines the change pattern and the change time of the special symbol based on the special symbol display device (type of starting hole), the lottery result of the jackpot lottery, the special symbol to be stopped, the number of reserved special symbols (U1 or U2), the random number value for reach determination, and the random number value for special symbol change.

Then, a special symbol variation pattern designation command is generated based on the determined special symbol variation pattern, and information on the special symbol variation pattern is transmitted to the performance control board 120.

The special symbol variation pattern designation command is composed of one byte of MODE data for identifying the command classification and one byte of DATA data indicating the content (function) of the command. In this embodiment, when the MODE data is "E6H", it indicates a special symbol variation pattern designation command of the first special symbol display device 20 corresponding to a game ball winning the first starting hole 14, and when the MODE data is "E7H", it indicates a special symbol variation pattern designation command of the second special symbol display device 21 corresponding to a game ball winning the second starting hole 15.

In addition, the performance control board 120 determines the performance content of the performance pattern 38, etc., based on the special pattern change pattern (change pattern designation command), as described below. The rightmost column of the special pattern change pattern determination table shown in Figure 10 lists the performance content of the performance pattern 38, etc., for reference.

Here, as for the production content, "normal variation 1", "normal variation 2", and "shortened variation" mean that the multiple production symbols 38 vary at high speed and stop without reaching the reach. The difference between normal variation 1, normal variation 2, and shortened variation is that the shortened variation ends in a shorter variation time than normal variation 1 and normal variation 2.

"Reach" refers to a variation mode that gives the player a sense of expectation of a jackpot, such as when some of the combinations of performance symbols 38 that indicate a jackpot are temporarily stopped and the other performance symbols 38 change. For example, when the combination of three-digit performance symbols 38 "777" is set as the combination of performance symbols 38 that indicates a jackpot, it refers to a mode in which two performance symbols 38 are temporarily stopped at "7" and the remaining performance symbols 38 change. Note that "temporary stop display (temporary stop)" refers to a mode in which the performance symbols 38 sway slightly or change slightly, making it appear to the player that the performance symbols 38 are stopped.

In addition, the term "normal reach" refers to a reach with a low expectation (hereinafter referred to as "expectation of a big win") of a big win game in which two performance symbols 38 temporarily stop and the remaining one performance symbol 38 changes. In this embodiment, a big win does not occur due to a "normal reach", but a big win may be caused by a "normal reach". In addition, the term "SP reach" refers to a super reach with a higher expectation of a big win than a normal reach. For example, the non-temporarily stopped performance symbol 38 changes in a special way, the performance symbol 38 changes, or the background image changes to display a special character. In addition, the term "SPSP reach" refers to a special reach that is performed after a super reach and has a higher expectation of a big win than a super reach. In the "SPSP reach", the performance symbol 38 changes, the background image changes, and a special character is displayed, or for example, a live-action image is displayed. In addition, "full rotation reach" refers to a state in which a combination of multiple performance symbols 38 that indicate a jackpot fluctuates slowly when all of them are in line, and in this embodiment, it refers to a reach that is executed only when a jackpot is won in a lottery. Note that the execution of an "SP reach" or "SPSP reach" may be referred to as "SP reach or higher."

Note that the change in the performance pattern 38 in an "SP reach" or "SPSP reach" means, for example, that the performance pattern 38 was composed of numbers + characters before the "SP reach" or "SPSP reach", but after the "SP reach" or "SPSP reach" is reached, the performance pattern 38 changes to numbers only, and when the performance pattern 38 changes to numbers only, the display size of the performance pattern 38 becomes smaller (changes smaller) compared to the display size of the performance pattern 38 before the "SP reach" or "SPSP reach".

In this way, the performance pattern 38 has a scene composed of numbers + characters and a scene composed of numbers only in the variable performance. For example, as shown in Figure 43 (c) T4-T5, in the composition of numbers only, the decorativeness of the performance pattern 38 itself is low compared to the composition of numbers + characters as shown in Figure 43 (c) T6-T7, and in the composition of numbers + characters, the decorativeness of the performance pattern 38 itself is high.
That is, in a scene where attention is drawn to whether or not a reach effect will be executed, it is highly likely that the player will also be paying attention to whether or not a reach effect will occur, i.e., to the effect pattern 38, so that interest in the game can be increased by using an effect pattern 38 with high decorativeness. On the other hand, in a scene where attention is drawn to whether or not a jackpot will be obtained in an "SP reach", etc., it is highly likely that the player will also be paying attention to whether or not a jackpot will be obtained, i.e., to the character image, etc., rather than to the effect pattern 38, so by using an effect pattern 38 with low decorativeness, it is possible to prevent excessive attention to the effect pattern 38 and to allow attention to the character image, etc.

"Number of pseudo consecutive wins" means "number of times pseudo consecutive announcements are executed", and "pseudo consecutive announcements" means announcements in which the performance symbols 38 are temporarily stopped and then changed again during the display of the special symbols corresponding to one big win lottery, and the display symbols 38 change and temporarily stop multiple times. The number in parentheses in the number of pseudo consecutive wins column indicates the number of times the display changes that are apparently executed by executing the pseudo consecutive wins. For example, in the case of change pattern 17, three pseudo consecutive wins result in four changes (pseudo four changes).

In addition, when suggesting the execution of a "pseudo consecutive announcement," this may be done using only the performance pattern 38, or a dedicated "pseudo consecutive execution suggestion pattern" may be used.
For example, when suggesting the execution of a ``pseudo consecutive announcement'' using only the performance patterns 38, different odd-numbered performance patterns 38 may be combined and displayed as temporarily stopped to suggest the execution of a ``pseudo consecutive announcement,'' or, for example, a ``5'' may be displayed as temporarily stopped on the left performance pattern 38a, a ``5'' may be displayed as temporarily stopped on the middle performance pattern 38b, and a ``6'' may be displayed as temporarily stopped on the right performance pattern 38c to suggest the execution of a ``pseudo consecutive announcement.''
In addition, when suggesting the execution of a "pseudo consecutive announcement" using a dedicated "pseudo consecutive execution suggestion pattern," a "pseudo consecutive execution suggestion pattern" (e.g., a NEXT pattern) may be newly displayed in the middle performance pattern 38b, and if the "pseudo consecutive execution suggestion pattern" (e.g., a NEXT pattern) stops, the execution of the "pseudo consecutive announcement" may be suggested.
In addition, when a "pseudo consecutive execution suggestion pattern" (for example, a NEXT pattern) stops, it may be a provisional stop display, like the performance pattern 38, or it may be a confirmed stop display, unlike the performance pattern 38.

(Win determination table for winning lottery)
As shown in FIG. 11(a), the hit determination table associates the presence or absence of a time-saving gaming state, the random number value for hit determination, and the win determination result.

The main CPU 110a refers to the hit determination table shown in FIG. 11(a) and determines whether it is a "hit" or a "miss" based on the current time-saving game state and the obtained hit determination random number value. For example, according to the hit determination table shown in FIG. 11(a), when the game is in a non-time-saving game state, one specific hit determination random number value of "0" is determined to be a hit. On the other hand, when the game is in a time-saving game state, 15 hit determination random numbers from "0" to "14" are determined to be hits. Note that if the random number value is any other than the above, it is determined to be a "miss." Therefore, since the random number range of the hit determination random number value is 0 to 15, the probability of being determined to be a hit in a non-time-saving game state is 1/16, and the probability of being determined to be a hit in a time-saving game state is 15/16.

(Normal symbol determination table)
As shown in FIG. 11(b), the normal symbol determination table associates the presence or absence of a time-saving game state, a winning determination result, a random number value for determining a normal symbol, and a normal symbol (stop normal symbol data).

The main CPU 110a refers to the normal symbol determination table shown in FIG. 11(b) and determines the normal symbol (stop normal symbol data) to be displayed based on the current time-saving game state, the win determination result, and the obtained random number value for determining the normal symbol.

Then, when the normal symbol starts to change, the main CPU 110a will determine a normal symbol designation command as information about the normal symbol based on the determined type of normal symbol (stop normal symbol data), and will transmit the determined normal symbol designation command to the performance control board 120.

Here, as shown in FIG. 11(d), the opening mode of the starting movable piece 15b is determined by the normal pattern (stop normal pattern data), so it can be said that the type of normal pattern determines the opening mode of the starting movable piece 15b.

(Normal map fluctuation pattern determination table)
FIG. 11(c) is a diagram showing a normal symbol fluctuation pattern determination table for determining the normal symbol fluctuation pattern (such as fluctuation time) as described below.

As shown in FIG. 11(c), the ordinary symbol fluctuation pattern determination table associates the presence or absence of a time-saving gaming state, the lottery result of the winning lottery, the random value for ordinary symbol variation, and the fluctuation time of ordinary symbols. ing.

The main CPU 110a refers to the normal symbol variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 11(c) and determines the normal symbol variation time based on the current time-saving game state, the win determination result, and the obtained normal symbol variation random number value.

Then, when the normal symbol fluctuation starts, the main CPU 110a determines a regular symbol fluctuation designation command as information on the fluctuation time of the regular symbol based on the determined fluctuation time of the regular symbol, and determines the determined regular symbol fluctuation designation command. will be transmitted to the production control board 120.

The feature of the normal game fluctuation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 11(c) is that the fluctuation time of the time-saving game state (3 seconds or 5 seconds) is configured to be shorter than the fluctuation time of the non-time-saving game state (30 seconds or 40 seconds).

(Table for determining the opening mode of the starting port of the starting movable piece)
As shown in Figure 11 (d), the start opening mode determination table corresponds the stop normal pattern data (normal pattern), the maximum number of times the start movable piece 15b can be opened, the opening time of the auxiliary game, the opening time of the second start opening 15, the interval time, and the ending time of the auxiliary game.

The main CPU 110a refers to the start port opening mode determination table shown in FIG. 11(d) and determines the maximum number of openings of the start movable piece 15b, the opening time, the opening time, the closing time, the interval time, and the ending time based on the stop normal data.

In this embodiment, in the start port opening mode determination table shown in FIG. 11(d), the start port opening mode based on stop general map data = 02 is a more advantageous opening mode than the start port opening mode based on stop general map data = 01, and the start port opening mode based on stop general map data = 03 is a more advantageous opening mode than the start port opening mode based on stop general map data = 02.

As shown in the normal symbol determination table in FIG. 11(b), when a win occurs in the time-saving play state, the stop normal symbol data = 03, which is the most advantageous opening mode, is selected. As a result, in the time-saving play state, the starting movable piece 15b operates in a way that is more advantageous to the player than in the non-time-saving play state.

(Various storage areas)
FIG. 12 is a diagram showing various storage areas set in the main RAM 110c. Specifically, FIG. 12(a) shows the special figure determination information (random value for jackpot determination, special symbol determination It is a figure showing a special figure judgment information storage area in which a random number value, a random number value for reach judgment, a random number value for special figure fluctuation) are stored, and FIG. 12(b) is a diagram of each storage part of the special figure judgment information storage area. FIG. 12(c) is a diagram showing the configuration, and FIG. 12(c) shows the normal pattern determination information (random value for hit judgment, random value for normal pattern judgment, normal pattern fluctuation) acquired when the game ball passes through the normal pattern gate 13. FIG. 12(d) is a diagram showing the configuration of each storage part of the normal figure determination information storage area.

As shown in FIG. 12(a), the special chart determination information storage area is composed of a first special chart determination information reserve memory area in which special chart determination information obtained based on the entry of a game ball into the first starting hole 14 is stored, a second special chart determination information reserve memory area in which special chart determination information obtained based on the entry of a game ball into the second starting hole 15 is stored, and a special chart execution memory area in which special chart determination information during execution of variable display is stored, and the first special chart determination information reserve memory area and the second special chart determination information reserve memory area are each divided into a first memory section to a fourth memory section.

Note that the number of pieces of undetermined special symbol determination information stored in the first to fourth storage portions of the first special symbol determination information reservation storage area becomes the first special symbol reservation number (U1), and these undetermined The number of pending icons corresponding to the special symbol determination information is displayed in the pending icon display area 31b, and the number of undetermined special symbol determination information stored in the second special symbol determination information retention storage area is the second special symbol retention number. (U2), and the number of pending icons corresponding to these undetermined special figure determination information is displayed in the pending icon display area 31b, and the special figure that is currently executing the variable display (variable effect) stored in the special figure execution storage area. The variable icon corresponding to the figure determination information is displayed in the variable icon display area 31a.

The first special symbol reserved number (U1) is displayed in the first special symbol reserved number display area 31c on the image display device 31 (see FIG. 43, etc.), and the second special symbol reserved number (U2) is displayed in the second special symbol reserved number display area 31d on the image display device 31 (see FIG. 43, etc.). The reserved numbers displayed in the first special symbol reserved number display area 31c and the second special symbol reserved number display area 31d may be simply referred to as the "reserved number image." The "reserved number image" simply notifies the player of the reserved number and does not play a role in notifying the player of the possibility of a jackpot game being executed.

As shown in FIG. 12(b), each memory unit is divided into a random number memory area for determining a jackpot for storing random numbers for determining a jackpot, a random number memory area for determining a special symbol for storing random numbers for determining a special symbol, a random number memory area for determining a reach for a chance for storing random numbers for determining a reach for a chance ...

When a game ball enters the first starting hole 14 and special pattern determination information is acquired, the acquired special pattern determination information is stored in the smallest numbered storage section among the first to fourth storage sections of the first special pattern determination information reserve storage area in which special pattern determination information is not stored. When a game ball enters the second starting hole 15 and special pattern determination information is acquired, the acquired special pattern determination information is stored in the smallest numbered storage section among the first to fourth storage sections of the second special pattern determination information reserve storage area in which special pattern determination information is not stored.

In the special figure execution storage area, when the start condition for the variable display of the first special symbol is satisfied, the special figure determination information stored in the first memory of the first special figure determination information reservation storage area is shifted, and the first special figure determination information is shifted. Referenced to execute variable display of symbols. In addition, when the start condition for the variable display of the second special symbol is met, the special symbol determination information stored in the first storage section of the second special symbol determination information reservation storage area is shifted, and the variable display of the second special symbol is shifted. Referenced to execute.

As shown in FIG. 12(c), the normal pattern determination information storage area is composed of a normal pattern determination information reserve storage area in which normal pattern determination information acquired based on the passage of the game ball through the normal pattern gate 13 is stored, and a normal pattern execution storage area in which normal pattern determination information during execution of the variable display is stored, and the normal pattern determination information reserve storage area is divided into a first storage section to a fourth storage section. Note that the number of undetermined normal pattern determination information stored in the first storage section to the fourth storage section of the normal pattern determination information reserve storage area is the number of reserved normal patterns (G).

As shown in FIG. 12(d), each memory unit is divided into a random number memory area for hit determination for storing random number values for hit determination, a random number memory area for normal pattern determination for storing random number values for normal pattern determination, and a random number memory area for normal pattern variation pattern determination for storing random number values for normal pattern variation pattern determination.

Then, when the game ball passes through the normal pattern gate 13 and normal pattern determination information is acquired, the acquired normal pattern determination information is stored in the smallest-numbered memory section among the first through fourth memory sections of the normal pattern determination information reserve memory area in which no normal pattern determination information is stored.

In the normal pattern execution storage area, when the start condition for the variable display of normal symbols is met, the normal pattern determination information stored in the first storage section of the normal pattern determination information retention storage area is shifted, and the normal pattern pattern execution storage area starts the variable display of normal symbols. Referenced for execution.

Next, the progress of the game in the gaming machine 1 will be explained using a flowchart.

(Main processing of the main control board)
The main processing of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to Fig. 13. Fig. 13 is a flow chart showing the main processing of the main control board 110.

When power is supplied by the power supply board 140, a system reset occurs in the main CPU 110a, and the main CPU 110a performs the following main processing.

First, the main CPU 110a performs initialization processing consisting of steps S1 to S14. Specifically, the main CPU 110a permits access to the main RAM 110c in step S1.

In step S2, the main CPU 110a determines whether a backup flag indicating that power has been restored is set in the main RAM 110c. If the backup flag is set, the process proceeds to step S3, and if the backup flag is not set, the process proceeds to step S11.

In step S3, the main CPU 110a calculates the checksum of the main RAM 110c, and in step S4, it compares the checksum stored in the main RAM 110c at the time of the previous power outage with the newly calculated checksum to determine whether the checksum is normal. If the checksum is normal, the process proceeds to step S5. If the checksum is not normal, it is determined that there is an abnormality in the data stored in the RAM 110c (the control state before the power outage cannot be restored normally), and the process proceeds to step S11.

In step S5, the main CPU 110a determines whether the RAM clear switch 111a is turned on. If the RAM clear switch 111a is not ON, processing is performed at the time of power restoration and the process moves to step S6; if the RAM clear switch 111a is ON, processing is performed at power-on. The process moves to step S12.

In step S6, the main CPU 110a clears the backup flag and checksum stored in the main RAM 110c, and sets the RAM for when power is restored. By performing this process, the game progress state (control state) returns (restores) to the state before the power was cut off, making it possible to resume playing from the state before the power was cut off.

In step S7, the main CPU 110a performs initial settings for devices around the CPU. Specifically, it sets the output settings for the performance control board 120, the settings for the CTC (Counter Timer Circuit) to be used, the interrupt timer (4 milliseconds) for the CTC to be used, etc.

In step S8, the main CPU 110a sets a power recovery designation command indicating that the gaming control state has been restored and the gaming state before the power outage in the performance transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c, and executes the process in step S9. Move. As a result, a power recovery designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 120, and the effect control board 120 performs processing for executing power recovery notification.

Note that the power restoration notification refers to displaying a power restoration screen (image) on the image display device 31 indicating that the power has been restored (for example, FIG. 72), or displaying a power restoration screen (image) on the image display device 31 to indicate that the power has been restored, or This means outputting a recovery notification sound.

In addition, it is also possible to send a game status designation command indicating the current game status before or after sending the power restoration designation command, without including information indicating the current game status in the power restoration designation command.

In step S9, the main CPU 110a sets a special symbol storage designation command indicating the first special symbol retention number (U1) and the second special symbol retention number (U2) in the performance transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. As a result, a special symbol storage designation command is sent to the performance control board 120, and the performance control board 120 is able to grasp the number of reserved special symbols, and the image display device 31 displays the first reservation icon and the second reservation icon. Processing for displaying the pending number image will be performed.

In step S10, the main CPU 110a sets a normal symbol storage command indicating the number of reserved normal symbols (G) in the performance transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. This causes the normal symbol storage command to be sent to the performance control board 120, making it possible for the performance control board 120 to grasp the number of stored normal symbols.

In step S11, the main CPU 110a clears all areas of the main RAM 110c, sets the RAM settings at power-on, and proceeds to step S13.

In step S12, the main CPU 110a clears the used area of the main RAM 110c, sets the RAM for when the power is turned on, and proceeds to step S13. By performing this process, the game progress state (control state) is initialized to the initial state.

The main CPU 110a performs initial settings of devices around the CPU in step S13. Specifically, the output settings to the production control board 120, the settings of the CTC (Counter Timer Circuit) to be used, the interrupt timer (4 milliseconds) of the CTC to be used, etc. are set.

In step S14, the main CPU 110a sets a power-on designation command indicating that the control state of the game has been initialized (RAM cleared) in the production transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c, and moves the process to step S15. As a result, a power-on designation command is transmitted to the production control board 120, and the production control board 120 performs processing for executing power-on notification.

Note that the power-on notification includes displaying a power-on screen (image) on the image display device 31 indicating that the power has been turned on, or displaying a RAM clear notification from the audio output device 32 indicating that the main RAM 110c has been initialized. It means outputting sound.

In step S15, the main CPU 110a performs a process of updating the random number value for reach determination and the random number value for special symbol variation to determine the variation pattern (variation time) of the special symbol, and in step S16, updates the random number value for jackpot determination. The initial random value, the initial random value for special symbol determination, the initial random value for hit determination, and the initial random value for normal symbol determination are updated.

In step S17, the main CPU 110a determines whether a power interruption has occurred. Specifically, it determines whether a power interruption detection signal has been input from a power interruption detection circuit provided on the power supply board 140. If a power interruption has occurred, the process proceeds to step S18. If a power interruption has not occurred, the process proceeds to step S15 so that the process loops.

The main CPU 110a prohibits timer interrupts in step S18, clears the output port in step S19, calculates the checksum of the main RAM 110c and sets it in a specified area of the main RAM 110c in step S20, sets a backup flag to be referenced when recovering from a power outage in a specified area of the main RAM 110c in step S21, and prohibits access to the main RAM 110c in step S22, and waits until the supply of power voltage is completely cut off.

Note that when the power is turned off and when the power is turned on, the checksum of all used areas of the main RAM 110c is calculated and compared, but all areas including unused areas are checked. The sum may be calculated and compared.

(Timer interrupt processing on the main control board)
The timer interrupt process of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to Fig. 14. Fig. 14 is a flow chart showing the timer interrupt process in the main control board 110.

The reset clock pulse generating circuit provided on the main control board 110 generates a clock pulse at a predetermined period (4 milliseconds), which executes the timer interrupt process described below.

First, in step S100, the main CPU 110a saves the information stored in the registers of the main CPU 110a to the stack area.

The main CPU 110a performs time control processing in step S110. Specifically, the process of updating the special symbol time counter, the process of updating the special game timer counter such as the opening time of special electric accessories, the process of updating the normal symbol time counter, the process of updating the opening/closing time of the starting movable piece 15b, etc. Processing to update (subtract 1) various timer counters is performed.

The main CPU 110a performs a random number update process in step S120. Specifically, it performs a process to update the random number value for determining a jackpot, the random number value for determining a special symbol, the random number value for determining a win, the random number value for determining a normal symbol, and the random number value for normal symbol variation. More specifically, it increments each random number value and the random number counter by 1. Note that if the incremented random number counter value exceeds the maximum value of the random number range (if the random number counter has gone around once), the random number counter is reset to 0, and each random number value is updated from the initial random number value at that time.

In step S130, the main CPU 110a performs an initial random number value update process. Specifically, the main CPU 110a performs a process of updating (adding 1) the initial random number value for determining a jackpot, the initial random number value for determining a special symbol, the initial random number value for determining a win, and the initial random number value for determining a normal symbol.

The main CPU 110a performs input control processing in step S200. Specifically, it determines whether or not there has been input to the various switches, namely the general winning hole detection switch 12a, the first large winning hole detection switch 16a, the second large winning hole detection switch 17a, the first starting hole detection switch 14a, the second starting hole detection switch 15a, and the gate detection switch 13a, and if there has been input, it performs processing to set predetermined data. This will be described in more detail later with reference to FIG. 15.

The main CPU 110a performs special symbol and special electricity control processing in step S300. Specifically, it performs processing to control the big win lottery, the variable display of the special symbol, the opening and closing of the first big win opening 16 or the second big win opening 17, changes in the game state, etc. Details will be described later using FIG. 18.

In step S400, the main CPU 110a performs a normal symbol and normal power control process. Specifically, it performs processes to control the winning lottery, the variable display of the normal symbol, the opening and closing of the starting movable piece 15b, etc. This will be described in more detail later with reference to FIG. 25.

The main CPU 110a performs a payout control process in step S500. Specifically, with reference to each prize ball counter, a process is performed in which a command for specifying the number of payouts corresponding to various winning holes is generated and set in the transmission buffer of the main RAM 110c. As a result, a command for specifying the number of balls to be put out is transmitted to the payout control board 130, and a process is performed to pay out the number of game balls from the payout device according to the command for specifying the number of balls to be put out.

In step S600, the main CPU 110a performs a process of creating game progress data. Specifically, the main CPU 110a performs a process of creating output data related to game progress, such as an external information signal output from the game information output terminal board 30, drive data for the second start opening/closing solenoid 15c, drive data for the first large prize opening opening/closing solenoid 16c, drive data for the second large prize opening opening/closing solenoid 17c, display data for the first special symbol display device 20, display data for the second special symbol display device 21, display data for the normal symbol display device 22, display data for the first special symbol reserved display device 23, display data for the second special symbol reserved display device 24, and display data for the normal symbol reserved display device 25.

Main CPU 110a performs output control processing in step S700. Specifically, processing is performed to output the external information signal, various drive data, and various display data created in step S600. It also performs processing for transmitting commands set in the performance transmission data storage area and transmission buffer of the main RAM 110c to the performance control board 120 and payout control board 130.

In step S800, the main CPU 110a restores the information saved in step S100 to the register of the main CPU 110a.

(Input control processing of main control board)
The input control process of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to Fig. 15. Fig. 15 is a flow chart showing the input control process in the main control board 110.

The main CPU 110a performs general winning opening detection switch input processing in step S210. Specifically, it is determined whether or not a detection signal is input from the general winning opening detection switch 12a, and when the detection signal is input, a process of adding 1 to the winning ball counter for the general winning opening is performed.

The main CPU 110a performs a big winning opening detection switch input process in step S220. Specifically, it is determined whether a detection signal is input from the first big winning opening detection switch 16a or the second big winning opening detection switch 17a, and when the detection signal is input, the big winning opening detection switch 16a or the second big winning opening detection switch 17a is determined. A process of adding 1 to the prize ball counter is performed.

The main CPU 110a performs the first start hole detection switch input process in step S230. Specifically, it determines whether or not a detection signal has been input from the first start hole detection switch 14a, and if a detection signal has been input, it adds 1 to the prize ball counter for the first start hole, and if the first special symbol reservation number (U1) is less than 4, it adds 1 to the first special symbol reservation number (U1), and also obtains special symbol determination information and stores it in a predetermined memory unit (first memory unit to fourth memory unit) in the special symbol determination information storage area, and then performs the process. Details will be described later with reference to FIG. 16.

The main CPU 110a performs second starting port detection switch input processing in step S240. Specifically, it is determined whether or not a detection signal from the second starting port detection switch 15a is input, and when the detection signal is input, 1 is added to the prize ball counter for the second starting port, and the second If the number of reserved special symbols (U2) is less than 4, the second number of reserved special symbols (U2) is added by 1, and the special symbol determination information is acquired and stored in a predetermined storage section (the first storage unit to fourth storage unit). The details will be described later using FIG. 17.

In step S250, the main CPU 110a performs gate detection switch input processing and ends this input control processing. Specifically, it determines whether or not a detection signal has been input from the gate detection switch 13a, and if a detection signal has been input and the number of reserved normal symbols (G) is less than 4, it increments the number of reserved normal symbols (G) by 1, and also obtains normal symbol determination information and stores it in a predetermined memory unit (first memory unit to fourth memory unit) of the normal symbol determination information storage area.

(Input processing of the first starting port detection switch on the main control board)
The first starting port detection switch input process of the main control board 110 will be explained using FIG. 16. FIG. 16 is a flowchart showing the first starting port detection switch input process in the main control board 110.

First, in step S230-1, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not a detection signal has been input from the first start hole detection switch 14a. If a detection signal has been input, the process proceeds to step S230-2. If a detection signal has not been input, the process ends this first start hole detection switch input process.

In step S230-2, the main CPU 110a performs a process of adding 1 to the prize ball counter (3 prize ball counter) for the first starting opening used for prize balls to update it.

In step S230-3, the main CPU 110a determines whether the number of reserved first special symbols (U1) is less than 4. If the number of reserved first special symbols (U1) is less than 4, the process proceeds to step S230-4, and if the number of reserved first special symbols (U1) is not less than 4, the process ends the current first start hole detection switch input process.

In step S230-4, the main CPU 110a adds "1" to the first special symbol reservation number (U1) and stores the result, and in step S230-5, the main CPU 110a adds "1" to the first special symbol reservation number (U1) and stores the result. The specified command is set in the performance transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. As a result, a special symbol storage designation command is sent to the production control board 120, and it becomes possible to perform processing such as displaying the first reservation icon and the reservation number image on the image display device 31.

In step S230-6, the main CPU 110a acquires the special figure determination information, searches the vacant memory sections in order from the first memory section in the first special figure determination information storage area, and searches the vacant memory sections. The special figure determination information obtained in the above is stored.

The main CPU 110a performs preliminary determination processing in step S230-7. Specifically, with reference to the preliminary determination table for the jackpot lottery (not shown), the type of special symbol display device, the random value for jackpot determination acquired this time, the random value for special symbol determination, the random value for reach determination, and the special symbol are determined. A process of determining a scheduled fluctuation pattern is performed based on the random number value for fluctuation.

In step S230-8, the main CPU 110a sets a starting opening winning designation command indicating the scheduled fluctuation pattern determined in the preliminary determination process in step S230-7 to the performance transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c, and 1 Finish the starting port detection switch input process.

As a result, a start hole winning designation command is sent to the performance control board 120, and it becomes possible to execute a pre-reading performance that warns of the possibility of a jackpot game being played (creating anticipation of the execution of a jackpot game) even before the variable display of the special pattern triggered by the entry of the game ball into the first start hole 14 starts (over the variable display of one or multiple special patterns).

Note that the effect of causing the starting port lamp 14b to emit light in a color corresponding to the light emitting color of the hold icon described above constitutes the pre-read effect. Therefore, the hold icon and the start port lamp 14b can also change colors in stages over the variable display of a plurality of special symbols. In the following, a pending icon whose color has been changed may be referred to as a "changed pending icon".

(Main control board second start port detection switch input processing)
The second start hole detection switch input process of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to Fig. 17. Fig. 17 is a flowchart showing the second start hole detection switch input process in the main control board 110.

First, in step S240-1, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not a detection signal has been input from the second start hole detection switch 15a. If a detection signal has been input, the process proceeds to step S240-2. If a detection signal has not been input, the process ends this second start hole detection switch input process.

In step S240-2, the main CPU 110a performs a process of updating the prize ball counter (one prize ball counter) for the second starting hole used for prize balls by adding one.

In step S240-3, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the auxiliary game is currently being played. If the auxiliary game is not in progress, the process moves to step S240-5, and if the auxiliary game is in progress, in step S240-4, the second starting opening winning ball counter (D) is incremented by 1 and updated.

The main CPU 110a determines whether the second special symbol reservation number (U2) is less than 4 in step S240-5. If the second special symbol retention number (U2) is less than 4, the process moves to step S240-6, and if the second special symbol retention number (U2) is not less than 4, the current second starting opening Detection switch input processing ends.

In step S240-6, the main CPU 110a adds "1" to the second special symbol reserved number (U2) and stores it, and in step S240-7, sets a special symbol storage designation command indicating the second special symbol reserved number (U2) in the performance transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. This causes the special symbol storage designation command to be sent to the performance control board 120, making it possible to perform processing such as displaying a second reserved icon on the image display device 31.

In step S240-8, the main CPU 110a acquires the special figure determination information, searches the vacant memory sections in order from the first memory section in the second special figure determination information storage area, and searches the vacant memory sections. The special figure determination information obtained in the above is stored.

The main CPU 110a performs a pre-determination process in step S240-9. Specifically, the main CPU 110a refers to a pre-determination table for the jackpot lottery (not shown) and performs a process to determine a planned variation pattern based on the type of special symbol display device, the random number value for jackpot determination acquired this time, the random number value for special symbol determination, the random number value for reach determination, and the random number value for special symbol variation.

In step S240-10, the main CPU 110a sets a starting opening prize designation command indicating the scheduled fluctuation pattern determined in the preliminary determination process in step S240-9 in the performance transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c, and 2. End the starting port detection switch input process.

As a result, a starting hole winning designation command is sent to the performance control board 120, and before the variable display of special symbols triggered by the winning of the game ball to the second starting hole 15 starts (1 or It becomes possible to perform a look-ahead performance that foretells the possibility of a jackpot game being executed (over the variable display of a plurality of special symbols) (makes people expect the jackpot game to be executed). In addition, the look-ahead effect using the hold icon and the starting port lamp 14b can also be executed, for example, when a game ball enters the second starting port 15 in a high probability gaming state or a time-saving gaming state.

(Special figure special electric control processing of main control board)
The special figure special electric control process of the main control board 110 will be explained using FIG. 18. FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing the special figure special electric control process in the main control board 110.

First, in step S301, the main CPU 110a loads the special symbol special electric processing data, and if the special symbol special electric processing data = 0, the process moves to the special symbol memory determination process (step S310), if the special symbol special electric processing data = 1, the process moves to the special symbol change process (step S320), if the special symbol special electric processing data = 2, the process moves to the special symbol stop process (step S330), if the special symbol special electric processing data = 3, the process moves to the jackpot game process (step S340), and if the special symbol special electric processing data = 4, the process moves to the jackpot game end process (step S350).

This "special chart special electricity processing data" is set as necessary within each subroutine of the special chart special electricity control processing, as described below, so that the subroutines required for the progress of the game are processed appropriately.

In step S310, the main CPU 110a performs a special symbol memory determination process and ends the current special symbol special power control process. Specifically, the main CPU 110a performs a jackpot determination process, a special symbol determination process to determine the special symbol to be displayed as a fixed stop, and a change time determination process to determine the change time of the special symbol. Details will be described later with reference to FIG. 19.

The main CPU 110a performs special symbol variation processing in step S320, and ends the current special symbol special electric control processing. Specifically, a process is performed to determine whether or not the special symbol variation time has elapsed, and when the special symbol variation time has elapsed, a process to move to the special symbol stop process of step S330 is performed. The details will be described later using FIG. 21.

The main CPU 110a performs a special symbol stop process in step S330, and ends the current special symbol special electric control process. Specifically, in addition to performing processing corresponding to the special symbols (jacket symbols, losing symbols) that have been confirmed and stopped, the number of time-saving games (J), the time-saving game flag, the number of high-probability games (X), and the high-probability game flag are executed. Perform the process to set the . The details will be described later using FIG. 22.

In step S340, the main CPU 110a performs jackpot game processing and ends the current special chart special electricity control processing. Specifically, it performs processing to control the jackpot game. Details will be described later with reference to FIG. 23.

In step S350, the main CPU 110a performs a jackpot game end process and ends the current special figure special electric control process. Specifically, a process is performed to determine either a high probability gaming state or a low probability gaming state, and also to determine a gaming state, either a time saving gaming state or a non-time saving gaming state. . The details will be described later using FIG. 24.

(Special pattern memory determination process of the main control board)
The special symbol storage determination process of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to Fig. 19. Fig. 19 is a flow chart showing the special symbol storage determination process in the main control board 110.

First, in step S310-1, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the special symbol is being displayed in a changing state. If the special symbol is being displayed in a changing state (special symbol time counter ≠ 0), the current special symbol memory determination process is terminated, and if the special symbol is not being displayed in a changing state (special symbol time counter = 0), the process proceeds to step S310-2.

The main CPU 110a determines whether the second special symbol reservation number (U2) is 1 or more in step S310-2. If the second special symbol reservation number (U2) is 1 or more, the process moves to step S310-3, and if the second special symbol reservation number (U2) is not 1 or more, the process goes to step S310-4. move. Note that affirming the process in step S310-2 corresponds to "establishment of starting conditions."

In step S310-3, the main CPU 110a subtracts 1 from the second special pattern reserved number (U2) to update it, and then proceeds to step S310-6.

The main CPU 110a determines whether the first special symbol reservation number (U1) is 1 or more in step S310-4. If it is determined that the first special symbol reservation number (U1) is 1 or more, the process moves to step S310-5, and if the first special symbol reservation number (U1) is not 1 or more, step S318- Move processing to step 1. Note that affirming the process in step S310-4 corresponds to "satisfaction of the starting condition."

In step S310-5, the main CPU 110a subtracts 1 from the number of reserved first special symbols (U1) to update it, and then proceeds to step S310-6.

In step S310-6, the main CPU 110a shifts the special symbol determination information stored in the special symbol determination information reserved memory area (memory area shift) corresponding to the reserved number of special symbols (U) subtracted in step S310-3 or step S310-5. Specifically, each special symbol determination information stored in the first memory section in the first special symbol determination information memory area or the second special symbol determination information memory area is shifted to the previous memory section. Here, the special symbol determination information stored in the first memory section is shifted to the special symbol execution memory area (memory section 0). At this time, the special symbol determination information used in the previous variable display of the special symbol that has already been written in the special symbol execution memory area (memory section 0) is erased.

In addition, in this embodiment, the second special symbol reservation number (U2) is given priority over the first special symbol reservation number (U1) and is subtracted, but the first special symbol The number of reserved symbols (U1) and the number of second special symbols reserved (U2) may be subtracted, or the first number of reserved special symbols (U1) may be subtracted with priority over the number of second special symbols reserved (U2). You may also do so.

In step S310-7, the main CPU 110a displays a special symbol indicating the first special symbol retention number (U1) or the second special symbol retention number (U2) subtracted in step S310-3 or step S310-5. A symbol storage designation command is determined, and the determined special symbol storage designation command is set in the performance transmission data storage area. As a result, a special symbol storage designation command is sent to the production control board 120, and the number of the first pending icon or the second pending icon displayed on the image display device 31 is reduced, or the first pending icon or Processing such as changing the second pending icon to the variable icon will be performed.

The main CPU 110a performs jackpot determination processing in step S311. Specifically, with reference to the jackpot determination table shown in FIG. With reference to the special symbol determination table shown in FIG. (Special figure data) is determined. The details will be described later using FIG. 20.

In step S312, the main CPU 110a performs special figure fluctuation pattern determination processing. Specifically, with reference to the special symbol fluctuation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 10, the special symbol display device (type of starting opening), jackpot lottery result, special symbol, number of special symbols reserved (U), special symbol execution A variation pattern of the special symbol is determined based on the random number value for reach determination and the random number value for special symbol variation stored in the storage area.

In step S313, the main CPU 110a sets a variation pattern designation command corresponding to the determined variation pattern in the production transmission data storage area. As a result, a variation pattern designation command is sent to the production control board 120, and the production control board 120 performs a process to execute a variation production according to the variation pattern so as to correspond to the variation display of the special symbol. .

In step S314, the main CPU 110a confirms the gaming state at the start of the variation, and sets a gaming state designation command corresponding to the current gaming state in the performance transmission data storage area. Thereby, a gaming state designation command is transmitted to the production control board 120, and it becomes possible to grasp the gaming state on the production control board 120.

In step S315, the main CPU 110a sets the special symbol fluctuation time (counter value) based on the fluctuation pattern determined in step S312 above in the special symbol time counter. Note that the special symbol time counter is decremented every 4 ms in S110.

The main CPU 110a starts the variable display of the special symbols in step S316. Specifically, variable display data of the special symbols is set in a predetermined area of the main RAM 110c. As a result, display data for variable display of the special symbols on the first special symbol display device 20 or the second special symbol display device 21 is created in the above step S600, and the created data is output in step S700, whereby the variable display of the special symbols is performed on the first special symbol display device 20 or the second special symbol display device 21.

In step S317, the main CPU 110a sets the special symbol special electric processing data=1, prepares to move the processing to the special symbol variation processing shown in FIG. 21, and ends the current special symbol memory determination processing.

In step S318-1, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not there is a customer waiting state flag indicating that the machine is in a customer waiting state (standby state) where the special symbol changing display and the jackpot game are not being executed. If there is a customer waiting state flag, the current special symbol storage determination process is terminated, and if there is no customer waiting state flag, the process proceeds to step S318-2.

In step S318-2, the main CPU 110a sets a customer waiting state flag indicating that the customer is waiting in a predetermined area of the main RAM 110c, and in step S318-3, sets a customer waiting state flag indicating that the customer is waiting. The designated command is set in the performance transmission data storage area, and the current special symbol storage determination process is completed. As a result, a customer waiting state designation command is transmitted to the performance control board 120, and the performance control board 120 performs processing for executing the customer waiting performance.

(Main control board jackpot determination process)
The big win determination process of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to Fig. 20. Fig. 20 is a flow chart showing the big win determination process in the main control board 110.

The main CPU 110a judges whether or not a jackpot has been reached in step S311-1. Specifically, if the special symbol determination information stored in the special symbol execution memory area has been shifted from the first special symbol determination information reserve memory area, the main CPU 110a refers to the jackpot determination table for the jackpot lottery shown in FIG. 5(a), and if the special symbol determination information stored in the special symbol execution memory area has been shifted from the second special symbol determination information reserve memory area, the main CPU 110a refers to the jackpot determination table for the jackpot lottery shown in FIG. 5(b), and judges whether or not a jackpot has been reached based on the random number value for jackpot determination stored in the special symbol execution memory area. If a jackpot has been reached, the process proceeds to step S311-2, and if a jackpot has not been reached, the process proceeds to step S311-5.

The main CPU 110a performs jackpot symbol determination processing in step S311-2. Specifically, with reference to the special symbol determination table for jackpot shown in FIG. 6(b), the jackpot special symbol to be fixed and stopped is determined based on the random value for special symbol determination stored in the special symbol execution storage area. The type is determined, and stop special symbol data corresponding to the determined type of jackpot special symbol is set in the stop special symbol data storage area.

The stop special symbol data set in the stop special symbol data storage area is used to determine whether or not it is a "jackpot symbol" in the special symbol stop process in FIG. 22, which will be described later, and also in the jackpot game process in FIG. 23. It is also used to determine the operating mode of the big winning opening, and is also used to determine the gaming state after the jackpot ends in the jackpot game ending process of FIG.

In step S311-3, the main CPU 110a sets a jackpot performance symbol designation command corresponding to the stop special symbol data determined in step S311-2 to the performance transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. As a result, the production design designation command is transmitted to the production control board 120, and it becomes possible to grasp the type of jackpot special symbol (stop special symbol data) that is confirmed and stopped displayed on the production control board 120.

In step S311-4, the main CPU 110a determines the game state at the time of winning the jackpot from the information set in the game state storage area (time-saving game flag storage area, high-probability game flag storage area), and sets the game state information indicating the game state at the time of winning the jackpot in the game state buffer. Specifically, if neither the time-saving game flag nor the high-probability game flag are set, 00H is set; if the time-saving game flag is not set but the high-probability game flag is set, 01H is set; if the time-saving game flag is set but the high-probability game flag is not set, 02H is set; and if both the time-saving game flag and the high-probability game flag are set, 03H is set.

The reason why the game state at the time of winning the jackpot is set in the game state buffer separately from the game state memory area (time-saving game flag memory area, high-probability game flag memory area) is that the high-probability game flag and time-saving game flag in the game state memory area (time-saving game flag memory area, high-probability game flag memory area) are reset during the jackpot game, so when determining a new game state at the end of the jackpot based on the game state at the time of winning the jackpot after the jackpot ends, it is not possible to refer to the game state memory area. For this reason, by providing a game state buffer for storing game information indicating the game state at the time of winning the jackpot separately from the game state memory area, it is possible to set a new game state after the jackpot ends (time-saving game state, number of time-saving games, etc.) based on the game state at the time of winning the jackpot by referring to the game information in the game state buffer after the jackpot ends.

The main CPU 110a performs losing symbol determination processing in step S311-5. Specifically, with reference to the special symbol determination table for losing as shown in FIG. The type is determined, and stop special symbol data corresponding to the determined type of losing special symbol is set in the stop special symbol data storage area.

In step S311-6, the main CPU 110a sets a losing performance symbol designation command corresponding to the stop special symbol data determined in step S311-5 above in the performance transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c, and The jackpot determination process ends. As a result, the production symbol designation command is transmitted to the production control board 120, and it becomes possible to grasp the type of loss special symbol (stop special symbol data) that is fixed and displayed on the production control board 120.

(Special pattern change processing on the main control board)
The special symbol variation process of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to Fig. 21. Fig. 21 is a flow chart showing the special symbol variation process in the main control board 110.

In step S320-1, the main CPU 110a determines whether the variable time set in the special symbol time counter has elapsed. If the variation time has not elapsed, the current special symbol variation process is ended, and if the variation time has elapsed, the process moves to step S320-2.

In step S320-2, the main CPU 110a causes the variable display of the special symbol to be fixed and stopped. Specifically, the variable display data set in step S316 is cleared, and the special symbols set in steps S311-2 and S311-5 are displayed on the first special symbol display device 20 or the second special symbol. Stop display data for displaying a confirmed stop on the display device 21 is set in a predetermined area of the main RAM 110c. As a result, the special symbol is fixed and displayed on the first special symbol display device 20 or the second special symbol display device 21, and the player is notified of the jackpot determination result.

In step S320-3, the main CPU 110a sets a symbol confirmation command indicating that the special symbol has been fixed and stopped displayed in the production transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. As a result, a symbol confirmation command is sent to the production control board 120, and the production control board 120 performs processing to end the variable production.

In step S320-4, the main CPU 110a sets a symbol stop time (0.5 seconds) for displaying the special symbol to be fixed and stopped in the special symbol time counter. In addition, the special symbol time counter is updated by subtracting 1 every 4 ms in S110.

In step S320-5, the main CPU 110a sets the special symbol special power processing data to 2, prepares to move to the special symbol stop processing shown in FIG. 23, and ends this special symbol change processing.

(Special pattern stop processing of main control board)
The special symbol stop processing of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to Fig. 22. Fig. 22 is a flowchart showing the special symbol stop processing in the main control board 110.

In step S330-1, the main CPU 110a determines whether the symbol stop time set in step S320-4 has elapsed (special symbol time counter = 0?). If the symbol stop time has elapsed, the process moves to step S330-2, and if the symbol stop time has not elapsed, the current special symbol stop process ends.

The main CPU 110a performs a process to determine whether or not time-shortened play has ended in step S330-2. Specifically, if a time-shortened play flag is set in the main RAM 110c, the number of time-shortened play times (J) is updated by subtracting 1 from it, and a determination is made as to whether or not the new number of time-shortened play times (J) is "0". As a result, if the number of time-shortened play times (J) is "0", the time-shortened play flag is cleared and processing proceeds to step S330-3. On the other hand, if the time-shortened play flag is not set or if the number of time-shortened play times (J) is not "0", processing proceeds directly to step S330-3.

The main CPU 110a performs high-probability play end determination processing in step S330-3. Specifically, if the high-probability play flag is set in the main RAM 110c, the number of high-probability plays (X) is updated by subtracting 1, and it is determined whether the new number of high-probability plays (X) is "0". As a result, if the number of high-probability plays (X) is "0", the high-probability play flag is cleared and processing proceeds to step S330-4. On the other hand, if the high-probability play flag is not set or the number of high-probability plays (X) is not "0", processing proceeds directly to step S330-4.

In step S330-4, the main CPU 110a sets a game state designation command corresponding to the current game state in the performance transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. This causes the game state designation command to be sent to the performance control board 120, making it possible for the performance control board 120 to grasp the game state.

In step S330-5, the main CPU 110a determines whether the special stop symbol data stored in the special stop symbol data storage area is a jackpot symbol. If it is a jackpot symbol, the process proceeds to step S330-7. If it is not a jackpot symbol, the process proceeds to step S330-6.

In step S330-6, the main CPU 110a sets the special symbol special signal processing data to 0, prepares to move to the special symbol memory determination process shown in FIG. 19, and ends this special symbol stop process.

In step S330-7, the main CPU 110a sets the special chart special electricity processing data to 3, and prepares to move to the jackpot game processing shown in FIG. 23.

The main CPU 110a performs normal game state transition processing in step S330-8. Specifically, the high probability game flag, the number of high probability games (X), the time saving game flag, and the number of time saving games (J) are cleared to shift to the normal gaming state (low probability non time saving gaming state).

The main CPU 110a performs jackpot start preparation setting processing in step S330-9. Specifically, with reference to the special electric accessory operation mode determination table shown in FIG. 8, the type of jackpot game is determined based on the stop special figure data, and the jackpot opening mode for the jackpot is determined as shown in FIG. From the table group, a jackpot opening mode determining table (``first jackpot TBL'', "second jackpot TBL", and "third jackpot TBL") corresponding to the type of jackpot game is determined.

In step S330-10, the main CPU 110a sets an opening designation command corresponding to the type of jackpot game (first jackpot game to third jackpot game) in the production transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. As a result, the opening designation command is transmitted to the performance control board 120, and the performance control board 120 performs processing for executing the opening performance of the jackpot game.

In step S330-11, the main CPU 110a sets the opening time of the jackpot game in the special game timer counter, and ends the current special symbol stop processing. Specifically, the opening time corresponding to the type of jackpot game is determined from the jackpot opening mode determination table (see FIG. 9) determined in step S330-9 and set in the special game timer counter. The special game timer counter is decremented every 4 ms in step S110.

(Jackpot Game Processing on the Main Control Board)
The big win game processing of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to Fig. 23. Fig. 23 is a flow chart showing the big win game processing in the main control board 110.

First, in step S340-1, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not a jackpot game is currently being opened. Specifically, it is determined whether "0" is stored in the round game number (R) storage area. If the opening is in progress, the process moves to step S340-2, and if the opening is not in progress, the process moves to S340-6.

In step S340-2, the main CPU 110a determines whether the opening time set in the special game timer counter has elapsed. If the opening time has not elapsed, the current jackpot game process is terminated, and if the opening time has elapsed, the process proceeds to step S340-3.

In step S340-3, the main CPU 110a sets the number of rounds played (R) stored in the number of rounds played (R) memory area to 1.

The main CPU 110a performs the large prize opening process in step S340-4. Specifically, it adds "1" to the number of openings (K) and sets the energization data for energizing the first large prize opening opening solenoid 16c or the second large prize opening opening solenoid 17c, and sets the opening time of the first large prize opening 16 or the second large prize opening 17 in the special play timer counter based on the current number of rounds (R) and the number of openings (K) by referring to the large prize opening opening mode determination table (see FIG. 9) determined in step S330-9 above. This causes the first large prize opening 16 or the second large prize opening 17 to open.

The main CPU 110a performs a round designation command transmission determination process in step S340-5. Specifically, when the number of openings (K) is "1", that is, when round play is to begin, a round designation command corresponding to the number of rounds played (R) is set in the performance transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. This causes the round designation command to be sent to the performance control board 120, which then performs processing to execute the round performance of the jackpot game.

In step S340-6, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the jackpot game is currently ending. The ending is the period after all of the preset rounds of play have ended. If the jackpot game is currently ending, processing proceeds to step S340-18. If the jackpot game is not currently ending, processing proceeds to step S340-7.

In step S340-7, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the grand prize opening is closed. Specifically, it is determined whether or not energization data for energizing the first big prize opening/closing solenoid 16c or the second big winning opening/closing solenoid 17c is set. If the big winning opening is being closed, the process moves to step S340-8, and if the big winning opening is not being closed, the process moves to step S340-9.

In step S340-8, the main CPU 110a determines whether the closing time of the grand prize opening set in the special game timer counter has elapsed. If the closing time has not elapsed, the current jackpot game process is ended, and if the closing time has elapsed, the process moves to step S340-4 to open the jackpot opening.

In step S340-9, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the opening end condition for ending the opening of the big prize opening is satisfied. Specifically, either the value of the big winning opening winning ball counter (C) reaches the specified number (9 balls) or the opening time per round in the number of openings (K) has elapsed. Determine whether it is established. If it is determined that the opening termination condition is satisfied, the process moves to step S340-10, and if it is determined that the opening termination condition is not satisfied, the current jackpot game process is terminated.

The main CPU 110a performs a big winning opening closing process in step S340-10. Specifically, the energization data for energizing the first grand prize opening opening/closing solenoid 16c or the second grand prize opening opening/closing solenoid 17c is cleared, and the opening mode of the grand prize opening determined in step S330-9 is determined. With reference to the table (see FIG. 9), the closing time of the first grand prize opening 16 or the second grand prize opening 17 ( Set the closing interval time (or one closing time) in the special game timer counter. As a result, the first grand prize opening 16 or the second grand prize opening 17 will be closed.

In step S340-11, the main CPU 110a determines whether one round has ended. Specifically, it determines whether either the value of the jackpot winning port winning ball counter (C) has reached a specified number (9 balls) or the number of times the ball has been opened (K) has reached the maximum number of times it has been opened. If one round has ended, the process proceeds to step S340-12. If one round has not ended, the process for this jackpot game ends.

The main CPU 110a performs a round data initialization process in step S340-12. Specifically, it clears the number of openings (K) and the big prize opening winning ball counter (C). However, it does not clear the number of rounds played (R).

In step S340-13, the main CPU 110a determines whether the number of round games (R) has reached the maximum number of round games. If it is the maximum number of round games, the process moves to step S340-15, and if it is not the maximum number of round games, the process moves to step S340-14.

In step S340-14, the main CPU 110a adds "1" to the number of rounds played (R), stores the result, and ends the current jackpot game process.

In step S340-15, the main CPU 110a clears the number of rounds (R), and in step S340-16, it determines the type of special game (long win game, short win game, extended win game) based on the big prize opening mode determination table (see FIG. 9) determined in step S330-9 above, and sets an ending designation command corresponding to the type of big prize game in the performance transmission data storage area. This causes the ending designation command to be sent to the performance control board 120, which then performs processing to execute the ending performance of the big prize game.

In step S340-17, the main CPU 110a sets the ending time corresponding to the type of jackpot game in the special game timer counter based on the jackpot opening mode determination table (see FIG. 9) determined in step S330-9 above.

In step S340-18, the main CPU 110a determines whether the ending time set in the special game timer counter has elapsed. If the ending time has elapsed, the process proceeds to step S340-19. If the ending time has not elapsed, the process for this big win game ends.

In step S340-19, the main CPU 110a sets the special figure special electric processing data to 4, prepares to move the process to the jackpot game ending process shown in FIG. 24, and ends the current jackpot game process.

(Main control board jackpot game end processing)
The jackpot game ending process of the main control board 110 will be explained using FIG. 24. FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing the jackpot game ending process in the main control board 110.

In step S350-1, the main CPU 110a loads the stop special figure data set in the stop special figure data storage area and the game state information in the game state buffer.

The main CPU 110a performs high probability game flag setting processing in step S350-2. Specifically, it refers to the jackpot game end setting data table shown in FIG. 7, and determines whether or not to transition to a high probability game state at the end of the jackpot game based on the loaded special stop chart data and game state information. If it is to transition to the high probability game state, it sets a high probability game flag indicating that it is in a high probability game state in the high probability game flag storage area. For example, if the special stop chart data is "01", the high probability game flag is set.

The main CPU 110a performs high probability game number setting processing in step S350-3. Specifically, with reference to the jackpot game end setting data table shown in FIG. 7, it is the number of variable displays that can be executed in a high probability gaming state based on the loaded stop special figure data and gaming state information. The number of high probability games (X) is determined, and the determined number of high probability games (X) is set in the high probability game number (X) storage area.

The main CPU 110a performs time-saving game flag setting processing in step S350-4. Specifically, with reference to the jackpot game end setting data table shown in FIG. 7, it is determined whether or not to shift to the time-saving gaming state at the end of the jackpot game based on the loaded stop special figure data and game information. When determining and shifting to the time-saving game state, a time-saving game flag indicating the time-saving game state is set in the time-saving game flag storage area.

The main CPU 110a performs a time-saving game count determination process in step S350-5. Specifically, with reference to the jackpot game end setting data table shown in FIG. 7, based on the loaded stop special figure data and gaming state information, the time saving which is the number of variable displays that can be executed in the time saving gaming state is determined. The number of games (J) is determined, and the determined number of time-saving games (J) is set in the storage area for the number of time-saving games (J).

In step S350-6, the main CPU 110a identifies the gaming state by checking the presence or absence of the high-probability game flag and the time-saving game flag, and sends a gaming state designation command indicating the specified gaming state to the effect transmission data storage area. set. Thereby, a gaming state designation command is transmitted to the production control board 120, and it becomes possible for the production control board 120 to grasp the gaming state.

In step S350-7, the main CPU 110a sets the special symbol special power processing data to 0, prepares to move to the special symbol memory determination process shown in FIG. 19, and ends the current jackpot game end process.

(Main control board general-purpose power control processing)
25, the normal power control process of the main control board 110 will be described. FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing the normal power control process in the main control board 110.

First, in step S401, the main CPU 110a loads the general pattern and general electricity processing data, and if the general pattern and general electricity processing data = 0, the process is moved to the normal symbol fluctuation processing (step S410), and the general pattern and general electricity processing data If =1, the process moves to the auxiliary game process (step S420).

As described later, this "universal and general electric power processing data" is set as necessary in each subroutine of the general and general electric power control processing, so that the necessary subroutines are processed as appropriate as the game progresses. It turns out.

The main CPU 110a performs normal symbol variation processing in step S410, and ends the current general pattern and general electricity control processing. Specifically, a hit determination process, a process of displaying the normal symbols in a variable manner, a process of stopping and displaying the normal symbols, etc. are performed. The details will be described later using FIG. 26.

The main CPU 110a performs the auxiliary game process in step S420, and ends the current general figure general electric power control process. Specifically, processing for controlling the auxiliary game is performed. The details will be described later using FIG. 27.

(Main control board normal pattern change processing)
The normal symbol variation process of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to Fig. 26. Fig. 26 is a flow chart showing the normal symbol variation process in the main control board 110.

In step S410-1, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the normal pattern is being displayed in a changing state. If the normal pattern is being displayed in a changing state, the process proceeds to step S410-9. If the normal pattern is not being displayed in a changing state, the process proceeds to step S410-2.

In step S410-2, the main CPU 110a determines whether the number of normal symbols reserved (G) is 1 or more. If the number of normal symbols held (G) is 1 or more, the process moves to step S410-3, and if the number of normal symbols held (G) is not 1 or more, the current normal symbol variation process is ended.

In step S410-3, the main CPU 110a subtracts 1 from the number of reserved normal symbols (G) to update it, and then proceeds to step S410-4.

In step S410-4, the main CPU 110a shifts the normal symbol determination information stored in the normal symbol retention storage area. Specifically, each piece of normal figure determination information stored in the first storage unit to the fourth storage unit is shifted to the previous storage unit. Here, the normal pattern determination information stored in the first storage section is shifted to the normal pattern execution storage area (0th storage section). At this time, the special symbol determination information used in the previous fluctuating display of the regular symbol, which has already been written in the regular symbol execution storage area (0th storage section), is erased.

The main CPU 110a performs a win determination process in step S410-5. Specifically, the main CPU 110a refers to the win determination table shown in FIG. 11(a) to determine whether or not a win has occurred based on the game state and the random number value for win determination stored in the normal game execution memory area.

The main CPU 110a performs normal symbol determination processing in step S410-6. Specifically, with reference to the normal symbol determination table shown in FIG. 11(b), the stop display is performed based on the current time-saving gaming state, the lottery result of the winning lottery, and the acquired random number value for determining the regular symbol. The normal symbol (stopped common symbol data) to be played is determined, the determined stopped common symbol data is set in the stopped common symbol data storage area, and the common symbol designation command corresponding to the stopped common symbol data is stored in the performance transmission data of the main RAM 110c. Set to area. As a result, the normal pattern designation command is transmitted to the production control board 120, and the production control board 120 can grasp the stopped general pattern data.

The main CPU 110a performs normal symbol fluctuation time determination processing in step S410-7. Specifically, with reference to the normal pattern fluctuation pattern determination table shown in FIG. The symbol fluctuation time is determined and set in the normal symbol time counter, and the normal symbol fluctuation designation command corresponding to the normal symbol fluctuation time is set in the performance transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. As a result, the normal symbol fluctuation designation command is transmitted to the production control board 120, and the production control board 120 can grasp the variation time of the normal symbol.

In step S410-8, the main CPU 110a starts displaying the normal symbol variation, and ends the current normal symbol variation processing. Specifically, the variable display data of normal symbols is set in a predetermined area of the main RAM 110c. As a result, display data for variably displaying the normal symbol on the normal symbol display device 22 is created in step S600, and the created data is output in step S700, so that the normal symbol is displayed on the normal symbol display device 22. A variable display will be performed.

In step S410-9, the main CPU 110a determines whether the change time set in the normal pattern time counter has elapsed. If the change time has not elapsed, the current normal pattern change process is terminated, and if the change time has elapsed, the process proceeds to step S410-10.

The main CPU 110a stops the fluctuating display of the normal symbols in step S410-10. Specifically, the fluctuation display data set in step S410-8 above is cleared, and the stop display data for causing the normal symbol set in step S410-6 to be stopped and displayed on the normal symbol display device 22 is cleared as main. Set it in a predetermined area of the RAM 110c. As a result, the normal symbols are stopped and displayed on the normal symbol display device 22, and the player is notified of the winning determination result.

In step S410-11, the main CPU 110a determines whether the stop normal symbol data set in the stop normal symbol data storage area is a winning normal symbol. If it is a winning normal symbol, the process proceeds to step S410-12, and if it is not a winning normal symbol, the process of changing the normal symbol this time is terminated.

In step S410-12, the main CPU 110a sets the normal game processing data = 1, prepares to move to the auxiliary game processing shown in Figure 27, and performs the opening mode determination process in step S410-13. Specifically, it refers to the start port opening mode determination table shown in Figure 11 (d) and determines the maximum number of openings of the start movable piece 15b, the opening time of the auxiliary game, the opening time of the second start port 15, the interval time, and the ending time of the auxiliary game based on the stop normal game data.

In step S410-14, the main CPU 110a sets the opening time of the auxiliary game to the auxiliary game timer counter, and ends the current normal symbol variation process. In addition, the auxiliary game timer counter is subtracted every 4 ms in step S110.

(Main control board auxiliary game processing)
The auxiliary game processing of the main control board 110 will be explained using FIG. 27. FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing the auxiliary game processing in the main control board 110.

First, in step S420-1, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the auxiliary game is currently being opened. If the opening is in progress, the process moves to step S420-2, and if the opening is not in progress, the process moves to S420-4.

In step S420-2, the main CPU 110a determines whether the opening time set in the auxiliary game timer counter has elapsed. If the opening time has not elapsed, the current auxiliary game process is terminated, and if the opening time has elapsed, the process proceeds to step S420-3.

The main CPU 110a performs the second starting port opening process in step S420-3, and ends the current auxiliary game process. Specifically, "1" is added to the number of openings (S), energization data for energizing the second starting port opening/closing solenoid 15c is set, and the second starting port 15 corresponding to the number of openings (S) is set. Set the opening time in the auxiliary game timer counter. This opens the second starting port 15.

In step S420-4, the main CPU 110a determines whether the auxiliary game is currently ending. If it is ending, the process proceeds to step S420-12. If it is not ending, the process proceeds to step S420-5.

In step S420-5, the main CPU 110a determines whether the second starting port 15 is being closed (interval). Specifically, it is determined whether energization data for energizing the second starting port opening/closing solenoid 15c has been set. If the second starting port 15 is being closed, the process moves to step S420-6, and if the second starting port 15 is not being closed, the process moves to step S420-7.

In step S420-6, the main CPU 110a determines whether the closing time (interval time) of the second start port 15 set in the auxiliary play timer counter has elapsed. If the closing time has not elapsed, the current auxiliary process is terminated, and if the closing time has elapsed, the process proceeds to step S420-3 to open the second start port 15.

In step S420-7, the main CPU 110a determines whether the opening end condition for ending the opening of the second start hole 15 has been met. Specifically, it determines whether either the value of the second start hole winning ball counter (D) has reached a specified number (10 balls) or the opening time per opening count (S) has elapsed. If it is determined that the opening end condition has been met, the process proceeds to step S420-8, and if it is determined that the opening end condition has not been met, the current auxiliary game process is terminated.

The main CPU 110a performs a second starting port closing process in step S420-8. Specifically, the energization data for energizing the second starting port opening/closing solenoid 15c is cleared, and the closing time of the second starting port 15 determined in step S410-13 is set in the auxiliary game timer counter. This causes the second starting port 15 to close.

In step S420-9, the main CPU 110a determines whether the auxiliary game is to be ended. Specifically, it determines whether the number of times the second start opening has been opened (S) has reached the maximum number of times. If the auxiliary game is to be ended, the process proceeds to step S420-10. If the auxiliary game is not to be ended, the current auxiliary game process is ended.

The main CPU 110a performs auxiliary game termination processing in step S420-10. Specifically, it clears the number of openings (S) and the second start port winning ball counter (D).

In step S420-11, the main CPU 110a sets the ending time determined in step S410-13 above in the auxiliary game timer counter.

In step S420-12, the main CPU 110a determines whether the ending time set in the auxiliary game timer counter has elapsed. If the ending time has elapsed, the process proceeds to step S420-13, and if the ending time has not elapsed, the current auxiliary game process is terminated.

In step S420-13, the main CPU 110a sets the normal symbol/normal power processing data to 0, prepares to move to the normal symbol variation processing shown in FIG. 26, and ends this auxiliary game processing.

(Main processing of the production control section)
The processing executed by the sub CPU 120a in the production control unit 120m will be explained. First, the main processing of the production control section 120m will be explained using FIG. 28. FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing the main processing in the production control section 120m.

First, the sub CPU 120a performs initialization processing in step S1000. In this process, when the power is turned on, the sub CPU 120a reads the main processing program from the sub ROM 120b, and also initializes and sets flags stored in the sub RAM 120c.

In step S1100, the sub-CPU 120a performs a sub-random number update process. In this process, the sub-CPU 120a performs a process of updating various random number values stored in the sub-RAM 120c. Thereafter, the process of step S1100 is repeated until a predetermined interrupt process is performed.

(Timer interrupt processing of production control section)
The timer interrupt processing of the production control unit 120m will be explained using FIG. 29. FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing in the production control section 120m. Although not shown, a reset clock pulse generation circuit provided in the production control unit 120m generates a clock pulse at a predetermined period (2 milliseconds), reads the timer interrupt processing program, and outputs the production control board. The timer interrupt processing is executed.

In step S1300, the sub-CPU 120a saves the information stored in the registers of the sub-CPU 120a to the stack area.

In step S1400, sub CPU 120a performs command analysis processing. In this process, the sub CPU 120a performs a process of analyzing the command stored in the reception buffer of the sub RAM 120c. Details of the command analysis process will be described later using FIGS. 30 and 31.

In addition, when the production control unit 120m receives a command transmitted from the main control board 110, a command reception interrupt process (not shown) of the production control unit 120m occurs, and the received command is stored in the reception buffer of the sub-RAM 120c. It has become.

In step S1500, the sub-CPU 120a performs a timer update process to update various timer counters used by the performance control unit 120m.

In step S1700, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not the signals from the production button detection switch 35a and the cross button detection switch 36b are input, and if the signals from the production button detection switch 35a, etc. Performance input control processing is performed to transmit a performance button signal and the like to the audio control unit 150.

In step S1800, the sub-CPU 120a performs data output processing to transmit various commands set in the transmission buffer of the sub-RAM 120c to the lamp/drive control unit 160 and the display/audio control unit 150.

In step S1900, the sub-CPU 120a restores the information saved in step S1300 to the register of the sub-CPU 120a.

(Command analysis process of the production control unit)
Next, the command analysis process of the performance control unit 120m will be described with reference to Fig. 30 and Fig. 31. Fig. 30 is a flow chart showing the command analysis process (1) in the performance control unit 120m, and Fig. 31 is a flow chart showing the command analysis process (2) in the performance control unit 120m. The command analysis process (2) is performed following the command analysis process (1).

In step S1401, the sub CPU 120a refers to the reception buffer and determines whether a command has been received. If a command has been received, the process moves to step S1402, and if a command has not been received, the current command analysis process ends.

In step S1402, the sub-CPU 120a determines whether the command stored in the reception buffer is a special symbol storage command. If it is a special symbol storage command, the process proceeds to step S1403. If it is not a special symbol storage command, the process proceeds to step S1404.

In step S1403, the sub-CPU 120a performs pending memory update processing and ends the current command analysis processing. Specifically, it performs processing such as analyzing the pending memory count from the received special symbol memory designation command and setting the analyzed pending memory count in the pending memory count counter of the sub-RAM 120c.

In step S1404, the sub CPU 120a determines whether the command stored in the reception buffer is a starting opening prize designation command. If it is a starting opening winning designation command, the process moves to step S1405, and if it is not a starting opening winning designation command, the process moves to step S1406.

The sub CPU 120a performs icon change effect determination processing in step S1405, and ends the current command analysis processing. Specifically, based on the contents of the received starting opening winning designation command, processing is performed to determine whether or not to execute the icon change effect and the change scenario.

Note that the icon change effect corresponds to the effect using the above-mentioned hold icon and the starting gate lamp 14b.

In step S1406, the sub CPU 120a determines whether the command stored in the reception buffer is an effect design designation command. If it is a performance symbol designation command, the process moves to step S1407, and if it is not a performance design designation command, the process moves to step S1408.

In step S1407, the sub-CPU 120a performs a basic symbol data determination process and ends the current command analysis process. Specifically, the sub-CPU 120a performs a process to determine basic symbol data (first to third jackpot symbol data, losing symbol data) that enables the presence or absence of a jackpot and the type of jackpot to be identified based on the contents of the received performance symbol designation command.

In step S1408, the sub-CPU 120a determines whether the command stored in the receive buffer is a variation pattern designation command. If it is a variation pattern designation command, the process proceeds to step S1409. If it is not a variation pattern designation command, the process proceeds to step S1412.

In step S1409, the sub-CPU 120a performs a variable performance pattern determination process. Specifically, based on the content of the received variable pattern designation command, the variable performance pattern, which is the performance mode of the variable performance executed using various performance devices, is determined, and a variable performance pattern command corresponding to the determined variable performance pattern is set in the transmission buffer of the sub-RAM 120c. As a result, the variable performance pattern command is transmitted to the display/audio control unit 150 and the lamp/drive control unit 160, and processing is performed to execute the variable performance. Details of this variable performance pattern determination process will be described later using FIG. 32.

In step S1410, the sub-CPU 120a performs an icon display mode update process. Specifically, based on the change scenario determined in the icon change performance determination process described above and the determined change performance pattern, the sub-CPU 120a performs a process for updating the display mode of the pending icon and the change icon displayed on the image display device 31 to execute the icon change performance.

The sub CPU 120a performs jackpot preview effect determination processing in step S1411. Specifically, based on the determined variable performance pattern, processing is performed to determine whether or not there will be a jackpot preview performance, the type of jackpot preview performance to be executed, and the like. Details of this jackpot preview effect determination process will be described later using FIG. 34.

The jackpot prediction effect is an effect that suggests that a jackpot game may be played as a result of the variable effect currently being performed (a effect that creates anticipation that a jackpot game will be played), or an effect that suggests the result of the jackpot determination.

In step S1412, the sub CPU 120a determines whether the command stored in the reception buffer is a symbol confirmation command. If it is a symbol confirmation command, the process moves to step S1413, and if it is not a pattern confirmation command, the process moves to step S1414.

In step S1413, the sub CPU 120a performs a production pattern determination stop process, and ends the current command analysis process. Specifically, in order to display the performance symbols 38 in a fixed and stopped manner, a process is performed in which a stop designation command for displaying the production symbols in a fixed and stopped state is set in the transmission buffer of the sub-RAM 120c. As a result, a stop designation command is transmitted to the display/audio control section 150 and the lamp/drive control section 160, and processing for displaying the variable effect as a fixed stop is performed.

In step S1414, the sub-CPU 120a determines whether the command stored in the receive buffer is a game state designation command. If it is a game state designation command, the process proceeds to step S1415. If it is not a game state designation command, the process proceeds to step S1416.

In step S1415, the sub-CPU 120a performs a game state setting process and ends the current command analysis process. Specifically, the sub-CPU 120a identifies the current game state by referring to the received game state designation command, and sets data indicating the identified game state in a specified area of the sub-RAM 120c.

In step S1416, the sub CPU 120a determines whether the command stored in the reception buffer is an opening designation command. If it is an opening designation command, the process moves to step S1417, and if it is not an opening designation command, the process moves to step S1418.

In step S1417, the sub-CPU 120a performs an opening performance pattern determination process and ends this command analysis process. Specifically, based on the opening designation command, the sub-CPU 120a determines the performance pattern of the opening performance that will be performed at the start of a big win game, and performs a process to set the opening performance designation command corresponding to the determined performance pattern in the transmission buffer of the sub-RAM 120c. As a result, the opening performance designation command is transmitted to the display/sound control unit 150 and the lamp/drive control unit 160, and processing is performed to execute the opening performance.

In step S1418, the sub-CPU 120a determines whether the command stored in the receive buffer is a round designation command. If it is a round designation command, the process proceeds to step S1419. If it is not a round designation command, the process proceeds to step S1420.

In step S1419, the sub-CPU 120a performs a round performance pattern determination process and ends this command analysis process. Specifically, based on the round designation command, the sub-CPU 120a determines the performance pattern of the round performance to be performed during the round play, and sets the round performance designation command corresponding to the determined performance pattern in the transmission buffer of the sub-RAM 120c. As a result, the round performance designation command is sent to the display/sound control unit 150 and the lamp/drive control unit 160, and processing is performed to execute the round performance.

In step S1420, the sub CPU 120a determines whether the command stored in the reception buffer is an ending designation command. If it is an ending designation command, the process moves to step S1421, and if it is not an ending designation command, the process moves to step S1422.

In step S1421, the sub-CPU 120a performs a process to determine the jackpot end presentation pattern, and ends this command analysis process. Specifically, based on the ending designation command, it determines the presentation pattern of the ending presentation that will be performed at the end of the jackpot game, and performs a process to set the ending designation command corresponding to the determined presentation pattern in the transmission buffer of the sub-RAM 120c. As a result, the ending designation command is sent to the display/audio control unit 150 and the lamp/drive control unit 160, and processing is performed to execute the ending presentation.

In step S1422, the sub-CPU 120a determines whether the command stored in the receive buffer is a customer waiting state designation command. If it is, the process proceeds to step S1423. If it is not, the sub-CPU 120a ends the current command analysis process.

The sub CPU 120a performs customer waiting effect determination processing in step S1423, and ends the current command analysis processing. Specifically, based on the customer waiting state designation command, a customer waiting performance to be performed during the customer waiting state (customer waiting period) is determined, and a customer waiting performance designation command corresponding to the determined customer waiting performance is transmitted to the sub-RAM 120c. Performs processing to set it in the buffer. As a result, a customer waiting effect designation command is transmitted to the display/audio control unit 150 and the lamp/drive control unit 160, and processing for executing the customer waiting effect is performed.

(Fluctuating performance pattern determination process)
Next, the variable performance pattern determination process of the performance control unit 120m will be explained using FIG. FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing icon change performance determination processing in the performance control section 120m.

In step S1441-1, the sub-CPU 120a refers to the received variation pattern designation command, and in step S1441-2, selects a variation performance pattern determination table (see FIG. 33).

In step S1441-3, the sub-CPU 120a refers to the variable performance pattern determination table and determines one variable performance pattern from among multiple variable performance patterns based on the variable pattern designation command and the allocation ratio (%). Details of this variable performance pattern determination table will be described later using FIG. 33.

In step S1441-4, the sub-CPU 120a sets the variable performance pattern designation command corresponding to the determined variable performance pattern in the transmission buffer of the sub-RAM 120c, and ends this variable performance pattern determination process. This causes the variable performance pattern designation command to be sent to the display/audio control unit 150 and the lamp/drive control unit 160, and processing is performed to execute the variable performance.

(Fluctuating performance pattern determination table)
FIG. 33 is a diagram showing a variable effect pattern determination table that is referred to when determining a variable effect pattern. The variable performance pattern determination table associates the variable performance pattern designation command, the allocation ratio (%) for each variable performance pattern, and the variable performance pattern to be determined, and the performance configuration for each variable performance pattern is shown as a reference. is listed.

The variable performance pattern is the performance mode of the variable performance performed using the performance devices of the image display device 31, the audio output device 32, the board drive device 33, the board lighting device 34a, the frame lighting device 34b, the performance button 35, and the cross button 36, and specifies whether or not there is a pseudo continuous notice, whether or not there is a reach performance, the content of the reach performance, etc.

Here, each term described in the performance structure of the variable performance pattern determination table shown in FIG. 33 will be explained.

"Normal variation" indicates that a normal variation effect is performed in which the performance pattern 38 does not form a reach state.
"Shortened fluctuation" refers to a shortened fluctuation performance in which the fluctuation time is shorter than that of a normal fluctuation performance and no reach state is formed by the performance pattern 38.
"Normal reach" indicates that a normal reach effect is performed in which a reach state is formed by the effect pattern 38.
"SP reach" indicates that a reach state is formed by the performance pattern 38, and an SP reach performance is performed, which has a higher chance of winning than a normal reach performance.
"SPSP reach" indicates that a reach state is formed by the performance pattern 38, and an SPSP reach performance is performed, which has a higher expectation of a jackpot than the SP reach performance.

"Pattern promotion failure" indicates that a promotion effect is executed to see whether or not a reach state will be formed using the left and right performance patterns 38, but ultimately the reach state is not formed.
"Pattern promotion successful" indicates that a promotion effect is executed using the left and right performance patterns 38 to determine whether or not a reach state will be formed, and that the end result is that the reach state will be formed.

"Pseudo consecutive failure" indicates that a teasing effect is performed to see whether or not a pseudo consecutive announcement will be executed, but ultimately the pseudo consecutive announcement will not be executed.
"Pseudo consecutive success" indicates that a teasing effect is carried out to see whether or not a pseudo consecutive announcement will be executed, and that ultimately the pseudo consecutive announcement will be executed.
"Pseudo consecutive success after reach" indicates that a pseudo consecutive announcement is executed after a reach state is formed.

"Button non-hit" means that an operation promotion performance that prompts the operation of the performance button 35 is executed in the final phase (late stage) of the corresponding reach performance, and in this operation promotion performance, the performance button 35 is operated or the performance button 35 is pressed. When the validity period has elapsed, a win/loss notification performance is executed to notify whether or not it is a jackpot, but during the validity period of this operation promotion performance, the performance button 35 does not move upward and remains in a non-protruding state (normal state). It shows that it will be done.
"Button thrust" means that an operation promotion performance that prompts the operation of the performance button 35 is executed in the final phase (late stage) of the corresponding reach performance, and in this operation promotion performance, the performance button 35 is operated or the performance button 35 is activated. When the period has elapsed, a win/loss notification effect is executed to notify whether or not it is a jackpot, but during the valid period of this operation promotion effect, the effect button 35 moves upward and becomes a protruding state (special state). ing.

In the present embodiment, for example, the production button 35 is provided as an operation device that the player operates in the final phase (late stage) of the corresponding ready-to-win production, but the present invention is not limited to this.
For example, other operating means may be provided in addition to the effect button 35. Specifically, a production lever may be provided.
The production lever may be provided integrally with the production button 35, or may be provided separately.
In addition, when a production lever is provided, in the final phase (late stage) of the corresponding ready-to-win production in the case of a jackpot, it may be made easier to select a production that causes the production lever to be operated rather than the production button 35.
That is, "button not pressed" may be read as "effect button 35", and "button pressed" may be read as "effect lever", respectively.

The "revival effect" is an effect in which a miss is first notified in the final stage (endgame) of an SP reach or SPSP reach, and then, during the provisional stop display period before the confirmed stop display, the first decorative member 33a and the second decorative member 33b are activated to notify a jackpot.

The "specific image" is an image that is displayed on the image display device 31 after notifying a loss in SP reach or higher, and is particularly used to perform SP reach or SPSP reach from the background image on which SP reach or SPSP reach was performed. This is an image displayed on the image display device 31 when switching to the previous background image.
In addition, the "specific image" is always displayed if it is equal to or higher than the SP reach of the loss, and in the case of a jackpot, it will be displayed if it is a variable performance pattern (variable performance pattern 30) that performs a "resurrection performance". It is now possible to do so.
That is, the "specific image" has a characteristic that a variable effect pattern of SP reach or higher for a loss is more likely to be displayed than a variable effect pattern of SP reach or higher for a jackpot.
A display example of the "specific image" will be described in detail later using an animation diagram.

The first feature of the variable presentation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 33 is that when a pseudo-sequential announcement presentation is executed, it is easier for a reach presentation to be executed than when the pseudo-sequential announcement is not executed, and the more times the pseudo-sequential announcement is executed, the higher the chance of winning. In this way, it is possible to build up the player's anticipation regarding whether or not a pseudo-sequential announcement will be executed, or the number of times the pseudo-sequential announcement will be executed, and it is possible to increase the enjoyment of the game.

A second feature of the variable presentation pattern determination table shown in Fig. 33 is that the probability of winning is higher when the presentation button 35 is in a special state than when the presentation button 35 remains in a normal state during the effective period that occurs in the final stage (final stage) of the reach presentation. In this way, the player's expectation as to whether the presentation button 35 will be in a special state can be heightened, and the interest of the game can be improved.
When the effect button 35 is in a normal state, a "first operation prompting image" is displayed on the image display device 31 as an operation prompting image for prompting an operation on the effect button 35 (see, for example, the "first operation prompting image" in Figure 62), and when the effect button 35 is in a special state, a "second operation prompting image" is displayed on the image display device 31 as an operation prompting image for prompting an operation on the effect button 35 (see, for example, the "second operation prompting image" in Figure 62).

(Jackpot notice performance decision process)
Next, the big win advance notice effect determination process of the effect control unit 120m will be described with reference to Fig. 34. Fig. 34 is a flowchart showing the big win advance notice effect determination process in the effect control unit 120m.

First, in step S1443-1, the sub-CPU 120a refers to the determined variable performance pattern, and in step S1443-2, using the pre-reach notice determination table (see FIG. 35), determines a notice pattern that specifies whether or not to execute a pre-reach notice performance and the type of pre-reach notice performance to be executed. Details of this pre-reach notice determination table will be described later using FIG. 35.

In step S1443-3, the sub-CPU 120a determines whether the determined preview pattern is a preview pattern that executes a dialogue preview performance. If the preview pattern is a preview pattern that executes a dialogue preview performance, the process proceeds to step S1443-4. If the preview pattern is a preview pattern that does not execute a dialogue preview performance, the process proceeds to step S1443-6.

The dialogue preview effect is a type of jackpot preview effect in which a dialogue suggesting the likelihood of a jackpot is displayed on the image display device 31 based on the operation of the effect button 35, and sound corresponding to the dialogue is output from the audio output device 32.

In step S1443-4, the sub-CPU 120a uses a dialogue pattern determination table (see FIG. 36(a)) to determine a dialogue pattern, which is the presentation mode of the dialogue preview presentation, and sets the determined dialogue pattern in a predetermined area of the sub-RAM 120c. Details of this dialogue pattern determination table will be described later with reference to FIG. 36(a).

In step S1443-5, the sub CPU 120a sets a dialogue preview performance designation command corresponding to the determined dialogue pattern in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 120c. As a result, a dialogue preview performance designation command is transmitted to the display/audio control unit 150 and the lamp/drive control unit 160, and processing for executing the dialogue preview performance is performed.

In step S1443-6, the sub-CPU 120a determines whether the determined preview pattern is a preview pattern that executes a step-up preview performance (SU preview performance). If it is a preview pattern that executes a step-up preview performance, the process proceeds to step S1443-7, and if it is not a preview pattern that executes a step-up preview performance, the process proceeds to step S1443-9.

In addition, the step-up preview performance is a predetermined progression from the first step to any of the multiple steps (stages) from the first step (first stage) to the final step (final stage), depending on the jackpot expectation level. This is a type of jackpot preview performance that executes step performances in sequence. Specifically, more step performances are more likely to be executed when a jackpot game is executed (the jackpot expectation level is high) than when a jackpot game is not executed.

In step S1443-7, the sub-CPU 120a uses a step-up pattern determination table (see FIG. 36(b)) to determine a step-up pattern, which is the presentation mode of the step-up preview presentation, and sets it in a predetermined area of the sub-RAM 120c. Details of this step-up pattern determination table will be described later with reference to FIG. 36(b).

In step S1443-8, the sub CPU 120a sets a step-up preview performance designation command corresponding to the determined step-up pattern in the transmission buffer of the sub-RAM 120c. As a result, a step-up preview performance designation command is transmitted to the display/audio control unit 150 and the lamp/drive control unit 160, and processing for executing the step-up preview performance is performed.

In step S1443-9, the sub-CPU 120a determines whether the determined preview pattern is a preview pattern that will execute a roulette preview performance. If the determined preview pattern is a preview pattern that will execute a roulette preview performance, the process proceeds to step S1443-10. If the determined preview pattern is not a preview pattern that will execute a roulette preview performance, the process proceeds to step S1443-12.

In addition, the roulette preview effect is to display multiple selection icons, rotate the cursor image on the multiple selection icons, and after a predetermined period of time, stop the cursor image on any one of the selection icons ( This is a type of jackpot preview performance in which the player selects one of the selection icons and executes the performance indicated by the selected selection icon. For example, if the selection icon "SP" is selected, "SP reach" will be executed. In addition, for example, it is easier to select the selection icons such as "fierce heat" or "rainbow" when a jackpot game is executed (higher jackpot expectation) than when a jackpot game is not executed. .

In step S1443-10, the sub-CPU 120a uses a roulette pattern determination table (see FIG. 37(c)) to determine the roulette pattern and selection icon, which are the presentation aspects of the roulette preview presentation, and sets them in a predetermined area of the sub-RAM 120c. Details of this roulette pattern determination table will be described later with reference to FIG. 37(c).

In step S1443-11, the sub-CPU 120a sets a roulette preview performance designation command corresponding to the determined roulette pattern in the transmission buffer of the sub-RAM 120c. This causes the roulette preview performance designation command to be transmitted to the display/audio control unit 150 and the lamp/drive control unit 160, and processing is performed to execute the roulette preview performance.

In step S1443-12, the sub CPU 120a uses the in-reach notice determination table (see FIG. 38(a)) to create a notice pattern in which the presence or absence of the in-reach notice performance and the type of the in-reach notice performance to be executed are determined. Determine. Details of this in-reach notice determination table will be described later using FIG. 38(a).

In step S1443-13, the sub-CPU 120a determines whether the determined preview pattern is a preview pattern that executes a character group preview performance. If the preview pattern is a preview pattern that executes a character group preview performance, the process proceeds to step S1443-14. If the preview pattern is a preview pattern that does not execute a character group preview performance, the process proceeds to step S1443-16.

The character group preview effect is a type of jackpot preview effect in which a group of multiple types of characters with different jackpot expectancies is displayed on the image display device 31.

In step S1443-14, the sub CPU 120a uses the character group pattern determination table (see FIG. 38(b)) to determine a character group pattern, which is the production mode of the character group preview production, and stores it in a predetermined area of the sub RAM 120c. set. Details of this character group pattern determination table will be described later using FIG. 38(b).

In step S1443-15, the sub CPU 120a sets a character group preview performance designation command corresponding to the determined character group pattern in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 120c. As a result, a character group preview performance designation command is transmitted to the display/audio control unit 150 and lamp/drive control unit 160, and the character group preview performance is executed.

In step S1443-16, the sub CPU 120a determines whether the determined notice pattern is a notice pattern for executing a decorative member notice performance. If the preview pattern is to execute a decorative member preview performance, the process moves to step S1443-17, and if it is not a preview pattern to execute a decorative member preview performance, the current jackpot preview performance determination process is ended.

The decorative member preview performance is a type of jackpot preview performance in which the first decorative member 33a and the second decorative member 33b are activated from their initial positions to their activated positions. Specifically, the first decorative member 33a and the second decorative member 33b are more likely to be activated from their initial positions to their activated positions when a jackpot game is played (when the likelihood of a jackpot is high) than when a jackpot game is not played.

In step S1443-17, the sub-CPU 120a uses a decorative member operation count determination table (see FIG. 38(c)) to determine the number of operations of the first decorative member 33a and the second decorative member 33b in the decorative member preview performance, and sets this in a specified area of the sub-RAM 120c. Details of the decorative member operation count determination table will be described later with reference to FIG. 38(c).

In step S1443-18, the sub-CPU 120a sets the decorative member preview designation command corresponding to the determined number of operations in the transmission buffer of the sub-RAM 120c, and ends the current jackpot preview performance determination process.

(Pre-reach notice decision table)
35 is a diagram showing a reach-before-notice determination table that is referred to when determining a notice pattern of a reach-before-notice. In the reach-before-notice determination table, the big win lottery result, the variable performance pattern type, the allocation ratio (%) for each notice pattern, and the notice pattern to be determined are associated with each other.

There are four types of pre-reach preview patterns: "No Preview", where no pre-reach preview is executed; "Dialogue Preview", where a dialogue preview effect is executed; "Step-up Preview", where a step-up preview effect is executed; and "Roulette Preview", where a roulette preview effect is executed. The probability of winning is as follows: No Preview < Dialogue Preview < Roulette Preview < Step-up Preview.

The feature of the reach-before-notice determination table shown in Fig. 35 is that the reach-before-notice is more likely to be executed when the jackpot lottery result is a jackpot than when it is a miss, and the reach-before-notice is more likely to be executed when a variable presentation pattern with a high jackpot expectation is determined than when a variable presentation pattern with a low jackpot expectation is determined. In this way, it is possible to increase the player's expectation for the jackpot game to be executed, and to improve the enjoyment of the game.
It should be noted that the pre-reach notice shown in FIG. 35 is merely one example, and a pre-reach notice not shown may also be provided.

(Serif pattern determination table)
FIG. 36(a) is a diagram showing a dialogue pattern determination table that is referred to when determining a dialogue pattern. The line pattern determination table associates the jackpot lottery result, the variable performance pattern type, the distribution ratio (%) for each line pattern, and the line pattern to be determined.

There are four types of dialogue patterns: "normal dialogue", which means it is unclear whether or not a jackpot will be played; "reach confirmed dialogue", which means it is certain that a reach effect will be played; "expectation increase dialogue", which means it is certain that a reach effect will be played and suggests that a jackpot will be played; and "win guaranteed dialogue (premium)", which means it is certain that a jackpot will be played. There are multiple dialogues set for each category, and the jackpot expectation is as follows: normal dialogue < reach confirmed dialogue < expectation increase dialogue < win guaranteed dialogue (jackpot guaranteed).

The features of the dialogue pattern determination table shown in FIG. 36(a) include that dialogues that confirm the reach or more (confirm the reach, increase the expectation, sure win) are more likely to be determined when the jackpot lottery result is a jackpot than when it is a miss, and that dialogues that confirm the reach or more (confirm the reach, increase the expectation, sure win) are more likely to be determined when a variable presentation pattern with a high jackpot expectation is determined than when a variable presentation pattern with a low jackpot expectation is determined. By doing this, it is possible to build up the player's anticipation for the jackpot game to be played, and to increase the enjoyment of the game.

(Step-up pattern decision table)
36B is a diagram showing a step-up pattern determination table to be referred to when determining a step-up pattern. The step-up pattern determination table associates the big win lottery result, the type of variable performance pattern, the allocation ratio (%) for each step-up pattern, and the step-up pattern to be determined.

The step-up patterns include "Normal SU1" in which the first step effect is executed, "Normal SU2" in which the first and second step effects are executed, and "Normal SU1" in which the first to third step effects are executed. ``SU3'', ``Normal SU4'' where the 1st to 4th step effects are executed, ``Normal SU5'' where the 1st to 5th step effects are executed, and a jackpot game where the 1st to 5th step effects are executed. Six types of "probable SU5 (premier)" that are guaranteed to be executed are set, and the jackpot expectation level is normal SU1<normal SU2<normal SU3<normal SU4<normal SU5<probable SU5.

The step-up pattern determination table shown in FIG. 36(b) has the following features: a step-up pattern with a greater number of step effects is more likely to be determined when the jackpot lottery result is a jackpot than when it is a miss; and a step-up pattern with a greater number of step effects is more likely to be determined when a variable presentation pattern with a high jackpot expectation is determined than when a variable presentation pattern with a low jackpot expectation is determined. This makes it possible to build up the player's anticipation for a jackpot game, and to increase the enjoyment of the game.

(Roulette pattern determination table)
37C is a diagram showing a roulette pattern determination table that is referred to when determining a roulette pattern and a selection icon. The roulette pattern determination table associates a jackpot lottery result, a type of a variable presentation pattern, an allocation ratio (%) for each roulette pattern, a determined roulette pattern, and a selection icon.

The roulette patterns include "Roulette pattern 1" whose selection icons are "x", "?", "SP", "heat", and "rainbow"; Two types of roulette patterns are set, ``roulette pattern 2'' consisting of ``hot heat'' and ``rainbow,'' and the expected jackpot is roulette pattern 1 < roulette pattern 2.

The roulette pattern determination table shown in FIG. 37(c) has the following features: roulette pattern 2 is more likely to be determined when the jackpot lottery result is a jackpot than when it is a miss; and selection icons such as "Super Hot" or "Rainbow" are more likely to be selected when a variable presentation pattern with a high jackpot expectation is determined than when a variable presentation pattern with a low jackpot expectation is determined. This makes it possible to build up the player's anticipation for the execution of a jackpot game, and to increase the enjoyment of the game.

(Reach notice determination table)
FIG. 38(a) is a diagram showing a ready-to-reach notice determination table that is referred to when determining a notice pattern for a ready-to-reach notice. The in-reach notice determination table is associated with the jackpot lottery result, the type of variable performance pattern, the allocation ratio (%) for each notice pattern, and the notice pattern to be determined.

The notice patterns for the in-reach notice include "No notice" in which the in-reach notice is not executed, "Character group notice effect" in which the character group notice effect is executed, and "Decorative member notice effect" in which the decorative member notice effect is executed. There are three types, and the expected jackpot is as follows: no advance notice <decoration member advance notice <character group advance notice.

The feature of the reach-in-progress notice determination table shown in Fig. 38(a) is that the reach-in-progress notice (character group notice performance) is more likely to be executed when the jackpot lottery result is a jackpot than when it is a miss, and the reach-in-progress notice (character group notice performance) is more likely to be executed when a variable performance pattern with a high jackpot expectation is determined than when a variable performance pattern with a low jackpot expectation is determined. In this way, it is possible to increase the player's expectation for the jackpot game to be executed, and to increase the interest of the game.
It should be noted that the reach-in-progress forecast shown in FIG. 38 is merely one example, and reach-in-progress forecasts not shown may also be provided.

(Character group pattern determination table)
38B is a diagram showing a character group pattern determination table that is referenced when determining a character group pattern. The character group pattern determination table associates the big win lottery result, the type of variable presentation pattern, the allocation ratio (%) for each character group pattern, and the character group pattern to be determined.

There are four types of character group patterns: "First character group" where the first character group is displayed, "Second character group" where the second character group is displayed, "Third character group" where the third character group is displayed, and "Fourth character group (premium)" where the fourth character group is displayed and a jackpot is confirmed. The probability of a jackpot is First character group < Second character group < Third character group < Fourth character group (guaranteed jackpot).

A feature of the character group pattern determination table shown in FIG. 38(b) is that it is determined that a variable performance pattern equal to or higher than the SP reach performance will be executed at the time the character group preview performance is executed. By doing so, it is possible to increase the player's expectations as to whether or not the character group preview performance will be executed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

(Decoration member operation number determination table)
FIG. 38(c) is a diagram showing a decorative member operation number determination table that is referred to when determining the number of times to operate the first decorative member 33a and the second decorative member 33b. The decorative member operation count determination table is associated with the operation count for each variable performance pattern.
For example, a variable performance pattern that ultimately executes an SP reach effect is associated with "1" as the number of operations, and a variable effect pattern that ultimately executes an SPSP reach effect is associated with a number of operations of "1". ” or “2”, and “3” is associated with the variable performance pattern that finally executes the full rotation reach performance as the number of operations.
In addition, in the variable performance pattern in which the SPSP reach performance is finally executed, the number of operations "1" is more likely to be selected when the player loses, and the number of operations "2" is easier to select when the player wins the jackpot.
In other words, the jackpot expectation is as follows: 1 action < 2 actions < 3 actions (big hit confirmed).

The decorative member operation count determination table shown in FIG. 38(c) has the following features: for example, if the first decorative member 33a and the second decorative member 33b are activated once at the start of a fluctuation or during a normal reach, it is determined that a fluctuation presentation pattern equal to or greater than the SP reach presentation will be executed. Also, if the first decorative member 33a and the second decorative member 33b are activated three times, a jackpot is determined. In this way, it is possible to build up the player's anticipation as to whether or not a decorative member advance notice presentation will be executed, making it possible to increase the enjoyment of the game.

(Main processing of the overall control unit 151)
The main processing of the overall control unit 151 will be explained using FIG. 39. FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing the main processing of the overall control unit 151.

When power supply voltage is supplied from the power supply board 140, a system reset occurs in the central CPU 152, and the central CPU 152 performs the following main processing.

First, the supervising CPU 152 sets interrupt prohibition to prohibit timer interrupts in step T1, and performs initialization processing in step T2. In this process, the overall CPU 152 reads the main processing program from the overall ROM 153, initializes flags, etc. stored in the overall RAM 154, and performs processing such as initialization.

In step T3, the overall CPU 152 sets an interrupt permission to allow a timer interrupt, and in step T4, it refers to the receiving buffer of the overall RAM 154 to determine whether or not a performance instruction command has been received from the performance control unit 120m. If no performance instruction command has been received (step T4: No), it moves the process to step T7. If a performance instruction command has been received (step T4: Yes), it performs an animation pattern setting process in step T5, which determines and sets an animation pattern from the animation group of the type corresponding to the received performance instruction command. This will be described in more detail later with reference to FIG. 41.

Examples of performance instruction commands include customer waiting performance commands, icon display commands, change performance commands, variable performance pattern commands, symbol stop pattern commands, opening performance pattern commands, round performance pattern commands, and ending performance pattern commands.

An animation group also includes the types of objects that make up the effect image, the scene (timing) and wait frame (display time) in which the effect image is displayed, target data (sprite image identification number, transfer source address, etc.), One or more animation patterns whose information specifies (specifies) parameters (sprite image display position, transfer destination address, etc.), drawing method, information specifying the image display device for displaying the effect image, etc. are bundled. It is a group formed by

The types of animation groups include, for example, a production pattern group for displaying the animation of the production pattern 38, an icon group for displaying the animation of the pending icon or the relevant variable icon, and a variation production animation such as a background or character. Examples include a variable presentation group for displaying animations such as previews, a preview presentation group for displaying animations for special game presentations, and a special game presentation group for displaying animations for special game presentations.

In step T6, the overall CPU 152 performs a sound setting process to determine and set a sound pattern from the sound group of the type corresponding to the received performance instruction command, and in step T7, it determines whether or not there is a frame switching flag indicating that it is frame update timing to update the performance image to be displayed on the image display device (to draw a new performance image). If there is no frame switching flag (step T7: No), the process proceeds to step T4. If there is a frame switching flag (step T7: Yes), the frame switching flag is cleared in step T8.

In step T9, the overall CPU 152 performs a display list generation and output process to generate a display list composed of a group of drawing control commands and output the generated display list to the image control unit 155.

Here, the display list is image shaping information for forming a performance image to be displayed on the image display device 31, and is generated for each frame or multiple units (frame update timing). In this embodiment, a display list is generated for each frame.

Specifically, since the animation scene information (address) is updated for each set animation pattern in the animation control process described later, drawing control commands are set according to the contents of the animation scene information for each set animation pattern. A display list for one frame corresponding to the current number of frames is generated. Note that the drawing control commands are set in order from the anime pattern of the lowest priority anime group to the anime pattern of the highest priority anime group according to the priority order (drawing order) set for the anime group to which each anime pattern belongs. However, the reverse is also possible.

In step T10, the supervising CPU 152 performs drawing command processing to instruct the image control unit 155 to draw an effect image based on the output display list. By performing this drawing command processing, the image control unit 155 draws the effect image based on the display list on the drawing frame buffer, and causes the image display device 31 to display the effect image that has been drawn on the display frame buffer. I do.

In step T11, the supervising CPU 152 generates a sound list composed of a group of sound control commands, and performs a sound list generation/output process of outputting the generated sound list to the audio control unit 158.

Here, a sound list is audio output information for specifying sounds (BGM, sound effects, etc.) such as audio data and music data to be output from the audio output device 32, and is generated based on the drawing frame when outputting a new sound.

In step T12, the supervising CPU 152 performs a sound output command process to instruct the audio control unit 158 to output a sound based on the output sound list. By performing this sound output command processing, the audio control unit 158 causes the audio output device 32 to output a sound based on the sound list.

Therefore, various sounds are started to be output from the audio output device 32 so as to be synchronized (in sync) with the frame update timing by the image control unit 155, and output from the audio output device 32 is ended so as to be synchronized (in sync) with the frame update timing.

Note that the output of various sounds from the audio output device 32 starts so as to be synchronized (in sync) with the frame update timing, but the output of various sounds from the audio output device 32 may be stopped so as not to be synchronized (in sync) with the frame update timing, or vice versa.

In step T13, the supervising CPU 152 performs animation control processing to update animation scene information (address) for each set animation pattern in preparation for creating a display list for the next frame, and then performs processing in step T4. Thereafter, the processes from step T4 to step T13 are repeated in a loop.

(Command Reception Interrupt Processing of the General Control Unit 151)
The command reception interrupt process of the general control unit 151 will be described with reference to Fig. 40(a). Fig. 40(a) is a flow chart showing the command reception interrupt process of the general control unit 151, and the command reception interrupt process is executed by receiving a performance instruction command transmitted from the performance control unit 120m.

In step T20, the general CPU 152 performs a command reception process to receive the performance instruction command sent from the performance control unit 120m. Specifically, the general CPU 152 performs a process to store the performance instruction command sent from the performance control unit 120m in the reception buffer of the general RAM 154. When this process ends, the current command reception interrupt process ends.

(V blank interrupt processing of overall control unit 151)
The V blank interrupt processing of the overall control unit 151 will be explained using FIG. 40(b). FIG. 40(b) is a flowchart showing the V blank interrupt processing of the overall control unit 151. This is executed every time a V blank signal is received (1/30 second = approximately 33 ms), which is transmitted every 1/30 second (approximately 33 ms).

In step T30, the overall CPU 152 performs a counter update process to update various counters (scene changeover counter, wait frame counter, frame counter, etc.) by a predetermined number (e.g., add "1"), and in step T31, performs a frame buffer switch command process to instruct the image control unit 155 to switch between the first frame buffer area and the second frame buffer area of the VRAM 157.

As a result, each time the V blank interrupt processing is executed every 1/30 seconds (approximately 33 ms), the first frame buffer area and the second frame buffer area are converted into a "drawing frame buffer" and a "display frame buffer". It will alternate between.

In step T32, the overall CPU 152 sets a frame switch flag indicating that the drawing (display) frame has been switched, and ends the current V blank interrupt process. This frame switch flag is referenced in step T7, so the processes in steps T8 to T13 are executed each time the V blank interrupt process is executed (frame update timing).

(Animation Pattern Setting Process of the Overall Control Unit 151)
The animation pattern setting process of the central control unit 151 will be described with reference to Fig. 41. Fig. 41 is a flow chart showing the animation pattern setting process of the central control unit 151.

First, in step T5-1, the supervising CPU 152 determines whether the received performance instruction command is a customer waiting performance command, and if it is not a customer waiting performance command (step T5-1: No), step T5 The process moves to -3, and if it is a customer waiting production command (step T5-1: Yes), a customer waiting animation pattern is selected from the customer waiting group for displaying the customer waiting animation in step T5-2. Performs customer waiting animation pattern setting processing to be determined and set.

In step T5-3, the overall CPU 152 determines whether the received performance instruction command is an icon display pattern command, and if it is not an icon display pattern command (step T5-3: No), it moves the process to step T5-5. If it is an icon display pattern command (step T5-3: Yes), it performs icon animation pattern setting processing in step T5-4 to determine and set an icon animation pattern from an icon group for displaying the animation of the pending icon and the animation of the variable icon.

In step T5-5, the supervising CPU 152 determines whether the received performance instruction command is a variable performance pattern command, and if it is not a variable performance pattern command (step T5-5: No), the control CPU 152 executes step T5-7. If the command is a variable effect pattern command (step T5-5: Yes), a variable effect animation pattern is selected from the variable effect group for displaying background animation and character animation in step T5-6. Performs variable effect animation pattern setting processing to be determined and set.

In step T5-7, the overall CPU 152 determines whether the received effect instruction command is a symbol stop pattern command, and if it is not a symbol stop pattern command (step T5-7: No), it moves the process to step T5-9. If it is a symbol stop pattern command (step T5-7: Yes), it performs a symbol animation pattern setting process in step T5-8 to determine and set a symbol animation pattern from the symbol group for displaying the animation of the effect symbol and the animation of the fourth symbol.

In step T5-9, the supervising CPU 152 determines whether the received performance instruction command is a preview performance pattern command, and if it is not a preview performance pattern command (step T5-9: No), the control CPU 152 executes step T5-11. If the command is a preview performance pattern command (step T5-9: Yes), then in step T5-10, a preview performance group for displaying a preview performance foreshadowing a possibility of a jackpot is executed. A preview performance animation pattern setting process is performed to determine and set a preview performance animation pattern from the following.

In step T5-11, the supervising CPU 152 determines whether the received performance instruction command is an operation promotion pattern command, and if it is not an operation promotion pattern command (step T5-11: No), the control CPU 152 executes step T5-13. If the command is an operation promotion pattern command (step T5-11: Yes), in step T5-12, an operation promotion pattern command is sent from the operation promotion group for displaying an operation promotion effect that prompts the operation of the effect button 35. An operation promotion animation pattern setting process is performed to determine and set an animation pattern.

In step T5-13, the supervising CPU 152 determines whether the received performance instruction command is an operation performance pattern command, and if it is not an operation performance pattern command (step T5-13: No), the control CPU 152 executes step T5-15. If the command is an operation effect pattern command (step T5-13: Yes), in step T5-14, an operation effect animation pattern is determined and set from the operation effect group for displaying the operation effect. Performs operation effect animation pattern setting processing.

In step T5-15, the overall CPU 152 determines whether the received performance instruction command is an opening performance pattern command, and if it is not an opening performance pattern command (step T5-15: No), it moves the process to step T5-17. If it is an opening performance pattern command (step T5-15: Yes), it performs an opening performance animation pattern setting process in step T5-16, which determines and sets an opening performance animation pattern from an opening performance group for displaying an opening performance.

In step T5-17, the supervising CPU 152 determines whether the received performance instruction command is a round performance pattern command, and if it is not a round performance pattern command (step T5-17: No), the control CPU 152 executes step T5-19. If the command is a round effect pattern command (step T5-17: Yes), in step T5-18, a round effect animation pattern is determined and set from the round effect group for displaying the round effect. Performs round production animation pattern setting processing.

In step T5-19, the supervising CPU 152 determines whether the received production instruction command is an ending production pattern command, and if it is not an ending production pattern command (step T5-19: No), the current animation pattern When the setting process is completed and it is an ending effect pattern command (step T5-19: Yes), in step T5-20, an ending effect animation pattern is determined and set from an ending effect group for displaying an ending effect. The ending effect animation pattern determining process is performed, and the current animation pattern setting process is ended.

Next, we will explain the first characteristic part of a specific image using Figures 42 to 46.

FIG. 42 is a time chart 1 showing details of each variable effect pattern (see FIG. 33), in which (a) shows details of variable effect pattern 1, and (b) shows details of variable effect pattern 5. (c) shows the details of the variable effect pattern 7.

In FIG. 42, the "performance pattern (performance pattern 38)", "small performance pattern (small performance pattern 38d)", "reservation design (the above-mentioned reservation number image)", and "specific image" displayed on the image display device 31 are shown in FIG. (Specific image 31e to be described later)" details for each variation effect pattern are shown.

(Timing (a) T0)
(a) is the fluctuation effect pattern 1, and timing (a) T0 is the timing at which the fluctuation display is started. When the variable display starts, the "performance symbols" are scrolled in the vertical direction, and the player can visually recognize the scrolling display.
Further, at this time, the "effect design" is scrolled in the vertical direction in the first display mode.
The "first display mode" is the normal display mode (default display mode) of the "effect design", and for example, as shown in FIG. 43, the display mode ( (composed of the above-mentioned first component and second component). In addition, apart from the "first display mode", it has a "second display mode" (consisting of the above-mentioned second component) consisting only of numerical symbols, and in the variable effect pattern 7 etc. described later. , it is possible to change between the "first display mode" and the "second display mode" during the variable display.

In addition, when the changing display begins, the "small performance pattern" scrolls vertically, and the player can see the scrolling display.
Unlike the "performance patterns," the "small performance patterns" do not have a "first display mode" or a "second display mode," and the display mode remains unchanged regardless of the varying performance pattern. For example, as shown in FIG. 43, it is composed of only number patterns, and does not have character patterns. Also, it is always displayed in the lower right corner of the display area of the image display device 31, and its display position, size, color, and design do not change during the varying performance.

Furthermore, even when the variable display is started, the "pending symbols" are still being displayed, and the player can visually recognize the displayed "pending symbols."
For example, as shown in FIG. 43, "2" is displayed in the first special symbol reservation number display area 31c, which corresponds to the "second storage section" of the first special symbol determination information reservation storage area in FIG. ” indicates that the first special figure determination information is stored. In addition, "0" is displayed in the second special symbol reservation number display area 31d, which is stored in the "first storage section" to "fourth storage section" of the second special symbol determination information reservation storage area in FIG. This indicates that the second special figure determination information is not stored.
That is, the "reserved symbol" can display any number from "0" to "4" in the first special symbol reservation number display area 31c and the second special symbol reservation number display area 31d, and "0" ” is displayed, either the special figure determination information is not stored in the “0th memory unit” or the special figure determination information is stored only in the “0th memory unit”. "1" to "4" indicate the states in which the special figure determination information is stored in the "first storage section" to "fourth storage section", respectively.

Even if the variable display starts, the "specific image" is not displayed, and the player cannot see the "specific image." In addition, in the variable display pattern that includes a "specific image" in the display configuration column of FIG. 33, the "specific image" will be displayed for "2S" just before the provisional stop display period.

These aspects of the "performance pattern", "small performance pattern", "reserved pattern" and "specific image" continue until timing (a) T1.

(Timing (a) T1)
Timing (a) T1 is the timing at which the "normal fluctuation period" ends and the transition to the "temporary stop display period" begins.
At this timing, the "production design" is still visible in the "first display mode", but since it is a "temporary stop display period", after finishing the vertical scroll display, at the predetermined stop position, It can be seen that it is shaking slightly.

Furthermore, at this timing, the "small effect design" continues to be displayed in a vertically scrolling manner so as to be visible.
In other words, the "small effect design" is not displayed with small fluctuations like the "performance pattern" during the "temporary stop display period", but is displayed continuously scrolling in the vertical direction even during the "temporary stop display period". It is designed to do this.

Also, at this time, the "reserved pattern" remains visible.
Furthermore, at this timing, the "specific image" is not displayed and cannot be subsequently viewed (hereinafter, simply referred to as "not displayed").

These aspects of the "performance pattern", "small performance pattern", "reserved pattern" and "specific image" continue until timing (a) T2.

(Timing (a) T2)
Timing (a) T2 is the timing at which the "provisional stop display period" ends and transitions to the "definite stop display period".
At this timing, the "performance pattern" continues to be visible in the "first display mode", but since the "fixed stop display period" has begun, the small swaying display ends and it can be seen as being completely stopped at the specified stopping position.

In addition, at this timing, the "small effect design" is still visible, but since it is a "fixed stop display period", the vertical scroll display is finished and the "left", "middle", and "right" It is possible to visually see how the "small effect design" consisting of the symbols are stopped and displayed at the same time.

Furthermore, at this timing, the "reserved symbol" continues to be visible.
Further, at this timing, the "specific image" is not displayed.

Then, these aspects of "production symbols", "small production symbols", "holding symbols", and "specific images" are continued until timing (a) T3, and when timing (a) T3 is reached, the variable production Pattern 1 ends (one game ends).

(Timing (b) T0)
(b) is variable production pattern 5, and each aspect of the "production symbol", "small production symbol", "holding symbol", and "specific image" in the "normal variation period" up to timing (b) T1 is , is the same as the "normal fluctuation period" of the above-mentioned fluctuation effect pattern 1, so the explanation will be omitted.

(Timing (b) T1)
Timing (b) T1 is the timing when the "normal fluctuation period" ends and transitions to the "normal reach fluctuation period".
At this timing, the "performance pattern" continues to be visible in the "first display mode", but since it is now the "normal reach fluctuation period", for example, the left performance pattern 38a and the right performance pattern 38c are displayed temporarily stopped with the same character pattern + number pattern, and it is possible to see the middle performance pattern 38b scrolling vertically (reach state).

Also, at this timing, the "small performance pattern" continues to be displayed scrolling vertically so as to be visible.
In other words, during the "normal reach fluctuation period", the "small performance pattern" does not form a reach state like the "performance pattern", but rather the "left", "middle", and "right" patterns continue to scroll vertically even during the "normal reach fluctuation period".

Furthermore, at this timing, the "reserved symbol" continues to be visible.
Further, at this timing, the "specific image" is not displayed.

These aspects of the "performance pattern", "small performance pattern", "reserved pattern" and "specific image" continue until timing (b) T2.

(Timing (b) T2)
Timing (b) T2 is the timing at which the "normal reach fluctuation period" ends and the transition to the "temporary stop display period" begins.
At this timing, the "production design" is still visible in the "first display mode", but since it is the "temporary stop display period" after the "normal reach fluctuation period", the vertical scroll display is finished. For example, the "5" symbol (left presentation pattern 38a), the "6" pattern (middle presentation pattern 38b), and the "5" pattern (right presentation pattern 38c) are visually observed to be shaking slightly at a predetermined stop position. It is possible.

In addition, each aspect of the "small effect symbol", "holding symbol", and "specific image" at timing (b) T2, and "temporary stop display period" from timing (b) T2 to timing (b) T3. Aspects of "performance design", "small performance design", "retention design", and "specific image", timing (b) "performance design", "small performance design", "retention symbol", and "specific image" at T3 Each aspect, each aspect of the ``effect pattern'', ``small effect pattern'', ``holding pattern'', and ``specific image'' in the ``confirmed stop display period'' from timing (b) T3 to timing (b) T4 is as follows: Since this is the same as the above-mentioned variable effect pattern 1, the explanation will be omitted.
Then, when the timing (b) T4 is reached, the variable performance pattern 5 ends (one game ends).

(Timing (c) T0)
(c) is variable presentation pattern 7, and the aspects of the “presentation pattern,” “small presentation pattern,” “reserved pattern,” and “specific image” of the “normal fluctuation period” and “normal reach fluctuation period” from timing (c) T1 through timing (c) T2 are the same as the “normal fluctuation period” and “normal reach fluctuation period” of the variable presentation pattern 5 described above, so explanations will be omitted.

(Timing (c) T2)
Timing (c) T2 is the timing when the "normal reach fluctuation period" ends and a "background change" occurs to switch from the "normal reach fluctuation period" to the "SP reach fluctuation period".
At this timing, the "effect pattern" forming the reach state becomes invisible due to the background image.
The background image may be a whiteout image, a blackout image, or an obstruction image (such as a door image or a sliding door image).

Also, at this timing, the "small performance pattern" continues to be displayed scrolling vertically so as to be visible.
In other words, the "small performance pattern" does not become invisible when the "background is switched" like the "performance pattern," but rather continues to be visible when the "background is switched" by scrolling vertically.

Furthermore, at this timing, the "reserved symbol" continues to be visible.
Further, at this timing, the "specific image" is not displayed.

Then, these aspects of the "performance symbol", "small performance symbol", "holding symbol", and "specific image" are continued until timing (c) T3 is reached.

(Timing (c) T3)
Timing (c) T3 is the timing when the "background switching" ends and the "SP reach fluctuation period" begins.
At this timing, the "effect symbols" are visible in the "second display mode". Note that in the "SP reach variable period" and "SPSP reach variable period", in order to allow the player to mainly see the contents of the reach effect (for example, a battle effect between character images, etc.), in the "second display mode", only the number symbols are displayed in a corner of the display area of the image display device 31, and the display size is also smaller than the reach state in the "first display mode".

Furthermore, at this timing, the "small effect design" continues to be displayed in a vertically scrolling manner so as to be visible.
In addition, as mentioned above, the display mode of the "small performance symbol" does not change even in the "SP reach variation period".

Also, at this time, the "reserved pattern" remains visible.
Also, at this timing, the "specific image" is not displayed.

These aspects of the "performance pattern", "small performance pattern", "reserved pattern" and "specific image" continue until timing (c) T4.

(Timing (c) T4)
Timing (c) T4 is the timing at which "loss notification" is performed to notify that the result of the jackpot lottery was a loss in the "SP reach variation period".
At this timing, the "production pattern" is visible in the "second display mode", and the scrolling middle presentation pattern 38b is a numerical pattern different from the left presentation pattern 38a and the right presentation pattern 38c. A temporary stop display will be displayed at .

Also, at this timing, the "small performance pattern" continues to be displayed scrolling vertically so as to be visible.
Also, at this time, the "reserved pattern" remains visible.
Also, at this timing, the "specific image" is not displayed.

Then, these modes of "performance symbols", "small performance symbols", "holding symbols", and "specific images" are continued until timing (c) T5.

(Timing (c) T5)
Timing (c) T5 is the timing at which the "SP reach variation period" ends and the transition is made to "background switching" for switching from the "SP reach variation period" to the "temporary stop display period".
At this timing, the "effect pattern" becomes invisible due to the specific image being displayed.

Also, at this timing, the "small performance pattern" continues to be displayed scrolling vertically so as to be visible.
Also, at this time, the "reserved pattern" remains visible.
At this timing, the "specific image" is displayed so as to be visible.
In other words, at the time of “background switching” at this timing, the “specific image,” “small performance pattern,” and “reserved pattern” are visibly displayed in the display area of the image display device 31.

Then, these aspects of the "performance symbol", "small performance symbol", "holding symbol", and "specific image" are continued until timing (c) T6 is reached.
Note that the display time of the "specific image" from timing (c) T5 to timing (c) T6 is "2S".

(Timing (c) T6)
Timing (c) T6 is the timing at which the "background switching" ends and a transition to a "provisional stopped display period" occurs.
At that timing, the "specific image" is erased, and the "performance pattern" becomes visible again in the "first display mode."

In addition, each aspect of the ``small performance pattern,'' ``reserved pattern,'' and ``specific image'' at timing (c) T6, each aspect of the ``performance pattern,'' ``small performance pattern,'' ``reserved pattern,'' and ``specific image'' during the ``temporary stop display period'' from timing (c) T6 to timing (c) T7, each aspect of the ``performance pattern,'' ``small performance pattern,'' ``reserved pattern,'' and ``specific image'' at timing (c) T7, and each aspect of the ``performance pattern,'' ``small performance pattern,'' ``reserved pattern,'' and ``specific image'' during the ``fixed stop display period'' from timing (c) T7 to timing (c) T8 are the same as those in the above-mentioned variable performance pattern 1, so explanations will be omitted.
Then, when timing (c) T8 is reached, variable presentation pattern 7 ends (one game ends).

Next, in order to facilitate understanding of the time chart in FIG. 42, supplementary explanation will be given using the animation in FIG. 43.
Note that FIG. 43 shows only the image display device 31 extracted, and shows the case of (b) variation effect pattern 5 in which the "specific image" is not displayed, and (c) the case of variation effect pattern 5 in which the "specific image" is displayed. Case 7 is described.
Note that in the animation of FIG. 43, only the main part of the time chart is shown.

(Display example in variable performance pattern 5)
(b) T1 to T2 corresponds to the “normal reach fluctuation period.”
In other words, as the left performance pattern 38a, a "5" pattern (first display mode) consisting of a character pattern + number pattern is displayed temporarily stopped (slightly swaying), as the right performance pattern 38c, a "5" pattern (first display mode) consisting of a character pattern + number pattern is displayed temporarily stopped (slightly swaying), and the middle performance pattern 38b is displayed scrolling vertically, thereby forming a reach state.

Furthermore, a background image imitating a mountain is displayed as a background image.
Further, in the lower left corner of the display area of the image display device 31, a first special symbol reservation number display area 31c and a second special symbol reservation number display area 31d are formed, and a reservation number image is displayed.

In addition, in the lower right corner of the display area of the image display device 31, small performance patterns 38d consisting of the patterns "left,""center," and "right" are displayed scrolling vertically.
Also, although not specifically mentioned in the time chart of Figure 42, the variable icon display area 31a and the reserve icon display area 31b are displayed, and one reserve icon in the shape of a circle is displayed in the variable icon display area 31a, and two reserve icons in the shape of a circle are displayed in the reserve icon display area 31b, corresponding to the reserve number image "2" in the first special pattern reserve number display area 31c.

(b) T2 to T3 correspond to the "temporary stop display period".
That is, as the left effect pattern 38a, a "5" pattern (first display mode) consisting of a character pattern and a number pattern is temporarily stopped and displayed (slightly swinging), and as a middle effect pattern 38b, a "5" pattern consisting of a character pattern and a number pattern is displayed (slightly shaking). The "6" symbol (first display mode) is temporarily stopped (slightly shaking), and the "5" symbol (first display mode) consisting of the character symbol + number symbol is temporarily stopped as the right production symbol 38c. is displayed (slightly shaking).
Note that the other display modes are the same as those in (b) T1 to T2, so their explanation will be omitted.

(b) T3 to T4 corresponds to the "determined stop display period."
That is, as the left performance pattern 38a, a ``5'' pattern (first display mode) consisting of a character pattern + number pattern is displayed as a fixed, stopped pattern (completely stopped), as the middle performance pattern 38b, a ``6'' pattern (first display mode) consisting of a character pattern + number pattern is displayed as a fixed, stopped pattern (completely stopped), and as the right performance pattern 38c, a ``5'' pattern (first display mode) consisting of a character pattern + number pattern is displayed as a fixed, stopped pattern (completely stopped).

In addition, small performance patterns 38d consisting of the patterns "left", "center", and "right" are simultaneously displayed as confirmed stops at "5", "6", and "5".
In addition, with the confirmation stop display, the "○" shaped hold icon is erased from the variable icon display area 31a.

(Display example in variable production pattern 7)
(c) T4 to T5 correspond to "loss notification" in the "SP reach fluctuation period".
In the "loss notification", for example, a scene in which an ally character image is defeated by an enemy character image (confrontation effect) is displayed, and an image "losing" indicating the defeat is displayed.
In addition, as the left presentation pattern 38a, a "5" pattern (second display mode) consisting of only numeric symbols is temporarily stopped and displayed (slightly shaking), and as the right presentation pattern 38c, a "5" consisting of only numeric symbols is displayed. The symbol (second display mode) is temporarily stopped and displayed (slightly swinging), and the "6" symbol consisting only of numeric symbols (second display mode) is temporarily stopped and displayed as the middle effect pattern 38b.
Note that the middle effect pattern 38b is displayed at a display size larger than the display size of the left effect pattern 38a and the right effect pattern 38c at the center of the display area.

Further, as a background image, the background image imitating a mountain that was displayed during the "normal reach variation period" is not displayed, but a background image corresponding to the "confrontation effect" is displayed. In this way, in the "SP reach variation period", a background image that is different from the background image displayed in the "normal variation period" or the "normal reach variation period" is displayed.
Further, in the lower left corner of the image display device 31, a first special symbol reservation number display area 31c and a second special symbol reservation number display area 31d are formed, and a reservation number image is displayed.

In addition, in the lower right corner of the image display device 31, a small performance pattern 38d consisting of the patterns "left,""center," and "right" is displayed scrolling vertically.
In addition, although not particularly mentioned in the time chart of Fig. 42, the variable icon display area 31a and the reserved icon display area 31b are not displayed during the "SP reach variable period" in order to direct the player's viewpoint to the SP reach performance. Note that they are not displayed from (c) T2 to (c) T6 in Fig. 42.
In this way, even if the variable icon display area 31a or the reserved icon display area 31b is hidden, the reserved number image continues to be displayed, so the player can check the reserved status by visually checking the reserved number image as appropriate.

(c) T5 to T6 correspond to the "background change" after the "SP reach fluctuation period".
In this "background switching", a specific image 31e (an image resembling a shutter) is displayed over the entire display area.
When the specific image 31e is displayed, the performance pattern 38 and the character image become invisible.
However, the reserved number image and the small performance pattern 38d are not obscured by the display of the specific image 31e, and can be seen even while the specific image 31e is displayed.

(c) T6-T7 corresponds to the "provisional stop display period," and (c) T7-T8 corresponds to the "definite stop display period," but the display content is the same as that described for (b) T2-T3, so the explanation is omitted.

When the display mode of the performance pattern, background image, etc. changes with the execution of the SP reach, as in variable performance pattern 7, (c) the specific image 31e shown in T5 to T6 is temporarily displayed, and then the display mode is returned to that before the SP reach was executed, thereby making it possible to switch the display mode without causing a sense of discomfort to the player.
In addition, after a miss is notified in the SP reach, the specific image 31e is displayed and then the display mode is returned to the state before the SP reach was executed, thereby making the end of the presentation clear and allowing the player to clearly understand that the reach presentation (SP reach) has ended.

The effect pattern (number pattern part) at (c) T4 to T5 before the specific image 31e is displayed, and the effect pattern (number pattern part) at (c) T6 to T7 after the specific image 31e is displayed. part) has the following characteristics.
That is, the display size of the left effect pattern 38a and the right effect pattern 38c becomes larger after the specific image 31e is displayed than before the specific image 31e is displayed, and the display size of the middle effect pattern 38b becomes larger after the specific image 31e is displayed. The display size is smaller than before the image 31e was displayed.
Thereby, it is possible to clarify the point (what is displayed as the confrontation effect or medium effect pattern 38b) that the player wants to see in the SP reach.
Note that the display size is not limited to this and can be changed arbitrarily. For example, the middle effect pattern 38b before the specific image 31e is displayed may also have the same display size as the left effect pattern 38a and the right effect pattern 38c.

Next, using FIG. 44, an example of a production (using the production pattern 38 (predetermined performance) will be explained.
In addition, in FIG. 44, only the image display device 31 is extracted and described, and the variable effect pattern 1 is a variable effect pattern in which a "specific image" is not displayed, and the variable effect pattern 1 is a variable effect pattern in which a "specific image" is displayed. Performance pattern 7 is described as an example.
Note that in the animation of FIG. 44, only the main part of the time chart is shown.

(Display example for variable performance pattern 1)
(a) T0 to T1 corresponds to the "normal fluctuation period."
In other words, the left performance pattern 38a, the middle performance pattern 38b, and the right performance pattern 38c are displayed scrolling vertically.
As other display elements (such as reserved item count images) are the same as those described in FIG. 43, their explanation will be omitted.

(a) T1 to T2 correspond to the "temporary stop display period".
During this "temporary stop display period", the character symbols constituting the performance symbol 38 move.
Specifically, each character pattern of the left presentation pattern 38a, the middle presentation pattern 38b, and the right presentation pattern 38c performs a series of actions such as raising both hands upward and then lowering both hands.
By performing such an operation, it is possible to give a change to the normal fluctuation (fluctuating performance pattern 1) which lacks change, leading to an improvement in the interest in the game.

(a) T2 to T3 correspond to the "determined stop display period".
Note that the display mode in the "determined stop display period" is the same as that described in FIG. 43, so a description thereof will be omitted.
In this way, in the variable effect pattern in which the "specific image" is not displayed, the action effect using the character symbol can be executed during the "temporary stop display period".

(Display example in variable production pattern 7)
The display examples in the variable effect pattern 7 of (c) T4 to T5, (c) T5 to T6, (c) T6 to T7, and (c) T7 to T8 in FIG. 44 are the same as those described in FIG. 43. Therefore, the explanation will be omitted, but in the "temporary stop display period" of (c) T6 to T7, the motion performance using the character symbols forming the performance pattern 38 as described in the above-mentioned variable performance pattern 1 is not performed. .
In this way, in the variable effect pattern in which the "specific image" is displayed, the action effect using the character symbol cannot be performed during the "temporary stop display period".
As a result, even though the display of the specific image 31e makes it clear to the player that the reach effect (SP reach) has ended, the action effect using the character symbol is executed during the "temporary stop display period". By doing so, it is possible to prevent the user from thinking that the reach performance (SP reach) is continuing.

Note that the performance using the performance pattern 38 during the "temporary stop display period" is not limited to the motion performance, and may be other performance.
For example, the so-called "chance eye" performance where the performance pattern 38 temporarily stops and displays discrete numbers such as "3" symbol, "4" symbol, and "5" symbol, and then develops into a reach performance. If installed, the effect may be such that the effect pattern 38 is highlighted (added with a predetermined effect image) during the "temporary stop display period."
That is, in the variable effect pattern in which the "specific image" is displayed, it may be possible to perform an effect such as emphasizing the effect pattern 38 during the "temporary stop display period".

Also, for example, if the production pattern 38 is a "3" symbol, a "5" symbol, a "7" symbol, etc., a combination of odd symbols can be displayed in a continuous fixed stop over multiple fluctuations, and a jackpot will be won in the fluctuation after the multiple fluctuations. In the case of installing a look-ahead effect that makes the user look forward to being given, the effect may be such that the effect pattern 38 is displayed in color (adding a predetermined color image) during the "temporary stop display period."
That is, in the variable effect pattern in which the "specific image" is displayed, it may be possible to perform an effect such as displaying the effect pattern 38 in color during the "temporary stop display period".
In addition, in the production, when a combination of symbols is displayed in a fixed and stopped manner over multiple variations, the combination of symbols is not limited to a combination of odd symbols, but may also be a combination of even symbols, "3" symbol, A combination of symbols arranged in order, such as a "4" symbol and a "5" symbol, may also be used.
In addition, by turning off (darkening) the effect pattern 38, it may be an effect that suggests a transition to SP reach or the like.

Next, the display mode of the "specific image" for each game state will be described with reference to FIG.
Note that Figure 45 shows only the image display device 31, and illustrates a case in which variable presentation pattern 7 is executed in a "normal gaming state" (normal) and a case in which variable presentation pattern 7 is executed in a "high probability gaming state" (high probability).
In the animation of FIG. 45, only the main part of the time chart is shown.

(Example of display in variable performance pattern 7 in normal gaming state)
Display examples in variable effect pattern 7 of (c) T4 to T5 (normal), (c) T5 to T6 (normal), (c) T6 to T7 (normal), and (c) T7 to T8 (normal) are shown in the figure. Since the content is the same as that described in 43, the explanation will be omitted.

(Display example of variable presentation pattern 7 in high probability game state)
(c) T4 to T5 (high probability) corresponds to a “miss notification” during the “SP reach fluctuation period”.
(c) T4 to T5 (high probability) differs from (c) T4 to T5 (normal) in that a "RUSH in progress image 31f" indicating that the game is in a high probability game state and a "right hit image 31g" indicating that a right hit is to be performed during the high probability game state are further displayed. The other display modes are the same, but the display modes (design, size, etc.) of the reserved number image and small performance pattern 38d do not change even if the game state changes.

(c) T5 to T6 (high probability) corresponds to the “background change” after the “SP reach fluctuation period”.
For (c) T5 to T6 (high probability), a specific image 31e consisting of the same image as for (c) T5 to T6 (normal) is displayed. However, a "RUSH image 31f" and a "right hit image 31g" are displayed so as to overlap on the front side of the specific image 31e.
In this way, the essential information in the gaming state (RUSH image 31f, right hit image 31g) is displayed, but the specific image 31e itself is the same as that in the normal gaming state.
This eliminates the need to prepare separate specific images 31e for the normal gaming state and the high-probability gaming state, leading to a reduction in the area used by the CGROM 156.

(c) T6 to T7 (high probability) corresponds to a "provisional stop display period."
In a high probability gaming state, even if the "provisional stop display period" occurs, the performance pattern 38 remains in the "second display mode", and the same is true in the subsequent "fixed stop display period".
That is, in a high probability gaming state, the performance symbol 38 is always in the "second display mode".
Also, a consecutive jackpot count image 31h (an image showing "3 wins") is displayed, which indicates the number of consecutive jackpots (so-called consecutive win count).
Also, a background image imitating night is displayed, which indicates that the game is in a high probability state.
As other display elements (such as reserved item count images) are the same as those described in FIG. 43, their explanation will be omitted.

(c) T7 to T8 (high probability) correspond to the "determined stop display period".
(c) T7 to T8 (high probability), compared to (c) T7 to T8 (normal), have a night background image, a RUSH medium image 31f indicating that a high probability gaming state is in progress, and a high probability gaming state. The difference is that during the state, a right-handed hit image 31g indicating that a right-handed hit is to be performed, a continuous jackpot number image 31h, and a production pattern 38 of the "second display mode" are displayed, and other display modes are the same. It is.

In addition, in FIG. 45, the normal gaming state and the high probability gaming state are explained as examples, but the common specific image 31e may also be displayed in the time-saving gaming state.
This allows the common specific image 31e to be used in the normal gaming state, the high probability gaming state, and the time-saving gaming state, which leads to a reduction in the area used in the CGROM 156.
Although a common specific image 31e is displayed in the time-saving game state and the high-probability game state, a different specific image 31e (having a different design) may be displayed in the normal game state.

Next, the display form of the "specific image" for each mode will be described with reference to FIG.
Note that Figure 46 shows only the image display device 31, and illustrates a case in which variable presentation pattern 7 is executed in mode A in the "normal gaming state" (normal), and a case in which variable presentation pattern 7 is executed in mode B in the "normal gaming state" (normal).
In the animation of FIG. 46, only the main part of the time chart is shown.

In order to prevent players from getting bored, the mode is changed every time a predetermined number of fluctuations or every time a reach effect is executed. The mode of the hold icon is different.
For example, in mode A, a background image simulating a mountain is displayed, while in mode B, a background image simulating an ocean is displayed.
In this embodiment, for convenience, mode A and mode B will be used in the explanation, but a plurality of modes may be included.
Note that the mode has the same meaning as a so-called "stage (direction stage)."
Furthermore, the mode may be switched (transferred to another mode) by the player's operation of the performance button 35.

(Display example in variable presentation pattern 7 in normal game mode A)
The display examples of variable presentation pattern 7 of (c) T4 to T5 (mode A), (c) T5 to T6 (mode A), (c) T6 to T7 (mode A), and (c) T7 to T8 (mode A) are the same as those described in FIG. 43, so explanation will be omitted, with the only difference being that in (c) T6 to T7 (mode A), a "mode A image 31j" indicating mode A is displayed.

(Display example in variable presentation pattern 7 in normal game mode B)
The display examples in variable presentation pattern 7 of (c) T4 to T5 (mode B) and (c) T5 to T6 (mode B) are the same as those described in Figure 43, so explanation will be omitted.

(c) T6 to T7 (mode B) corresponds to a "provisionally stopped display period."
In comparison with (c) T6 to T7 (mode A), (c) T6 to T7 (mode B) displays a background image that resembles the sea, and the character designs that make up the performance design 38 are also designed based on the concept of the sea.
In addition, a "mode B image 31k" indicating mode B is displayed. Furthermore, the icon displayed in the variable icon display area 31a and the hold icon displayed in the hold icon display area 31b also have a different design (diamond shape) from mode A.
In addition, the display mode (design, size, etc.) of the reserved number image and the small performance pattern 38d is common to mode A. In other words, even if the mode changes, the display mode is unchanged.

(c) T7 to T8 (mode B) corresponds to a "determined stop display period."
In other words, the performance pattern 38 in mode B is displayed as a confirmed stop (completely stopped).

In this way, by making the background image different depending on the mode to prevent the player from getting bored, by using the same specific image 31e in all modes, the area used in the CGROM 156 can be reduced.

In FIG. 46, mode A in the normal gaming state and mode B in the normal gaming state have been explained, but FIG. can be applied.

Note that a specific image 31e common to mode A and mode B is displayed, and a specific image 31e common to mode C and mode D (a specific image whose design is different from the specific image 31e displayed in mode A and mode B) is displayed. 31e) may be displayed.

Note that the game state in which FIGS. 42 to 46 are executed does not matter. For example, it may be applied to all gaming states or to some gaming states.

In addition, in Figures 42 to 46, the display mode of the performance pattern 38 is changed before and after the display of the specific image 31e, but it does not have to change.
Also, in Figures 42 to 46, the display mode of the small performance pattern 38d is not changed before and after the display of the specific image 31e, but it may be changed.

(Summary of Figures 42 to 46)
That is, FIGS. 42 to 46 have the following features.

That is,
While the specific image 31e is being displayed (for example, from T5 to T6 in FIG. 43(c)),
Small effect pattern 38d→Displayed in a visible manner.
After displaying the specific image 31e (for example, (c) T6 to T7 in FIG. 43),
Small effect pattern 38d→Displayed in a visible manner.
Performance pattern 38→Visibly displayed.
It has such characteristics.
Thereby, the end of the effect can be made clear by the specific image 31e, and the player can clearly understand that the reach effect (SP reach effect) has ended.
Further, by making the effect pattern 38 invisible while the specific image 31e is displayed, the player can clearly understand that the ready-to-reach effect (SP ready-to-win) has ended.
Further, while the specific image 31e is being displayed, even if the effect pattern 38 is not visible, at least the small effect pattern 38d is displayed in a visible manner, so that the fluctuation situation can be confirmed.
In addition, while the specific image 31e is displayed, not only the small effect pattern 38d but also the pending number image is displayed so that the pending number image is visibly displayed, so that the fluctuation status can be confirmed by the update status of the pending number image.
In addition, the effect pattern 38 changes from the "second display mode" to the "first display mode" before the specific image 31e is displayed and after the specific image 31e is displayed, so it is visible while the specific image 31e is displayed. By changing the display mode with the display of the specific image 31e in between, it is possible to switch the display mode without giving the player a sense of discomfort.

That is,
Before (for example, (c) T4 to T5 in FIG. 43) and after (for example, (c) T7 to T8 in FIG. 43) the specific image 31e is displayed,
The display mode of the small effect pattern 38d → does not change.
The display mode of the effect pattern 38 changes from the second display mode (for example, a display mode consisting of only numbers) to the first display mode (for example, a display mode consisting of numbers + characters).
It has such characteristics.
As a result, for example, the large display size effect pattern 38 that the player is watching changes through the display of the specific image 31e, so the display of the specific image 31e indicates that the reach effect (SP reach) has ended. It is possible to make the player understand clearly.

That is,
In a variable effect pattern (for example, variable effect pattern 7) that involves displaying the specific image 31e,
During the temporary suspension display period,
A performance using the performance pattern 38 (for example, a movement performance using a character pattern) -> not executed.
In a variable effect pattern (for example, variable effect pattern 1) that does not involve displaying the specific image 31e,
During the temporary suspension display period,
A performance using the performance pattern 38 (for example, motion performance using a character pattern) -> can be executed.
It has such characteristics.
Thereby, it is possible to give a change to the variable performance pattern 1, which does not involve the display of the specific image 31e and lacks change, leading to an improvement in the interest in the game.
In addition, in the variable performance pattern 7 that involves the display of the specific image 31e, although the display of the specific image 31e makes it clear to the player that the reach performance (SP reach) has ended, the "temporary stop display" It is possible to prevent the player from being made to think that the ready-to-reach presentation (SP ready-to-go) is continuing by executing the action presentation using the character design during the "period".

That is,
Before the specific image 31e is displayed (for example, T4 to T5 in FIG. 43C) and after the specific image 31e is displayed (for example, T7 to T8 in FIG. 43C),
The display format of the reserved quantity image does not change (for example, the size, design, etc. do not change).
The display mode of the performance pattern 38 changes (for example, from a second display mode consisting of numbers only to a first display mode consisting of numbers + characters).
It has the following features:
This allows the specific image 31e to clearly indicate the end of the presentation, allowing the player to clearly understand that the reach presentation (SP reach) has ended.
In addition, by making the performance pattern 38 invisible while the specific image 31e is being displayed, the player can clearly understand that the reach performance (SP reach) has ended.
Furthermore, while the specific image 31e is being displayed, even if the performance pattern 38 is not visible, at least the reserved number image is displayed so that it is visible, so that the fluctuation status can be confirmed.
In addition, while the specific image 31e is being displayed, not only the reserved number image but also the small performance pattern 38d is displayed so that the fluctuation status can be confirmed by the small performance pattern 38d.
In addition, the performance pattern 38 changes from the "second display mode" to the "first display mode" before and after the specific image 31e is displayed. Therefore, since it is invisible while the specific image 31e is displayed, and the change occurs between the display of the specific image 31e, the display mode can be switched without causing a sense of discomfort to the player.

That is,
For example, if you execute variable production pattern 7 in the normal gaming state,
A specific image 31e (eg, (c) T5 to T6 (normal) in FIG. 45) is displayed.
and,
The specific image 31e is
It can also be displayed in a specific gaming state (eg, high probability gaming state, time saving gaming state) (eg, T5 to T6 (high probability) in FIG. 45(c)).
It has such characteristics.
This eliminates the need to prepare specific images 31e for each gaming state, leading to a reduction in the area used in the CGROM 156.

That is,
In the first mode, for example, when variable performance pattern 7 is executed,
A specific image 31e (for example, T5 to T6 (mode A) in FIG. 46(c)) is displayed.
and,
The specific image 31e is
Display is also possible in the second mode (for example, T5 to T6 (mode B) in FIG. 46(c)).
It has the following features:
This eliminates the need to prepare specific images 31e for each mode, leading to a reduction in the area used in the CGROM 156.

Next, the second characteristic portion related to the specific image will be explained using FIGS. 47 to 51.
Note that some of the descriptions in Figures 47 to 51 are omitted because they mainly refer to the "sounds" during the fluctuating performance, but the contents described in Figures 42 to 46 may be combined as appropriate. Can be used.

FIG. 47 shows a music composition in a variable performance pattern. For example, in the case of variable performance pattern 1, "song A" is output from the audio output device 32 when variable performance pattern 1 is being executed. , indicating that the number of songs is "one", which is "song A".
Furthermore, in the case of variable performance pattern 5, when variable performance pattern 5 is being executed, after "music A" is output from the audio output device 32, "music B" is output from the audio output device 32. , indicating that the number of songs is "two", "song A" and "song B".
The same idea applies to other variable performance patterns, so we will omit the explanation of other variable performance patterns, but the overall trend is that the less likely the reach effect is to be executed in the variable effect pattern, the more likely the variable effect is to be executed. The number (types) of songs that are output during the execution of the variable production pattern is smaller, and the more the variation production pattern in which the reach production is executed, the greater the number (type) of songs that are output during the execution of the variation production. Even in the production pattern, the number (types) of songs output during execution of variable production tends to increase, such as normal reach<SP reach≒SPSP reach.
Note that regarding "song A", "song B", "song C", "song D", "song E", and "resurrection music" described in FIG. 47, even if the music consists of only a melody. Alternatively, the song may consist of a melody and lyrics. However, if the first half of the fluctuating performance pattern consists of only a melody, and the second half of the fluctuating performance pattern consists of melody + lyrics, expectations for the jackpot game to be played can be improved. Therefore, for example, it is desirable that "Song A" and "Song B" be composed of only melodies, and that "Song C", "Song D", "Song E", and "Resurrection music" be composed of melody + lyrics. . Thereby, the song structure can improve expectations for the execution of a jackpot game.

FIG. 48 is a time chart 2 showing details of each variable effect pattern (see FIG. 33), in which (a) shows details of variable effect pattern 1, and (b) shows details of variable effect pattern 5. (c) shows the details of the variable effect pattern 7, and (d) shows the details of the variable effect pattern 16.
Further, details are shown for each variable performance pattern regarding the relationship between the "specific image" displayed on the image display device 31, BGM (music) output from the audio output device 32, and stop sound.

(Timing (a) T0)
(a) is the fluctuation effect pattern 1, and timing (a) T0 is the timing at which the fluctuation display is started. When the variable display starts, the audio output device 32 outputs "Song A."
Further, at this timing, the "stop sound" is not output.
Further, at this timing, the "specific image" is not displayed.

These aspects of "music A", "stop sound", and "specific image" continue until timing (a) T1.

(Timing (a) T1)
Timing (a) T1 is the timing at which the "normal fluctuation period" ends and a "provisional stop display period" begins.
At this time, "song A" is still being output.
At this timing, a “stop sound” is output from the audio output device 32 .
Also, at this timing, the "specific image" is not displayed.

These aspects of "song A", "stop sound", and "specific image" are continued until timing (a) T2.

(Timing (a) T2)
Timing (a) T2 is the timing at which the "temporary stop display period" ends and shifts to the "determined stop display period".
At this timing, "song A" is still being output.
Further, at this timing, the "stop sound" is not output. That is, the "stop sound" is a sound that is output during the temporary stop display period.
Further, at this timing, the "specific image" is not displayed.

These aspects of "song A", "stop sound", and "specific image" are continued until timing (a) T3, and when timing (a) T3 is reached, the variation effect pattern 1 is ended (1 The game ends).

(Timing (b) T0)
(b) is a variation performance pattern 5, and timing (b) T0 is the timing when the variation display starts. When the variation display starts, the sound output device 32 outputs "music A".
Moreover, at this timing, "song B" is not being output.
Also, at this timing, the "stop sound" is not output.
Also, at this timing, the "specific image" is not displayed.

These aspects of "music A", "music B", "stop sound" and "specific image" continue until timing (b) T1.

(Timing (b) T1)
Timing (b) T1 is the timing at which the "normal fluctuation period" ends and shifts to the "normal reach fluctuation period."
At this timing, "song A" is not being output.
Furthermore, at this timing, "song B" is output. In other words, the music will be changed to one associated with the execution of normal reach.
Further, at this timing, the "stop sound" is not output.
Further, at this timing, the "specific image" is not displayed.

These aspects of "music A", "music B", "stop sound" and "specific image" continue until timing (b) T2.

(Timing (b) T2)
Timing (b) T2 is the timing at which the "normal reach fluctuation period" ends and the transition to the "temporary stop display period" begins.
At this timing, "song A" is output.
Furthermore, at this timing, "song B" is not being output. That is, with the end of the normal reach, the music associated with the execution of the normal reach ends.
Furthermore, at this timing, a "stop sound" is output from the audio output device 32.
Further, at this timing, the "specific image" is not displayed.

These aspects of "song A", "song B", "stop sound", and "specific image" are continued until timing (b) T3.

(Timing (b) T3)
Timing (b) T3 is the timing at which the "temporary stop display period" ends and shifts to the "determined stop display period".
At this timing, "song A" is still being output.
Furthermore, at this timing, "song B" is not being output.
Further, at this timing, the "stop sound" is not output.
Further, at this timing, the "specific image" is not displayed.

These aspects of "song A", "song B", "stop sound", and "specific image" are continued until timing (b) T4, and when timing (b) T4 is reached, the variable production pattern 5 (one game ends).
In addition, in the variation effect pattern 5, the stop sound is output, but it may not be output. That is, in a variable performance pattern in which a reach performance or higher is performed, the "stop sound" may not be output.

(Timing (c) T0)
(c) is a variation performance pattern 7, and timing (c) T0 is the timing when the variation display starts. When the variation display starts, the sound output device 32 outputs "music A".
Moreover, at this timing, "Song B" and "Song C" are not being output.
Also, at this timing, the "stop sound" is not output.
Also, at this timing, the "specific image" is not displayed.

These aspects of "song A", "song B", "stop sound", and "specific image" are continued until timing (c) T1.

(Timing (c) T1)
Timing (c) T1 is the timing when the "normal fluctuation period" ends and transitions to the "normal reach fluctuation period".
At this timing, "song A" is not being output.
At this timing, "music B" is output. That is, the music is changed to the music associated with the execution of a normal reach.
Moreover, at this timing, "music C" is not being output.
Also, at this timing, the "stop sound" is not output.
Also, at this timing, the "specific image" is not displayed.

These aspects of "Music A", "Music B", "Music C", "Stop sound" and "Specific image" continue until timing (c) T2.

(Timing (c) T2)
Timing (c) T2 is the timing at which the "normal reach variation period" ends and transitions to "background switching" for switching from the "normal reach variation period" to the "SP reach variation period".
At this timing, "song A", "song B", and "song C" are not output. That is, while "background switching" is being performed, no music is being output.
Further, at this timing, the "stop sound" is not output.
Further, at this timing, the "specific image" is not displayed.

These aspects of "song A", "song B", "song C", "stop sound", and "specific image" are continued until timing (c) T3.

(Timing (c) T3)
Timing (c) T3 is the timing at which the "background switching" ends and the transition to the "SP reach variation period" begins.
At this timing, "song A" and "song B" are not output.
Furthermore, at this timing, "song C" is output. That is, music accompanying the execution of SP reach will be output.
Further, at this timing, the "stop sound" is not output.
Further, at this timing, the "specific image" is not displayed.

These aspects of "song A", "song B", "song C", "stop sound", and "specific image" are continued until timing (c) T4.

(Timing (c) T4)
Timing (c) T4 is the timing for making a "loss notification" during the "SP reach fluctuation period" to notify that the result of the jackpot lottery is a loss.
At this timing, "Song A,""SongB," and "Song C" are not being output. In other words, by stopping all the songs, it is announced that the result of the big win lottery is a loss.
Also, at this timing, the "stop sound" is not output.
Also, at this timing, the "specific image" is not displayed.

These aspects of "song A", "song B", "song C", "stop sound", and "specific image" are continued until timing (c) T5.

(Timing (c) T5)
Timing (c) T5 is the timing at which the "SP reach fluctuation period" ends and a transition to "background switching" takes place to switch from the "SP reach fluctuation period" to the "provisional stop display period".
At this timing, "Song A,""SongB," and "Song C" are not being output.
Also, at this timing, the "stop sound" is not output.
At this timing, the "specific image" is displayed so as to be visible.

These aspects of "song A", "song B", "song C", "stop sound", and "specific image" are continued until timing (c) T6.
Note that the display time of the "specific image" from timing (c) T5 to timing (c) T6 is "2S".

(Timing (c) T6)
Timing (c) T6 is the timing at which the "background switching" ends and the transition to the "temporary stop display period" begins.
At this timing, "song A", "song B", and "song C" are not output.
Further, at this timing, the "stop sound" is not output.
Further, at this timing, the "specific image" is not displayed.

These aspects of "song A", "song B", "song C", "stop sound", and "specific image" are continued until timing (c) T7.

(Timing (c) T7)
Timing (c) T7 is the timing at which the "provisional stop display period" ends and transitions to the "definite stop display period".
At this timing, "Song A,""SongB," and "Song C" are not being output.
Also, at this timing, the "stop sound" is not output.
Also, at this timing, the "specific image" is not displayed.

These aspects of "Music A", "Music B", "Music C", "Stopping sound" and "Specific image" continue until timing (c) T8 is reached, at which point variable presentation pattern 7 ends (one game ends).

As shown in the above variation effect pattern 7, the period of "background switching" (first period) from the "normal reach variation period" to the "SP reach variation period" and the "SP reach variation period" ending with " During the "background switching" period (second period) up to the "temporary stop display period", no music is being output.
Note that "no music is being output" may mean a state in which no music data is being output, or a state in which music data is being output but no sound is being output from the audio output device 32. That is, as long as the music is an "inaudible sound" based on the player, any state may be used.
Thereby, in the first period, when changing from a song of normal reach to a song of SP reach, it is possible to pause once, so that it is possible to clearly recognize that the song has been changed.
Furthermore, in the second period, there is no sound, so that it can be clearly recognized that the ready-to-reach effect has ended.
Although the first period and the second period are silent, other periods may be silent.

Also, as shown in variable presentation pattern 7, before the "specific image" is displayed, songs (song A, song B, song C) can be output, but after the "specific image" is displayed, no songs are output.
That is, by using the display of the "specific image" as a standard, outputting music before the display can increase the sense of expectation for a big win. On the other hand, by not outputting music after the display, it is possible to avoid giving excessive expectation for a big win. Also, by not outputting music after the display, it is possible to clearly recognize that the reach performance has ended.

(Timing (d) T0)
(d) is the fluctuation effect pattern 16, and timing (d) T0 is the timing at which the fluctuation display is started. When the variable display starts, the audio output device 32 outputs "Song A."
Furthermore, at this timing, "song B", "song C", and "song D" are not output.
Further, at this timing, the "stop sound" is not output.
Further, at this timing, the "specific image" is not displayed.

These aspects of "Song A", "Song B", "Song C", "Song D", "Stop sound" and "Specific image" continue until timing (d) T1.

(Timing (d) T1)
Timing (d) T1 is the timing when the "normal fluctuation period" ends and transitions to the "normal reach fluctuation period".
At this timing, "song A" is not being output.
At this timing, "music B" is output. That is, the music is changed to the music associated with the execution of a normal reach.
Moreover, at this timing, "Song C" and "Song D" are not output.
Also, at this timing, the "stop sound" is not output.
Also, at this timing, the "specific image" is not displayed.

These aspects of "Music A", "Music B", "Music C", "Music D", "stop sound" and "specific image" continue until timing (d) T2.

(Timing (d) T2)
Timing (d) T2 is the timing when the "normal reach fluctuation period" ends and a "background change" occurs to switch from the "normal reach fluctuation period" to the "SP reach fluctuation period".
At this timing, "Song A,""SongB,""SongC," and "Song D" are not being output. In other words, while "background switching" is being performed, no songs are being output.
Also, at this timing, the "stop sound" is not output.
Also, at this timing, the "specific image" is not displayed.

These aspects of "song A", "song B", "song C", "song D", "stop sound", and "specific image" are continued until timing (d) T3.

(Timing (d) T3)
Timing (d) T3 is the timing at which the "background switching" ends and the transition to the "SP reach variation period" begins.
At this timing, "song A" and "song B" are not output.
Furthermore, at this timing, "song C" is output. That is, music accompanying the execution of SP reach will be output.
Furthermore, at this timing, "song D" is not being output.
Further, at this timing, the "stop sound" is not output.
Further, at this timing, the "specific image" is not displayed.

These aspects of "song A", "song B", "song C", "song D", "stop sound", and "specific image" are continued until timing (d) T4.

(Timing (d) T4)
Timing (d) T4 is the timing at which the "SP reach variation period" ends and transitions to "background switching" for switching from the "SP reach variation period" to the "SPSP reach variation period".
At this timing, "song A", "song B", "song C", and "song D" are not output. That is, while "background switching" is being performed, no music is being output.
Further, at this timing, the "stop sound" is not output.
Further, at this timing, the "specific image" is not displayed.

These aspects of "song A", "song B", "song C", "song D", "stop sound", and "specific image" are continued until timing (d) T5.

(Timing (d) T5)
Timing (d) T5 is the timing at which the "background switching" ends and the transition to the "SPSP reach variation period" begins.
At this timing, "song A", "song B", and "song C" are not output.
Furthermore, at this timing, "song D" is output. That is, music accompanying the execution of SPSP reach will be output.
Further, at this timing, the "stop sound" is not output.
Further, at this timing, the "specific image" is not displayed.

These aspects of "Song A", "Song B", "Song C", "Song D", "Stop sound" and "Specific image" continue until timing (d) T6.

(Timing (d) T6)
Timing (d) T6 is the timing to perform a "loss notification" to notify that the result of the jackpot lottery was a loss in the "SPSP reach fluctuation period".
At this timing, "song A", "song B", "song C", and "song D" are not output. That is, by stopping all music, it is notified that the result of the jackpot lottery was a loss.
Further, at this timing, the "stop sound" is not output.
Further, at this timing, the "specific image" is not displayed.

These aspects of "song A", "song B", "song C", "song D", "stop sound", and "specific image" are continued until timing (d) T7.

(Timing (d) T7)
Timing (d) T7 is the timing at which the "SPSP reach fluctuation period" ends and a transition to "background switching" takes place to switch from the "SPSP reach fluctuation period" to the "provisional stop display period".
At this timing, "Song A", "Song B", "Song C" and "Song D" are not being output.
Also, at this timing, the "stop sound" is not output.
At this timing, the "specific image" is displayed so as to be visible.

These aspects of "song A", "song B", "song C", "song D", "stop sound", and "specific image" are continued until timing (d) T8.
Note that the display time of the "specific image" from timing (d) T7 to timing (d) T8 is "2S".

(Timing (d) T8)
Timing (d) T8 is the timing at which the "background switching" ends and a transition to a "provisional stopped display period" occurs.
At this timing, "Song A", "Song B", "Song C" and "Song D" are not being output.
Also, at this timing, the "stop sound" is not output.
Also, at this timing, the "specific image" is not displayed.

These aspects of "song A", "song B", "song C", "song D", "stop sound", and "specific image" are continued until timing (d) T9.

(Timing (d) T9)
Timing (d) T9 is the timing at which the "temporary stop display period" ends and shifts to the "determined stop display period".
At this timing, "song A", "song B", "song C", and "song D" are not output.
Further, at this timing, the "stop sound" is not output.
Further, at this timing, the "specific image" is not displayed.

These aspects of "song A", "song B", "song C", "song D", "stop sound", and "specific image" are continued until timing (d) T10, and at timing ( d) When reaching T10, the variable effect pattern 16 ends (one game ends).

In other words, in variable presentation pattern 7 and variable presentation pattern 16, unlike variable presentation pattern 1 and variable presentation pattern 5, a "specific image" is displayed, and from the time of the miss notification to the end of one game, no music is output, and it is silent.
Furthermore, even during the "provisional stop display period," the "stop sound" is not output.
For example, since the selection frequency of variable performance pattern 1 and variable performance pattern 5 is high, they may be executed continuously for multiple variations. Therefore, it is necessary to output a "stop sound" to clearly indicate the break between the variations. In contrast, the selection frequency of variable performance pattern 7 and variable performance pattern 16 is low, so they are rarely executed continuously for multiple variations. Therefore, even if the "stop sound" is not output, the break between the variations is clear, which is the reason why the "stop sound" is not output for variable performance pattern 7 and variable performance pattern 16.
In addition, the change performance pattern 1 and the change performance pattern 5 are change performance patterns that have little change in the background image during the change performance, and are not change performance patterns in which a "specific image" is displayed, so the break in the performance is not clear. In particular, since there is a high possibility that multiple changes will be performed continuously, the break in the performance becomes even more unclear.
Therefore, in such a variable presentation pattern, the end of the presentation can be clearly indicated by outputting a "stop sound."
On the other hand, since variable performance pattern 7 and variable performance pattern 16 are variable performance patterns that are rich in changes in the background image, etc. during the variable performance, there is no need to output a ``stop sound'' because the changes in the background image, etc. make the breaks in the performance clear to a certain extent.
In addition, since the "specific image" is also a variable performance pattern in which the "specific image" is displayed, even if the "stop sound" is not output, the display of the "specific image" can be used to notify the end of the performance. In this way, it is possible to notify the end of the performance in a suitable manner according to the variable performance pattern.

Next, using time chart 3 in FIG. 49, the characteristics of each variable performance pattern when there is no subsequent hold when the variable performance is finished (at the end of one game) will be explained.
In FIG. 49, a comparison will be made between variable effect pattern 1 and variable effect pattern 7.

In addition, "pending 0" means, in the example of variable performance pattern 1, that from (a) T0 to (a) T3, special figure determination information is stored in the "0th storage section"; The special figure determination information is not stored in the "1st storage part" to "4th storage part" (FIG. 12), and (a) T3 ~ is "0th storage part", "1st storage part" to " This indicates that the special figure determination information is not stored in any of the "fourth storage section".
Similarly, in the example of variable production pattern 7, the special figure determination information is stored in the "0th storage section" from (c) T0 to (c) T8, but the special figure determination information is stored in the "1st storage section" to The special figure determination information is not stored in the "4th storage section" (Fig. 12), and (c) T8~ is the "0th storage section", "1st storage section" - "4th storage section". This indicates that special figure determination information is not stored in any of them.

Moreover, the "sound effect" refers to the above-mentioned SE, which is a sound different from BGM (music).
The "start winning sound" is a sound that is output when a game ball enters the first start hole 14 or the second start hole 15 and the color of the reserved icon is changed from the time of the ball entering. For example, if the reserved icon is displayed as a blue reserved icon from the time of the ball entering, the "first start winning sound" is output, and if the reserved icon is displayed as a green reserved icon from the time of the ball entering, the "second start winning sound" is output, and so on, so that sounds can be output according to the color.
In addition, the "start winning sound" is not limited to changing the color of the reserved icon when the ball enters, but may simply be a sound that notifies the player that the game ball has entered the first starting hole 14 or the second starting hole 15 (a so-called winning notification sound).

Further, the "board lighting device" refers to the board lighting device 34a (FIG. 4), and the "frame lighting device" refers to the frame lighting device 34b (FIG. 4).
In addition, the "light emission LV." of these lighting devices indicates the brightness of each lighting device, and the higher the value, the brighter the light is intended to be. LV1<LV2<LV3<LV4<LV5. ing. Note that the brightness refers to, for example, the number of LEDs lit is the same between LV1 and LV2, but the brightness may be varied depending on the intensity of light emission, or the brightness can be changed by varying the number of LEDs lit. You can also let
Note that the brightness of LV5 is the brightness that is selected when various errors shown in FIG. 71, which will be described later, occur.

(Timing (a) T0)
(a) is a variation performance pattern 1, and timing (a) T0 is the timing when the variation display starts. When the variation display starts, the sound output device 32 outputs "music A".
Also, at this timing, no special chart determination information is stored in the "first memory unit" to the "fourth memory unit" (reservation 0), and the special chart determination information is stored only in the "0th memory unit".
Also, at this timing, the "specific image" is not displayed.

These aspects of "Song A", "Reserved 0", and "Specific Image" continue until timing (a) T1.

(Timing (a) T1)
Timing (a) T1 is the timing at which the "normal fluctuation period" ends and a "provisional stop display period" begins.
At this time, "song A" is still being output.
Also, at this timing, no special chart determination information is stored in the "first memory unit" to the "fourth memory unit" (reservation 0), and the special chart determination information is stored only in the "0th memory unit".
Also, at this timing, the "specific image" is not displayed.

These aspects of "song A", "pending 0", and "specific image" are continued until timing (a) T2 is reached.

(Timing (a) T2)
Timing (a) T2 is the timing at which the "provisional stop display period" ends and transitions to the "definite stop display period".
At this time, "song A" is still being output.
Also, at this timing, no special drawing determination information is stored in the "first memory unit" to the "fourth memory unit" (reservation 0), and the special drawing determination information stored in the "0th memory unit" is erased.
Also, at this timing, the "specific image" is not displayed.

These aspects of "Music A", "Hold 0", and "Specific Image" continue until timing (a) T3 is reached, at which point variable presentation pattern 1 ends (one game ends).

(Timing (a) T3)
Timing (a) T3 is the timing at which the "confirmed stop display period" ends and transitions to the "waiting for customers standby period" (waiting for customers state).
At this time, "song A" is still being output.
Also, at this timing, no special drawing determination information is stored in the "first memory unit" to the "fourth memory unit" (reservation 0), and no special drawing determination information is stored in the "0th memory unit".
Also, at this timing, the "specific image" is not displayed.

These aspects of "song A", "pending 0", and "specific image" are continued for "10S" up to timing (a) T4.
In other words, when the fluctuating performance is finished (at the end of one game), if there is no subsequent suspension, if the immediately preceding fluctuating performance pattern is fluctuating performance pattern 1, after the "determined stop display period" ends Even during the "customer waiting period", the "song A" that was being output while the variable performance pattern 1 was being executed continues to be output.
This makes it possible to give the feeling that the fluctuating performance is continuing even during the "waiting period for customers," leading to increased interest in the game.
Note that the variable performance pattern in which music continues to be output even during the "waiting period for customers" is not limited to the variable performance pattern 1. For example, the variable effect pattern shown in FIG. 33 in which the "specific image" is not displayed in case of a loss may be executed.

(Timing (a) T4)
Timing (a) T4 is the timing when "10 S" has elapsed since the "waiting for customers waiting period" (waiting for customers state) was reached.
At this timing, "music A" is not being output. In other words, when the "waiting for customers standby period" (waiting for customers state) is reached, music continues to be output for "10S", but the music stops when "10S" has elapsed.
Also, at this timing, no special drawing determination information is stored in the "first memory unit" to the "fourth memory unit" (reservation 0), and no special drawing determination information is stored in the "0th memory unit".
Thereafter, this state continues unless a game ball enters the first starting hole 14 or the second starting hole 15.

(Timing (c) T0)
(c) is a variation performance pattern 7, and timing (c) T0 is the timing when the variation display starts. When the variation display starts, the sound output device 32 outputs "music A".
Moreover, at this timing, "Song B" and "Song C" are not being output.
Also, at this timing, no special chart determination information is stored in the "first memory unit" to the "fourth memory unit" (reservation 0), and the special chart determination information is stored only in the "0th memory unit".
Also, at this timing, "sound effects" can be output.
Also, at this timing, a "start winning sound" can be output.
At this timing, the "board lighting device" and the "frame lighting device" emit light at a brightness of LV3.
Also, at this timing, the "specific image" is not displayed.

Then, "Song A", "Song B", "Song C", "Pending 0", "Sound effect", "Start winning sound", "Light emission LV of board lighting device", "Song of frame lighting device" These aspects of "light emission LV." and "specific image" are continued until timing (c) T1 is reached.

(Timing (c) T1)
Timing (c) T1 is the timing at which the "normal fluctuation period" ends and shifts to the "normal reach fluctuation period."
At this timing, "song A" is not being output.
Furthermore, at this timing, "song B" is output. In other words, the music will be changed to one associated with the execution of normal reach.
Furthermore, at this timing, "song C" is not being output.
In addition, at this timing, no special figure judgment information is stored in the "first storage part" to "fourth storage part" (pending is 0), and special figure judgment information is only stored in the "0th storage part". is memorized.
Furthermore, at this timing, "sound effects" can be output.
Furthermore, at this timing, the "start winning sound" can be output.
Furthermore, at this timing, the "board lighting device" and the "frame lighting device" are emitting light at a brightness of LV3.
Further, at this timing, the "specific image" is not displayed.

Then, "Song A", "Song B", "Song C", "Pending 0", "Sound effect", "Start winning sound", "Light emission LV of board lighting device", "Song of frame lighting device" These aspects of "light emission LV." and "specific image" are continued until timing (c) T2.

(Timing (c) T2)
Timing (c) T2 is the timing at which the "normal reach variation period" ends and transitions to "background switching" for switching from the "normal reach variation period" to the "SP reach variation period".
At this timing, "song A", "song B", and "song C" are not output. That is, while the "background switching" is being performed, no music is being output.
Also, at this timing, no special figure judgment information is stored in the "first storage section" to "fourth storage section" (pending is 0), and special figure judgment information is only stored in the "0th storage section". is memorized.
Furthermore, at this timing, "sound effects" can be output. For example, in "background switching", when displaying a shielding image, it is possible to output a shielding sound or the like.
Also, at this timing, the "start winning sound" can be output.
Furthermore, at this timing, the "board lighting device" and the "frame lighting device" are emitting light at a brightness of LV3.
Furthermore, at this timing, the "specific image" is not displayed.

These aspects, "Music A", "Music B", "Music C", "Reserve 0", "Sound effect", "Start winning sound", "Light emission level of the board lighting device", "Light emission level of the frame lighting device", and "Specific image", continue until timing (c) T3.

(Timing (c) T3)
Timing (c) T3 is the timing at which the "background switching" ends and the transition to the "SP reach variation period" begins.
At this timing, "song A" and "song B" are not output.
Furthermore, at this timing, "song C" is output. That is, music accompanying the execution of SP reach will be output.
In addition, at this timing, no special figure judgment information is stored in the "first storage part" to "fourth storage part" (pending is 0), and special figure judgment information is only stored in the "0th storage part". is memorized.
Furthermore, at this timing, "sound effects" can be output. For example, when displaying a title indicating the contents of SP reach, it is possible to output a sound indicating that the title has been displayed.
Furthermore, at this timing, the "start winning sound" can be output.
Furthermore, at this timing, the "board lighting device" and the "frame lighting device" are emitting light at a brightness of LV3.
Further, at this timing, the "specific image" is not displayed.

These aspects, "Music A", "Music B", "Music C", "Reserve 0", "Sound effect", "Start winning sound", "Light emission level of the board lighting device", "Light emission level of the frame lighting device", and "Specific image", continue until timing (c) T4.

(Timing (c) T4)
Timing (c) T4 is the timing at which "loss notification" is performed to notify that the result of the jackpot lottery was a loss in the "SP reach variation period".
At this timing, "song A", "song B", and "song C" are not output. That is, by stopping all music, it is notified that the result of the jackpot lottery was a loss.
In addition, at this timing, no special figure judgment information is stored in the "first storage part" to "fourth storage part" (pending is 0), and special figure judgment information is only stored in the "0th storage part". is memorized.
Furthermore, at this timing, "sound effects" can be output. For example, it is possible to output a sound to notify that the result of the jackpot lottery was a loss.
Furthermore, at this timing, the "start winning sound" can be output.
Furthermore, at this timing, the "board lighting device" and the "frame lighting device" are emitting light at a brightness of LV3.
Further, at this timing, the "specific image" is not displayed.

Then, "Song A", "Song B", "Song C", "Pending 0", "Sound effect", "Start winning sound", "Light emission LV of board lighting device", "Song of frame lighting device" These aspects of "light emission LV." and "specific image" are continued until timing (c) T5.

(Timing (c) T5)
Timing (c) T5 is the timing at which the "SP reach fluctuation period" ends and a transition to "background switching" takes place to switch from the "SP reach fluctuation period" to the "provisional stop display period".
At this timing, "Song A,""SongB," and "Song C" are not being output.
Also, at this timing, no special chart determination information is stored in the "first memory unit" to the "fourth memory unit" (reservation 0), and the special chart determination information is stored only in the "0th memory unit".
Also, at this timing, a "sound effect" can be output. For example, a sound accompanying the display of a "specific image" can be output.
Also, at this timing, a "start winning sound" can be output.
At this timing, the "board lighting device" and the "frame lighting device" emit light at the brightness of LV2. That is, the brightness is lowered as the "specific image" is displayed. As a result, when the "specific image" is displayed, the brightness of the entire gaming machine 1 is lowered, so that the end of the reach effect can be clearly recognized.
At this timing, the "specific image" is displayed so as to be visible.

These aspects, namely "Song A,""SongB,""SongC,""Reserve0,""Soundeffect,""Start-up winning sound,""Light emission level of the board lighting device,""Light emission level of the frame lighting device," and "Specific image," continue until timing (c) T6.
The display time of the "specific image" from timing (c) T5 to timing (c) T6 is "2S".

That is, the "start winning sound" can be output even while the "specific image" is being displayed. Note that while the "specific image" is being displayed, the hold icon will not be displayed, as described in FIG. Even when performing a look-ahead effect that changes the color, it is not possible to display a pending icon whose color changes in real time.
However, since it is possible to output the "starting winning sound" corresponding to the color being changed, even if the pending icon whose color has changed is not displayed, a skilled player can output the "starting winning sound" You can determine what color the hold icon is by listening to it.
In addition, if the "start winning sound" is not output, it is assumed that a pending icon whose color suddenly changes after the "specific image" is displayed may be displayed, giving the player a sense of discomfort. By making it possible to output "", it is possible to prevent players from feeling uncomfortable.

(Timing (c) T6)
Timing (c) T6 is the timing at which the "background switching" ends and the transition to the "temporary stop display period" begins.
At this timing, "song A", "song B", and "song C" are not output.
In addition, at this timing, no special figure judgment information is stored in the "first storage part" to "fourth storage part" (pending is 0), and special figure judgment information is only stored in the "0th storage part". is memorized.
Furthermore, at this timing, the "start winning sound" can be output.
Furthermore, at this timing, the "board lighting device" and the "frame lighting device" are emitting light at a brightness of LV3.
Further, at this timing, the "specific image" is not displayed.

These aspects, "Music A", "Music B", "Music C", "Reserved 0", "Sound effect", "Start winning sound", "Light emission level of the board lighting device", "Light emission level of the frame lighting device", and "Specific image", continue until timing (c) T7.

(Timing (c) T7)
Timing (c) T7 is the timing at which the "temporary stop display period" ends and shifts to the "determined stop display period".
At this timing, "song A", "song B", and "song C" are not output.
Also, at this timing, the special figure determination information was not stored in the "first storage section" to "fourth storage section" (pending 0), and the special figure judgment information that was stored in the "zero storage section" was not stored. The figure determination information is deleted.
Furthermore, at this timing, the "start winning sound" can be output.
Furthermore, at this timing, the "board lighting device" and the "frame lighting device" are emitting light at a brightness of LV3.
Further, at this timing, the "specific image" is not displayed.

These aspects, "Music A", "Music B", "Music C", "Hold 0", "Sound effect", "Start winning sound", "Light emission level of the board lighting device", "Light emission level of the frame lighting device", and "Specific image", continue until timing (c) T8, at which point variable presentation pattern 7 ends (one game ends).

(Timing (c) T8)
Timing (c) T8 is the timing at which the "determined stop display period" ends and shifts to the "customer waiting period" (customer waiting state).
At this timing, "song A", "song B", and "song C" are not output.
In addition, at this timing, no special figure judgment information is stored in the "first storage section" to "fourth storage section" (pending is 0), and special figure judgment information is also stored in the "0th storage section". is not remembered.
Furthermore, at this timing, the "start winning sound" can be output.
Furthermore, at this timing, the "board lighting device" and the "frame lighting device" are emitting light at a brightness of LV3.

Then, "Song A", "Song B", "Song C", "Pending 0", "Sound effect", "Start winning sound", "Light emission LV of board lighting device", "Song of frame lighting device" From then on, these aspects of the light emitting LV.'' continue unless a game ball enters the first starting port 14 or the second starting port 15.

In other words, when the variable effect is finished (at the end of one game), if there is no subsequent suspension, if the variable effect pattern executed immediately before is variable effect pattern 7, after the "determined stop display period" ends During the "waiting period for customers", the music that was being output while variable performance pattern 7 was being executed is not output.
Note that the variable performance pattern in which music is not output during the "waiting period for customers" is not limited to the variable performance pattern 7. For example, the variable effect pattern shown in FIG. 33 in which a "specific image" is displayed in case of a loss may be applied.
In this way, in a variable production pattern in which a "specific image" is displayed, music is not output during the "waiting period for customers," and as described above, in a variable production pattern in which a "specific image" is not displayed, The music will continue to be output during the "waiting period for customers."
The reason for doing this is also due to the selection frequency of the variable effect pattern, and the variable effect pattern in which the ``specific image'' is not displayed appears more frequently than the variable effect pattern in which the ``specific image'' is displayed. Therefore, in such a highly frequent variable production pattern, the music continues to be output even when the "customer waiting period" is reached.

Note that FIG. 49 assumes a case where variable effect pattern 1 is executed in the normal gaming state and a case where variable effect pattern 7 is executed in the normal gaming state.
On the other hand, in the time-saving game state or the high-probability game state, music may be continuously output during the "customer waiting period" even in a variable performance pattern in which a "specific image" is displayed in case of a loss. Thereby, even during the "customer waiting period", it is possible to notify the player that an advantageous state (time saving gaming state, high probability gaming state) continues.

Next, the variable presentation pattern during a jackpot will be explained using time chart 4 in FIG.
In Figure 50, a comparison is made between variable performance pattern 20 and variable performance pattern 30.
In addition, even when a jackpot is hit, there is a variable presentation pattern in which a "specific image" is displayed, and in this embodiment, this corresponds to variable presentation pattern 30.

(Timing (e) T0)
(e) is a variable effect pattern 20, and timing (e) T0 is the timing at which the variable display is started. When the variable display starts, the audio output device 32 outputs "Song A."
Furthermore, at this timing, "song B" and "song C" are not output.
Furthermore, at this timing, the "jackpot sound effect" that can be output when notifying a jackpot is not output.
Furthermore, at this timing, the "jackpot OP song" that can be output at the opening of the jackpot is not output.
Further, at this timing, the "specific image" is not displayed.

These aspects of "Song A", "Song B", "Song C", "Sound effect at jackpot", "Opening jackpot song", and "Specific image" continue until timing (e) T1.

(Timing (e) T1)
Timing (e) T1 is the timing at which the "normal fluctuation period" ends and shifts to the "normal reach fluctuation period."
At this timing, "song A" is not being output.
Furthermore, at this timing, "song B" is output. In other words, the music will be changed to one associated with the execution of normal reach.
Furthermore, at this timing, "song C" is not being output.
Furthermore, at this timing, the "jackpot sound effect" is not output.
Furthermore, at this timing, the "jackpot OP song" is not output.
Further, at this timing, the "specific image" is not displayed.

These aspects of "Song A", "Song B", "Song C", "Sound effect at jackpot", "Opening jackpot song", and "Specific image" continue until timing (e) T2.

(Timing (e) T2)
Timing (e) T2 is the timing at which the "normal reach variation period" ends and transitions to "background switching" for switching from the "normal reach variation period" to the "SP reach variation period".
At this timing, "song A", "song B", and "song C" are not output. That is, while "background switching" is being performed, no music is being output.
Furthermore, at this timing, the "jackpot sound effect" is not output.
Furthermore, at this timing, the "jackpot OP song" is not output.
Further, at this timing, the "specific image" is not displayed.

These aspects of "Song A", "Song B", "Song C", "Sound effect at jackpot", "Opening jackpot song", and "Specific image" continue until timing (e) T3.

(Timing (e) T3)
Timing (e) T3 is the timing at which the "background switching" ends and the transition to the "SP reach variation period" begins.
At this timing, "song A" and "song B" are not output.
Furthermore, at this timing, "song C" is output. That is, music accompanying the execution of SP reach will be output.
Furthermore, at this timing, the "jackpot sound effect" is not output.
Furthermore, at this timing, the "jackpot OP song" is not output.
Further, at this timing, the "specific image" is not displayed.

These aspects of "Song A", "Song B", "Song C", "Sound effect at jackpot", "Opening jackpot song", and "Specific image" continue until timing (e) T4.

(Timing (e) T4)
Timing (e) T4 is a timing for notifying that the result of the jackpot lottery is a jackpot during the "SP reach fluctuation period". For convenience, this is written as "777" in the drawings.
At this timing, "Song A,""SongB," and "Song C" are not being output.
At this timing, a "big win sound effect" is output. That is, a sound effect (e.g., "cue, cue" sound) for notifying the player that a big win has occurred is output.
Also, at this timing, the "big win OP music" is not output.
Also, at this timing, the "specific image" is not displayed.

These aspects of "Song A", "Song B", "Song C", "Sound effect at jackpot", "Opening jackpot song", and "Specific image" continue until timing (e) T5.

(Timing (e) T5)
Timing (e) T5 is the timing at which the "SP reach fluctuation period" ends and transitions to the "provisional stop display period".
At this timing, "Song A,""SongB," and "Song C" are not being output.
Also, at this timing, the "big win sound effect" is not output.
Also, at this timing, the "big win OP music" is not output.
Also, at this timing, the "specific image" is not displayed.

These aspects of "Song A", "Song B", "Song C", "Sound effect at jackpot", "Opening jackpot song", and "Specific image" continue until timing (e) T6.

(Timing (e) T6)
Timing (e) T6 is the timing at which the "provisional stop display period" ends and transitions to the "definite stop display period".
At this timing, "Song A,""SongB," and "Song C" are not being output.
Also, at this timing, the "big win sound effect" is not output.
Also, at this timing, the "big win OP music" is not output.
Also, at this timing, the "specific image" is not displayed.

These aspects of "Song A", "Song B", "Song C", "Sound effect at jackpot", "Opening jackpot song", and "Specific image" continue until timing (e) T7.

(Timing (e) T7)
Timing (e) T7 is the timing at which the "fixed stop display period" ends and transitions to the "jackpot OP (opening)".
At this timing, the "jackpot OP music" is output. Then, from then on, the "jackpot OP music" is output until the jackpot OP ends and the first round of play is started.
In this way, in the variable presentation pattern during a jackpot, a "specific image" is not generally displayed.
In other words, in this embodiment, the display of a "specific image" can be said to be a notification that the result of the jackpot determination is a "miss."
However, as an exception, in the following variable performance pattern 30, a specific image is displayed, which will be explained below.

(Timing (f) T0)
(f) is a variable effect pattern 30, and timing (f) T0 is the timing at which the variable display is started. When the variable display starts, the audio output device 32 outputs "Song A."
Furthermore, at this timing, "song B" and "song D" are not output.
In addition, at this timing, the "resurrection music" that can be output during the execution of the revival performance in which jackpot notification is performed in reverse after the loss notification is once performed is not output.
Furthermore, at this timing, the "jackpot sound effect" is not output.
Furthermore, at this timing, the "jackpot OP song" is not output.
Further, at this timing, the "specific image" is not displayed.

These aspects of "Song A", "Song B", "Song D", "Resurrection music", "Jackpot sound effect", "Jackpot OP music", and "Specific image" are determined by the timing (f) This continues until T1.

(Timing (f) T1)
Timing (f) T1 is the timing at which the "normal fluctuation period" ends and the transition to the "normal reach fluctuation period" begins.
At this timing, "song A" is not being output.
Furthermore, at this timing, "song B" is output. In other words, the music will be changed to one associated with the execution of normal reach.
Furthermore, at this timing, "song D" is not being output.
Furthermore, at this timing, the "resurrection music" is not output.
Furthermore, at this timing, the "jackpot sound effect" is not output.
Furthermore, at this timing, the "jackpot OP song" is not output.
Further, at this timing, the "specific image" is not displayed.

These aspects of "Song A", "Song B", "Song D", "Resurrection music", "Jackpot sound effect", "Jackpot OP music", and "Specific image" are determined by the timing (f) This continues until T2.

(Timing (f) T2)
Timing (f) T2 is the timing at which the "normal reach variation period" ends and the transition is made to "background switching" for switching from the "normal reach variation period" to the "SPSP reach variation period".
At this timing, "song A", "song B", and "song D" are not output. That is, while "background switching" is being performed, no music is being output.
Furthermore, at this timing, the "resurrection music" is not output.
Furthermore, at this timing, the "jackpot sound effect" is not output.
Furthermore, at this timing, the "jackpot OP song" is not output.
Further, at this timing, the "specific image" is not displayed.

These aspects of "Song A", "Song B", "Song D", "Resurrection music", "Jackpot sound effect", "Jackpot OP music", and "Specific image" are determined by the timing (f) This continues until T3.

(Timing (f) T3)
Timing (f) T3 is the timing when the "background switching" ends and the "SPSP reach fluctuation period" begins.
At this timing, "Song A" and "Song B" are not being output.
At this timing, "music D" is output. That is, the music associated with the execution of the SPSP reach is output.
Also, at this timing, the "revival music" is not being output.
Also, at this timing, the "big win sound effect" is not output.
Also, at this timing, the "big win OP music" is not output.
Also, at this timing, the "specific image" is not displayed.

These aspects of "Music A", "Music B", "Music D", "Revival music", "Sound effect at jackpot", "Jackpot OP music" and "Specific image" continue until timing (f) T4.

(Timing (f) T4)
Timing (f) T4 is the timing for making a "loss notification" during the "SPSP reach fluctuation period" to notify that the result of the jackpot lottery is a loss.
At this timing, "Song A,""SongB," and "Song D" are not being output. In other words, by stopping all the songs, it is announced that the result of the big win lottery is a loss.
Also, at this timing, the "revival music" is not being output.
Also, at this timing, the "big win sound effect" is not output.
Also, at this timing, the "big win OP music" is not output.
Also, at this timing, the "specific image" is not displayed.

These aspects of "Song A", "Song B", "Song D", "Revival Song", "Sound Effect at Big Win", "Big Win OP Song", and "Specific Image" continue until timing (f) T5.

(Timing (f) T5)
Timing (f) T5 is the timing at which the "SPSP reach variation period" ends and the transition is made to "background switching" for switching from the "SPSP reach variation period" to the "temporary stop display period".
At this timing, "song A", "song B", and "song D" are not output.
Furthermore, at this timing, the "resurrection music" is not output.
Furthermore, at this timing, the "jackpot sound effect" is not output.
Furthermore, at this timing, the "jackpot OP song" is not output.
Furthermore, at this timing, the "specific image" is displayed in a visible manner.

These aspects of "Song A", "Song B", "Song D", "Resurrection music", "Jackpot sound effect", "Jackpot OP music", and "Specific image" are determined by the timing (f) This continues until T6.
Note that the display time of the "specific image" from timing (f) T5 to timing (f) T6 is "2S".

(Timing (f) T6)
Timing (f) T6 is the timing at which the "background switching" ends and a transition to a "provisional stopped display period" occurs.
At this timing, "Song A,""SongB," and "Song D" are not being output.
Also, at this timing, the "revival music" is not being output.
Also, at this timing, the "big win sound effect" is not output.
Also, at this timing, the "big win OP music" is not output.
Also, at this timing, the "specific image" is not displayed.

These aspects of "Song A", "Song B", "Song D", "Resurrection music", "Jackpot sound effect", "Jackpot OP music", and "Specific image" are determined by the timing (f) This continues until T7.

(Timing (f) T7)
Timing (f) T7 is the timing at which the "provisional stop display period" ends and the "revival performance" starts.
In other words, if it is a miss, the "provisional stop display period" ends and a transition to a "fixed stop display period" occurs, but if it is a jackpot, a transition to a "revival performance" occurs at that time.
At this timing, "Song A,""SongB," and "Song D" are not being output.
Also, at this timing, a "revival music" is output. That is, the "revival music" is output in conjunction with the execution of the revival performance.
Also, at this timing, the "big win sound effect" is not output.
Also, at this timing, the "big win OP music" is not output.
Also, at this timing, the "specific image" is not displayed.

These aspects of "Song A", "Song B", "Song D", "Revival Song", "Sound Effect at Big Win", "Big Win OP Song", and "Specific Image" continue until timing (f) T8.

(Timing (f) T8)
Timing (f) T8 is the timing for notifying a "big win" during the "revival performance".
At this timing, "Song A,""SongB," and "Song D" are not being output.
At this timing, the "revival music" is being output.
Also, at this timing, a "big win sound effect" is output.
Also, at this timing, the "big win OP music" is not output.
Also, at this timing, the "specific image" is not displayed.

These aspects of "Song A", "Song B", "Song D", "Resurrection music", "Jackpot sound effect", "Jackpot OP music", and "Specific image" are determined by the timing (f) This continues until T9.

(Timing (f) T9)
Timing (f) T9 is the timing at which the "resurrection performance" ends and the transition to the "determined stop display period" begins.
At this timing, "song A", "song B", and "song D" are not output.
Furthermore, at this timing, the "resurrection music" is not output.
Furthermore, at this timing, the "jackpot sound effect" is not output.
Furthermore, at this timing, the "jackpot OP song" is not output.
Further, at this timing, the "specific image" is not displayed.

These aspects of "Song A", "Song B", "Song D", "Resurrection music", "Jackpot sound effect", "Jackpot OP music", and "Specific image" are determined by the timing (f) This continues until T10.

(Timing (f) T10)
Timing (f) T10 is the timing at which the "fixed stop display period" ends and transitions to the "big win OP (opening)".
At this timing, the "jackpot OP music" is output. Then, from then on, the "jackpot OP music" is output until the jackpot OP ends and the first round of play is started.
In this way, in the variable presentation pattern 30 at the time of a big win accompanied by a revival presentation, a specific image is exceptionally displayed.
However, even based on the distribution ratio in Figure 33, it is rare for variable presentation pattern 30 to be selected during a jackpot, so when comparing a miss with a jackpot, the "specific image" is overwhelmingly more likely to appear during a miss.

In this way, the number of songs output in one variable performance is greater in the variable performance pattern 30 of a big win accompanied by the display of a specific image than in the variable performance pattern 20 of a big win not accompanied by the display of a specific image. This can increase the interest in the game.
It should be noted that the variable presentation pattern 20 is given merely as an example, and the variable presentation pattern 20 can be replaced with a variable presentation pattern for a jackpot that does not involve the display of any other specific image.
In this case, according to Figure 47, the number of songs for variable presentation pattern 29 is "4", and the number of songs for variable presentation pattern 30 is "4", so in this case the number of songs is the same, but the number of songs for the other variable presentation patterns is "3", so in the majority of variable presentation patterns for jackpots, the variable presentation patterns that involve the display of a specific image have a greater number of songs than the variable presentation patterns that do not involve the display of a specific image.

Next, using the time chart 5 of FIG. 51, a comparison will be made between a variable presentation pattern at the time of a loss that does not involve the display of a specific image, and a variable presentation pattern that occurs when there is a jackpot that does not involve the display of a specific image.
In FIG. 51, a variable presentation pattern 1 and a variable presentation pattern 5 will be cited as variable presentation patterns in the event of a loss, and a variable presentation pattern 20 will be cited as a variable presentation pattern in the event of a jackpot. The pattern has already been described in FIG. 48, and the fluctuating presentation pattern at the time of a jackpot has already been described in FIG. 50, so a detailed explanation of the time chart will be omitted.

That is, in a variable performance pattern that does not involve the display of a specific image in a loss, the number of songs is "1" or "2" (see FIG. 47), and in a variable performance pattern that does not involve the display of a specific image in a jackpot, The number of songs is "3" or "4".
Therefore, the number of songs that are output in one variable performance is larger in a variable performance pattern that does not involve displaying a specific image in a jackpot than in a variable performance pattern that does not involve displaying a specific image in a loss. be.
In other words, if the specific image is not displayed, the level of expectation for a jackpot may change depending on the number of songs, so the game enjoyment within one variable performance can be improved depending on whether the specific image is displayed and the number of songs. can do.

Note that the game state in which Figures 47 to 51 are executed does not matter. For example, it may be applied to all game states, or to some game states.

(Summary of Figures 47 to 51)
That is, FIGS. 47 to 51 have the following features.

That is,
If the result of the jackpot determination is a loss (for example, if step S311-1 of the jackpot determination process is denied),
The variable effect patterns (for example, variable effect patterns 7 to 18) that involve displaying the specific image 31e are as follows:
If the result of the jackpot determination is a loss (for example, if step S311-1 of the jackpot determination process is denied),
Compared to variable effect patterns that do not involve displaying the specific image 31e (for example, variable effect patterns 1 to 6),
It is easy to execute a reach effect consisting of a plurality of songs (for example, the variable effect pattern 1 is a variable effect pattern that does not involve the display of the specific image 31e, and the number of songs is 1. On the other hand, the variable effect pattern 7 is This is a variable effect pattern accompanied by the display of a specific image 31e, and the number of songs is 3 (the number of songs for the reach effect is 2).
It has such characteristics.
Thereby, the interest in the game can be improved.

That is,
The first reach effect (for example, variable effect pattern 7) is 3 songs (the number of songs in the reach effect is 2),
The second reach effect (for example, variable effect pattern 16) has four songs (the number of songs in the reach effect is three), so the number of songs is different.
And (even if the number of songs is different)
When the specific image 31e is displayed after the first reach performance is executed (for example, (c) T5 to (c) T6 in FIG. 48),
There are cases where the specific image 31e is displayed after the second reach performance is executed (for example, (d) T7 to (d) T8 in FIG. 48).
It has the following features:
This increases the interest in the game since the number of songs differs for each variable performance pattern that performs the reach performance, while the specific image 31e is displayed after the reach performance is executed even in the variable performance pattern that performs the reach performance with a different number of songs, so that the timing when the reach performance ends can be clearly recognized.

That is,
In the variable performance, specific performances accompanied by music (eg, variable performance pattern 7 to variable performance pattern 18, variable performance pattern 30) can be executed.
Among the specific performances, at least a part of the period (for example, (c) T2 to (c) T3 in FIG. 48, ie, "background switching") is a period without music.
Among the specific performances, the period in which the specific image 31e is displayed (for example, (c) T5 to (c) T6 in FIG. 48, ie, "background switching") is a period without music.
It has such characteristics.
As a result, for example, during the period from (c) T2 to (c) T3 in FIG. 48, it is possible to take a pause when changing from a normal reach song to a SP reach song, so the song can be changed without any discomfort. It can be carried out.
Further, for example, in the period from (c) T5 to (c) T6 in FIG. 48, there is no sound, so that it can be clearly recognized that the ready-to-reach effect has ended.

That is, in the variable performance,
Before the specific image 31e is displayed, music is played (for example, if it is variable performance pattern 7, music A, music B, and music C are output).
After the specific image 31e is displayed, no music is played (for example, no music is output).
It has the following features:
In this way, by using the display of the "specific image" as a standard and outputting music before the display, it is possible to increase the sense of expectation for a big win. On the other hand, by not outputting music after the display, it is possible to avoid giving excessive expectations for a big win.

That is,
In a variable effect pattern (for example, variable effect pattern 7) that involves displaying the specific image 31e,
"Stop sound" in the "temporary stop display period" is not output (for example, (c) T6 to (c) T7 in FIG. 48).
In a variable effect pattern (for example, variable effect pattern 1) that does not involve displaying the specific image 31e,
The "stop sound" in the "temporary stop display period" is output (for example, (a) T1 to (a) T2 in FIG. 48).
It has such characteristics.
This makes it possible to output a suitable "stop sound" depending on the frequency of selection and the content of the performance.

Next, a third characteristic feature related to a specific image will be described with reference to FIGS.
Note that Figures 52 to 57 mainly refer to preview performances, so some details have been omitted, but the contents described in Figures 42 to 46 and the contents described in Figures 47 to 51 can be used in appropriate combination.

Fig. 52 is a time chart 6 showing details of each variable performance pattern (see Fig. 33), (a) shows details of variable performance pattern 10, mainly showing details of pseudo consecutive wins. (b) shows details of variable performance pattern 5, mainly showing details of the dialogue preview. (c) shows details of variable performance pattern 7, mainly showing details of the roulette preview performance. (d) shows details of variable performance pattern 33, mainly showing details of the SU preview performance.
In addition, details are shown for each variable performance pattern regarding the relationship between the "specific image" displayed on the image display device 31 and the preview performance.

(Timing (a) T0)
(a) is variable presentation pattern 10, and timing (a) T0 is the timing when the variable display starts.
At this timing, the "normal varying image" is displayed on the "image display device."
Also, at this timing, a "dialogue preview" can be executed.
Also, at this timing, the "specific image" is not displayed.

These aspects of the "image display device", "line preview effect", and "specific image" are continued until timing (a) T1 is reached.

(Timing (a) T1)
Timing (a) T1 is the timing of transition from the "normal fluctuation period" to the "pseudo consecutive 2 notification period".
At this timing, a text image saying "Continue!" (corresponding to a dialogue preview effect) is displayed on the "image display device" to suggest that the pseudo-consecutive will continue.
Further, thereafter, a "NEXT symbol" suggesting the execution of a pseudo consecutive win is displayed on the "image display device" until timing (a) T2.
In addition, at this timing, the "dialogue preview effect" can be executed. That is, during the "pseudo consecutive 2 notification period", the "dialogue preview effect", which is one aspect of the preview effect, can be executed in a redundant manner.
In addition, it is possible to execute not only the "dialogue preview performance" but also other preview performances not shown in the figure.
Also, at this timing, the "specific image" is not displayed.

These aspects of the "image display device," "dialogue preview performance," and "specific image" continue through timing (a) T2 and up to timing (a) T3.

(Timing (a) T3)
Timing (a) T3 is the timing at which the "pseudo continuous 2 notification period" shifts to the "continuation performance".
At this timing, a "continuation effect image" indicating that the pseudo-continuation has continued is displayed on the "image display device."
Further, at this timing, the "line preview performance" is not executed.
Further, at this timing, the "specific image" is not displayed.

These aspects of the "image display device", "line preview effect", and "specific image" are continued until timing (a) T4.

(Timing (a) T4)
Timing (a) T4 is the timing of transition from the "continuation performance" to the "pseudo consecutive 2 fluctuation period".
At this timing, a "pseudo consecutive two-changing image" is displayed on the "image display device."
Also, at this timing, a "dialogue preview" can be executed.
Also, at this timing, the "specific image" is not displayed.

These aspects of the "image display device," "dialogue preview performance," and "specific image" continue until timing (a) T5.

(Timing (a) T5)
Timing (a) T5 is the timing at which the "pseudo series 2 fluctuation period" shifts to the "pseudo series 3 notification period".
At this timing, a character image "Continue!?" indicating that the pseudo-relationship will continue is displayed on the "image display device."
Furthermore, after that, a "NEXT symbol" suggesting execution of a pseudo series is displayed on the "image display device" until timing (a) T6.
Furthermore, at this timing, the "line preview performance" can be executed. That is, in the "pseudo series 3 notification period", the "line preview performance", which is one aspect of the preview performance, can be executed overlappingly.
It should be noted that it is possible to perform not only the "dialogue preview performance" but also other preview performances (not shown).
Further, at this timing, the "specific image" is not displayed.

These aspects of "image display device", "line preview effect", and "specific image" are continued from timing (a) T6 to timing (a) T7.

(Timing (a) T7)
Timing (a) T7 is the timing at which the "pseudo continuous 3 notification period" shifts to the "continuation performance".
At this timing, a "continuation effect image" indicating that the pseudo-continuation has continued is displayed on the "image display device."
Further, at this timing, the "line preview performance" is not executed.
Further, at this timing, the "specific image" is not displayed.

These aspects of the "image display device," "dialogue preview performance," and "specific image" continue until timing (a) T8.

(Timing (a) T8)
Timing (a) T8 is the timing of transition from the "continuation performance" to the "pseudo consecutive 3 variation period".
At this timing, a "pseudo consecutive three varying image" is displayed on the "image display device."
Also, at this timing, a "dialogue preview" can be executed.
Also, at this timing, the "specific image" is not displayed.

These aspects of the "image display device," "dialogue preview performance," and "specific image" continue until timing (a) T9.

(Timing (a) T9)
Timing (a) T9 is the timing of transition from the "pseudo consecutive 3 fluctuation period" to the "normal reach fluctuation period".
At this timing, a "normal reach image" is displayed on the "image display device."
Also, at this timing, the "dialogue preview" is not executed.
Also, at this timing, the "specific image" is not displayed.

These aspects of the "image display device," "dialogue preview performance," and "specific image" continue until timing (a) T10.

(Timing (a) T10)
Timing (a) T10 is the timing of transition from the "normal reach variation period" to the "background switching".
At this timing, the "switching image" is displayed on the "image display device".
Further, at this timing, the "line preview performance" is not executed.
Further, at this timing, the "specific image" is not displayed.

These aspects of the "image display device," "dialogue preview performance," and "specific image" continue until timing (a) T11.

(Timing (a) T11)
Timing (a) T11 is the timing of transition from "background switching" to "SP reach fluctuation period".
At this timing, the "SP reach image" is displayed on the "image display device."
Also, at this timing, the "dialogue preview" is not executed.
Also, at this timing, the "specific image" is not displayed.

These aspects of the "image display device," "dialogue preview performance," and "specific image" continue until timing (a) T12.

(Timing (a) T12)
Timing (a) T12 is the timing for making a "loss notification" during the "SP reach fluctuation period" to notify that the result of the jackpot lottery is a loss.
At this timing, a "loss notification image" is displayed on the "image display device."
Also, at this timing, the "dialogue preview" is not executed.
Also, at this timing, the "specific image" is not displayed.

These aspects of the "image display device", "line preview effect", and "specific image" are continued until timing (a) T13.

(Timing (a) T13)
Timing (a) T13 is the timing at which the "SP reach variation period" shifts to the "background switching".
At this timing, the "specific image" is displayed on the "image display device" for 2S.
Further, at this timing, the "line preview performance" is not executed. That is, in the "background switching" from timing (a) T13 to timing (a) T14, "line preview performance", which is one aspect of the preview performance, cannot be executed redundantly. It should be noted that not only the "dialogue preview production" but also other preview productions not shown in the figure cannot be performed.

These aspects of the "image display device," "dialogue preview performance," and "specific image" continue until timing (a) T14.

(Timing (a) T14)
Timing (a) T14 is the timing of transition from the "background switching" to the "provisional stopped display period".
At this timing, the "temporary still image" is displayed on the "image display device."
Also, at this timing, the "dialogue preview" is not executed.
Also, at this timing, the "specific image" is not displayed.

These aspects of the "image display device," "dialogue preview performance," and "specific image" continue until timing (a) T15.

(Timing (a) T15)
Timing (a) T15 is the timing at which the "temporary stop display period" shifts to the "determined stop display period".
At this timing, the "confirmed still image" is displayed on the "image display device."
Further, at this timing, the "line preview performance" is not executed.
Further, at this timing, the "specific image" is not displayed.

These aspects of the "image display device", "line preview production", and "specific image" are continued until timing (a) T16, and when timing (a) T16 is reached, the variable production pattern 10 is ended. (One game ends).

In addition, the provisional stop display of the performance pattern 38 during the "provisional stop display period" constitutes a "suggestive performance" according to the result of the jackpot determination.
Furthermore, the display of the "specific image" constitutes a "suggestive notification effect" that anticipates that the suggestive effect (the provisional stop display of the effect pattern 38 during the "provisional stop display period") will be executed.
In addition, referring to FIG. 33, the display of the "specific image" is more likely to be displayed when there is a loss than when there is a jackpot. Therefore, the provisional stop display of the performance pattern 38 during the "provisional stop display period" after the display of the "specific image" can be said to be a specific suggestive performance that suggests that the possibility of a jackpot game being executed is low. Also, the display of the "specific image" can be said to be a specific suggestive notification performance that suggests that the possibility of a jackpot game being executed is low.

Here, in order to facilitate understanding of the time chart of the variable effect pattern 10 (a) in FIG. 52, a supplementary explanation will be given of the display mode of a part of the variable effect pattern 10 using the animation of FIG. 54.
FIG. 54 shows only the image display device 31 extracted and described, and since each display element of the image display device 31 is the same as described in FIG. 43 and the like, description thereof will be omitted.

(Display example in variable performance pattern 10)
(a) T0 to T1 corresponds to the "normal fluctuation period."
In other words, the left performance pattern 38a, the middle performance pattern 38b, and the right performance pattern 38c are displayed scrolling vertically.
Then, the left performance pattern 38a and the right performance pattern 38c are displayed temporarily stopped, and only the middle performance pattern 38b is displayed scrolling vertically.

(a) T1 to T2 correspond to the "pseudo continuous 2 notification period".
That is, the left performance symbol 38a and the right performance symbol 38c are temporarily stopped and displayed, and the "NEXT symbol 31m" (the above-mentioned pseudo-continuous execution suggestion symbol) appears from the top of the screen as the middle performance symbol 38b.
Further, a character image 31l is displayed, and a character image "Continue!" (corresponding to a speech preview effect) is emitted from the character image 31l, which suggests that the pseudo series will continue.

(a) T2 to T3 correspond to the "pseudo continuous 2 notification period".
That is, the left performance symbol 38a and the right performance symbol 38c are temporarily stopped and displayed, and the "NEXT symbol 31m" appearing from the top of the screen is temporarily stopped (or may be determined to be stopped) in the center of the screen.

(a) T3 to T4 correspond to "continuation performance."
In other words, the left performance pattern 38a and the right performance pattern 38c are displayed in a temporary stop state, an effect image is displayed around the temporary stop display "NEXT pattern 31m" in the center of the screen, and a "pseudo consecutive number of times image 31n" indicating the number of pseudo consecutive times is displayed with the display content "x2" in the upper right corner of the display area.
At this time, the sound output device 32 outputs a sound effect of "Ja-ki-n!" as a pseudo-consecutive continuation effect.

(a) T4 to T5 corresponds to the "pseudo consecutive 2 variable period."
That is, (a) simply by adding the “pseudo consecutive number of times image 31n” “×2” to the display content shown by T0 to T1, it appears as if a new variable performance has started.

(a) T6 to T7 corresponds to the "pseudo consecutive 2 notification period."
That is, the left performance pattern 38a and the right performance pattern 38c are displayed in a temporarily stopped state, and the "NEXT pattern 31m" that appears from the top of the screen is displayed in a temporarily stopped state in the center of the screen.

(a) T7 to T8 correspond to the "continuation effect."
In other words, the left performance pattern 38a and the right performance pattern 38c are displayed in a temporary stop state, an effect image is displayed around the temporary stop display "NEXT pattern 31m" in the center of the screen, and a "pseudo consecutive number of times image 31n" indicating the number of pseudo consecutive times is displayed with the display content "x3" in the upper right corner of the display area.
At this time, the sound output device 32 outputs a sound effect of "Ja-ki-n!" as a pseudo-consecutive continuation effect.

In the variable presentation pattern 10 involving pseudo consecutive wins, the display mode is as described above.
In addition, the "pseudo consecutive fluctuation period" of the "pseudo consecutive 2 fluctuation period" and the "pseudo consecutive 3 fluctuation period" constitute a "suggestion performance" according to the result of the jackpot determination.
Furthermore, the "pseudo consecutive winning notification periods" of the "pseudo consecutive winning notification period 2" and "pseudo consecutive winning notification period" constitute a "suggested notification effect" that anticipates the execution of the suggestive effect (the "pseudo consecutive winning fluctuation period" of the "pseudo consecutive winning 2 fluctuation period" and "pseudo consecutive winning 3 fluctuation period").

Although the time relationship is not specifically indicated on the time chart, the time from the "pseudo consecutive 2 notification period" to the "pseudo consecutive 2 fluctuation period" (in other words, the time from the "first suggestive notification performance" to the "first suggestive performance") is longer than the time from the display of the "specific image" to the tentative stop display of the performance pattern 38 in the "tentative stop display period" (in other words, the time from the "second suggestive notification performance" to the "second suggestive performance").
In addition, the performance execution time between the "pseudo consecutive 2 notification period" and the "pseudo consecutive 2 variation period" is longer than the performance execution time between the display of the "specific image" and the temporary stop display of the performance pattern 38 during the "temporary stop display period" (hereinafter, this may be referred to as the "relationship between the performance execution times").
This makes it possible to maintain the sense of anticipation for a jackpot for a long period of time, for example, from the "first suggestion notification performance" which is performed before the timing at which the result of the jackpot determination is announced to the "first suggestion performance."
On the other hand, for example, in the "second suggestion notification performance" that is performed after the timing of notifying the result of the jackpot determination, by quickly executing the suggestion performance that is expected to be executed in the suggestion notification performance, it is possible to prevent excessive increases in expectations for a jackpot.
The relationship between the times is not limited to this, and the two times may be equal, or the relationship between the two may be reversed.

Returning to the explanation of the time chart in FIG. 52 again.
(Timing (b) T0)
(b) is a variation effect pattern 5, and timing (b) T0 is the timing at which the variation display is started.
At this timing, the "normal fluctuation image" is displayed on the "image display device".
Furthermore, at this timing, the "line preview performance" can be executed.

These aspects of the "image display device" and the "line preview production" are continued until timing (b) T1.

(Timing (b) T1)
Timing (b) T1 is the timing at which a dialogue preview is executed during the varying display.
At this timing, the "image display device" displays a "normal varying image" and an image saying "It's a reach!" which notifies in advance that a reach effect will be executed.
These aspects of the "image display device" and "dialogue preview performance" continue until timing (b) T2, and then when timing (b) T3 is reached, the "normal fluctuation period" ends.

(Timing (b) T3)
Timing (b) T3 is the timing when the "normal fluctuation period" ends and the "normal reach fluctuation period" begins.
At this timing, the "normal reach image" is displayed on the "image display device".
Furthermore, at this timing, the "line preview performance" is not executed.
Note that the description of the subsequent contents of the variable effect pattern 5 will be omitted.

Here, in order to facilitate understanding of the time chart of the variable effect pattern 5 (b) of FIG. 52, a supplementary explanation will be given of the display mode of a part of the variable effect pattern 5 using the animation of FIG. 55.
FIG. 55 shows only the image display device 31 extracted and described, and since each display element of the image display device 31 is the same as described in FIG. 43 and the like, description thereof will be omitted.

(Display example in variable performance pattern 5)
(b) T0 to T1 corresponds to the period before the dialogue preview is executed during the “normal fluctuation period.”
In other words, the left performance pattern 38a, the middle performance pattern 38b, and the right performance pattern 38c are displayed scrolling vertically.
Then, thereafter, in (b) T1 to T2, a character image 31l is displayed, and a line image saying "It's Reach!" is displayed (uttered) from the character image 31l, which notifies in advance of the execution of a reach effect.

Then, (b) from T2 to T3, the left performance symbol 38a (5 symbol) is displayed as a temporary stop, and further, (b) from T3 onwards, the right performance symbol 38c (5 symbol) is displayed as a temporary stop, and a normal reach performance using the 5 symbol is executed.

In variable presentation pattern 5, the display mode is as described above.
In addition, the "normal reach fluctuation period" constitutes a "suggestive performance" according to the result of the jackpot determination.
Furthermore, the dialogue image ("It's a reach!") in the "dialogue advance notice performance) that notifies in advance of the execution of a reach performance constitutes a "suggestive notification performance" that anticipates the execution of the suggestive performance ("normal reach fluctuation period").
Furthermore, even if the "dialogue preview performance" is executed using variable performance pattern 10, the above-mentioned "relationship between performance execution times" applies in the relationship between the display of the "specific image" and the temporary stop display of performance pattern 38 during the "temporary stop display period".

Returning to the explanation of the time chart in FIG. 52 again.
(Timing (c) T0)
(c) is a variation effect pattern 7, and timing (c) T0 is the timing at which the variation display is started.
At this timing, the "normal fluctuation image" is displayed on the "image display device".
Furthermore, at this timing, the "roulette notice effect" can be executed.

These aspects of the "image display device" and "roulette preview performance" continue until timing (c) T1.

(Timing (c) T1)
Timing (c) T1 is the timing at which the roulette preview effect is executed during the variable display.
At this timing, a "roulette effect image" (a roulette effect image in which a plurality of options are displayed) is displayed on the "image display device." Then, after a predetermined period of time has elapsed, an effect of selecting one of the plurality of options is performed.
These aspects of the "image display device" and the "roulette preview performance" continue until timing (c) T2, and then, when reaching timing (c) T3, the "normal fluctuation period" ends.

(Timing (c) T3)
Timing (c) T3 is the timing when the "normal fluctuation period" ends and the "normal reach fluctuation period" begins.
From then on, at timing (c) T4, the transition is to "background switching", and at timing (c) T5, the transition is to "SP reach variation period", and the corresponding images are displayed on the "image display device". be done.
Note that the description of the subsequent contents of the variable effect pattern 7 will be omitted.

Here, in order to facilitate understanding of the time chart of the variable effect pattern 7 (c) in FIG. 52, a supplementary explanation will be given of the display mode of a part of the variable effect pattern 7 using the animation of FIG. 56.
FIG. 56 shows only the image display device 31 extracted and described, and since each display element of the image display device 31 is the same as described in FIG. 43 etc., the explanation will be omitted.

(Display example in variable production pattern 7)
(c) T0 to T1 correspond to before the execution of the roulette preview performance in the "normal fluctuation period".
That is, the left presentation pattern 38a, the middle presentation pattern 38b, and the right presentation pattern 38c are displayed scrolling in the vertical direction.
After that, in (c) T1 to T2, the roulette effect image 31o is displayed and corresponds to the roulette pattern 1 (see FIG. 37) of "x", "?", "SP", "heat", and "rainbow". options will be displayed.
Then, a performance is performed to select one of the options (a performance such as rotationally moving the selection cursor image), and the performance is continued for a predetermined period of time.
Then, after a predetermined period of time has elapsed, the screen becomes dark except for one option, to notify that one option has been selected.
Note that in FIG. 56, it is assumed that "SP" is selected.

(c) T3 to T4 indicate a "normal reach variation period", and (c) T4 to T5 indicate a "background switching", and a switching image (an image called "Development!") is displayed.
In addition, in (c) T4 to T5, the background image imitating a mountain corresponding to the "Normal reach fluctuation period" is not displayed, and other than the text image "Development!", a whiteout image is displayed. There is.
And (c) T5~ indicates the "SP reach fluctuation period". During the "SP Reach Variation Period", the background image imitating a mountain corresponding to the "Normal Reach Variation Period" is not displayed, but a text image that says "SP Reach!" and an image that looks like character images confronting each other are displayed. be done.

In the variation effect pattern 7, the display mode is as described above.
In addition, the "SP reach variation period" constitutes a "suggestion effect" according to the result of the jackpot determination.
Furthermore, the selection of an option in the "roulette preview effect" (in the example of FIG. 56, the selection of "SP") is a "suggestion effect" that anticipates that the suggestion effect ("SP reach fluctuation period") will be executed. It constitutes a "notification performance".
In addition, even when the "roulette notice performance" is executed with the variable performance pattern 10, the above-mentioned "performance execution time" is 'relationship' applies.

Returning to the explanation of the time chart in FIG. 52 again.
(Timing (d) T0)
(d) is a variable effect pattern 33, and timing (d) T0 is the timing at which the variable display is started.
At this timing, the "normal fluctuation image" is displayed on the "image display device".
Furthermore, at this timing, the "SU preview performance" can be executed.

These aspects of the "image display device" and "SU preview performance" are continued until timing (d) T1.

(Timing (d) T1)
Timing (d) T1 is the timing when the SU preview performance is executed during the varying display.
At this timing, the "SU preview image" is displayed on the "image display device." Note that in FIG. 52, it is assumed that "SU5, confirmed win" is finally displayed. Therefore, the images are switched and displayed in order for a predetermined time, such as "SU1" → "SU2" → "SU3" → "SU4" → "SU5" → "SU5, confirmed win."
These aspects of the "image display device" and "SU preview performance" continue until timing (d) T2, and then when timing (d) T3 is reached, the "normal fluctuation period" ends.

(Timing (d) T3)
Timing (d) T3 is the timing when the "normal fluctuation period" ends and the "normal reach fluctuation period" begins.
Note that from then on, at timing (d) T4, the period shifts to "full rotation fluctuation period", at timing (c) T5, shifts to "temporary stop display period", and at timing (c) T6, shifts to "determined stop display period". The corresponding images are displayed on the "image display device".
Note that detailed explanation of the variable effect pattern 33 will be omitted.

Here, in order to facilitate understanding of the time chart of the variable effect pattern 33 (d) in FIG. 52, a supplementary explanation will be given of the display mode of a part of the variable effect pattern 33 using the animation of FIG. 57.
FIG. 57 shows only the image display device 31 extracted and described, and since each display element of the image display device 31 is the same as described in FIG. 43 and the like, description thereof will be omitted.

(Example of display in variable performance pattern 33)
(d) T0 to T1 correspond to before the execution of the SU notice performance in the "normal fluctuation period".
That is, the left presentation pattern 38a, the middle presentation pattern 38b, and the right presentation pattern 38c are displayed scrolling in the vertical direction.
After that, from (d) T1 onwards, the step-up preview performance image 31p is displayed, and from (d) to T2, the step-up preview performance image 31p "Target SU5 Full Rotation" is displayed.
Further, in conjunction with the display of the step-up preview effect image 31p "SU5 guaranteed to be a full rotation", the audio output device 32 outputs a notification sound (Kyuin! Kyuin!) to notify that the fluctuation is a jackpot.

(d) T4 to T5 indicate a "full rotation change period." During the "full rotation change period," the left performance pattern 38a, the center performance pattern 38b, and the right performance pattern 38c are displayed in a vertically scrolling manner in a manner in which the left performance pattern 38a, the center performance pattern 38b, and the right performance pattern 38c are aligned as the same pattern.
Then, (d) from T5 to T6, the left performance pattern 38a (7 pattern), middle performance pattern 38b (7 pattern), and right performance pattern 38c (7 pattern) are displayed as provisionally stopped, and (d) from T6 to T7, the left performance pattern 38a (7 pattern), middle performance pattern 38b (7 pattern), and right performance pattern 38c (7 pattern) are displayed as definitely stopped.

In the variable performance pattern 33, the display mode is as described above.
In addition, the "full rotation fluctuation period" constitutes a "suggestion effect" according to the result of the jackpot determination.
Furthermore, the display of the step-up preview performance image 31p in the "SU preview performance" (in the example of Figure 56, the display "SU5 confirmed full rotation") constitutes a "suggestive notification performance" that anticipates that the suggestive performance ("full rotation fluctuation period") will be executed.
Furthermore, even if the "SU preview performance" is executed with variable performance pattern 10, the above-mentioned "relationship between performance execution times" applies in the relationship between the display of the "specific image" and the temporary stop display of performance pattern 38 during the "temporary stop display period".

Above, (a) variable effect pattern 10, (b) variable effect pattern 5, (c) variable effect pattern 7, and (d) variable effect pattern 33 have been described as examples. According to them, before the timing to notify the result of the jackpot determination (for example, the "loss notification" in FIG. 52(a)), the timing to notify the result of the jackpot determination (for example, the "loss notification" in FIG. 52(a)) It is characterized by a greater number of executable suggestive effects than later versions (Hochi).
Also, before the timing to notify the result of the jackpot determination (for example, "loss notification" in FIG. 52(a)), the timing to notify the result of the jackpot determination (for example, "loss notification" in FIG. 52(a)) It is characterized by a larger number of executable suggestion announcements than later versions.
That is, before the timing to notify the result of the jackpot determination (for example, "loss notification" in FIG. 52(a)),
A production (pseudo series 2 Direction, pseudo-ren 3 direction),
In the "Speech Preview Production", a production (Speech) based on a combination of a dialogue image (a dialogue image that says "Reach!") (suggestion notification production) that notifies the execution of the reach production in advance, and a "Normal reach fluctuation period" (suggestion production). preview performance and normal reach performance),
In the "roulette preview performance", the selection of options (in the example of Fig. 56, the selection of "SP") (suggestive notification performance) and the "SP reach fluctuation period" (suggestive performance) (roulette preview performance) production and roulette compatible production),
Display of the step-up preview performance image 31p in the "SU preview performance" (in the example shown in Fig. 56, the display reads "Probable SU5 full rotation") (suggestive notification performance) and "Full rotation fluctuation period" (suggestive performance) Production in combination with (SU preview production and SU compatible production),
is feasible, while
After the timing to notify the result of jackpot determination (for example, "loss notification" in FIG. 52(a)),
A performance (background switching performance and temporary stop display performance) based on a combination of the display of a "specific image" (suggestive notification performance) and the temporary stop display (suggestive performance) of the performance pattern 38 during the "temporary stop display period";
is feasible.
Thereby, before the timing of notifying the result of the jackpot determination, it is possible to improve expectations for the jackpot through a plurality of types of suggestion notification performances and suggestion performances.
Further, after the timing of notifying the result of the jackpot determination, it is possible to prevent excessive expectations for the jackpot from increasing.

In this way, since there are more suggestive notification effects and hint effects that can be executed before the timing at which the result of the jackpot determination is announced than after the timing at which the result of the jackpot determination is announced, it can be said that before the timing at which the result of the jackpot determination is announced, depending on the degree to which the advance notice effects are executed, it is possible to execute effects that combine the first suggestive notification effect with the first suggestive effect (for example, pseudo consecutive 2 effects, pseudo consecutive 3 effects) and effects that combine the second suggestive notification effect with the second suggestive effect (for example, a dialogue advance notice effect and a normal reach effect), and that after the timing at which the result of the jackpot determination is announced, it is possible to execute effects that combine the third suggestive notification effect (display of specific image 31e) with the third suggestive effect (temporary stop display of effect pattern 38 during the "temporary stop display period") (background switching effect and temporary stop display effect).

In addition, the present invention is not limited to this form. The number of executable suggestive notification effects and suggestive effects may be the same before and after the timing at which the result of the jackpot determination is notified, or the number of executable suggestive notification effects and suggestive effects may be greater after the timing at which the result of the jackpot determination is notified than before.

In addition, as shown in the example of (a) variable performance pattern 10 in FIG. 52, for example, during the "pseudo continuous 2 notification period", other preview performances (for example, "line preview performance") are simultaneously performed. However, for example, when displaying a "specific image," other preview effects (for example, "line preview effects") cannot be executed at the same time.
That is, when executing the first suggestion notification effect ("pseudo-continuous 2 notification period"), the preview effect can be executed, and when executing the second suggestion notification effect (display of "specific image"), the preview effect can be executed. , it can be said that the preview performance is not executed.
As a result, in a situation where expectations for a jackpot are to be improved, other advance notice effects can be simultaneously executed to further improve expectations for a jackpot.
Furthermore, in the aspect of preventing excessive expectations for a jackpot from increasing, it is possible to maintain prevention of increasing excessive expectations for a jackpot by not simultaneously executing other preview performances.

FIG. 53 is a drawing that extracts a part of the variable effect pattern shown in FIG. 33, and particularly shows (a) the relationship between the number of pseudo repetitions for each variable effect pattern and the degree of appearance of a specific image (when losing), (b) losing It shows the relationship between the time and the degree of appearance of a specific image when hitting a jackpot.
In addition, in FIG. 53, the variation effect pattern in which the number of pseudo consecutive runs is set to one is visually as if two variations were performed, for example, normal variation → pseudo consecutive success → normal variation. , it becomes a "pseudo-ren 2 performance". In addition, a variation performance pattern in which the number of pseudo consecutive runs is determined to be 2 times, for example, normal variation → pseudo continuous success → normal variation → pseudo consecutive success → normal reach variation, looks as if the variation is performed 3 times. Therefore, it is a ``pseudo continuous 3 performance''. In addition, a variation performance pattern in which the number of pseudo consecutive runs is determined to be 3 times is, for example, normal variation → pseudo continuous success → normal variation → pseudo continuous success → normal variation → pseudo continuous success → normal reach variation, which looks as if it were a normal reach variation. Since there are four variations, this is a "pseudo series of four effects."
Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 33, in the variable performance pattern for the jackpot, "Pseudo consecutive 2 performance", "Pseudo consecutive 3 performance", and "Pseudo consecutive 4 performance" are similarly executable.
Note that the executable pseudo-sequence effects are not limited to this, and may further include a "pseudo-sequence 5 effect" or a "pseudo-sequence 6 effect".

(a) shows the relationship between the number of pseudo-runs and the degree of appearance of a specific image for each variable effect pattern (at the time of loss), and shows an excerpt of the variable effect pattern in which the pseudo-run is executed in case of a loss. Among these, the only variable effect pattern that does not involve displaying a "specific image" is variable effect pattern 3, and the other variable effect patterns are variable effect patterns that involve displaying a "specific image."
For example, when comparing variable effect pattern 3 with other variable effect patterns, the variable effect pattern in which a large number of pseudo consecutive runs is defined makes it easier for the "specific image" to be displayed. This is because the higher the number of pseudo-runs, the easier it is to move beyond SP reach, so it becomes easier for a "specific image" to be displayed depending on the situation, and the higher the number of pseudo-runs, the higher the expectation for a jackpot. This is because after the loss notification is performed, it is necessary to clearly notify that the reach effect has ended as a loss, so the "specific image" is more likely to be displayed.

In addition, when a pseudo consecutive prediction is made, the specific image 31e may be displayed regardless of the number of times, or the specific image 31e may be made more difficult to display for a variable presentation pattern that specifies a greater number of pseudo consecutive times.

(b) shows the relationship between the degree of appearance of a specific image during a loss and a jackpot, and is an excerpt of a variable performance pattern accompanied by the display of a "specific image." As mentioned above, the variable effect pattern 30 is the only variable effect pattern that involves the display of a "specific image" at the time of a jackpot, and even from the distribution ratio in FIG. Since the effect pattern 30 is rarely selected, the variable effect pattern accompanied by the display of a "specific image" tends to appear more easily when there is a loss than when there is a jackpot.
This makes it easier for players to recognize that the display of the "specific image" = the result of the jackpot determination was a loss, and the display of the "specific image" makes it easier for the player to recognize that the reach effect has ended in a loss. It can be made easier.

Incidentally, the variable effect pattern accompanied by the display of the "specific image" may be made to appear more easily when there is a jackpot than when there is a loss.

Note that the game state in which Figures 52 to 57 are executed does not matter. For example, it may be applied to all game states, or to some game states.

(Summary of Figures 52 to 57)
That is, FIGS. 52 to 57 have the following features.

That is,
In the variable performance,
Suggestive effects according to the result of the jackpot judgment (for example, "Pseudo consecutive 2 fluctuation period", "Pseudo consecutive 3 fluctuation period", "Normal reach fluctuation period", "SP reach fluctuation period", "Full rotation fluctuation period", "Temporary reach fluctuation period") Temporary stop display of the production pattern 38 during the "stop display period"),
Suggestive notification performances that make you anticipate that the relevant suggestion performance will be executed (for example, "Pseudo-Run 2 notification period", "Pseudo-Run 3 notification period", the line image "Reach!" in the "Speech preview performance", "Roulette") Selecting an option in "Preview Performance" (for example, selecting "SP" in FIG. 56), displaying the step-up preview performance image 31p in "SU Preview Performance" (for example, displaying "Probable SU5 Full Rotation" in FIG. 56), display of the “specific image 31e”).
The number of executable suggestion notification effects and suggestion effects differs before and after the predetermined timing (for example, T12 in FIG. 52(a)) of notifying the result of the jackpot determination.
It has such characteristics.
Thereby, before the timing of notifying the result of the jackpot determination, the expectation for the jackpot can be improved by the suggestion notification performance and the suggestion production.
Moreover, after the timing of notifying the result of the jackpot determination, it is possible to prevent excessive expectations for the jackpot from increasing.

That is,
In the variable performance,
Suggestive effects according to the results of the jackpot determination (for example, a provisional stop display of the effect pattern 38 during the "pseudo consecutive 2 fluctuation period", "pseudo consecutive 3 fluctuation period", "normal reach fluctuation period", "SP reach fluctuation period", "full rotation fluctuation period", and "provisional stop display period");
It is possible to execute suggestive notification effects that anticipate the execution of the suggestive effect (for example, a "pseudo consecutive 2 notification period" or a "pseudo consecutive 3 notification period", a dialogue image such as "It's a reach!" in a "dialogue notification effect", a selection of an option in a "roulette notification effect" (for example, selection of "SP" in FIG. 56), a display of a step-up notification effect image 31p in a "SU notification effect" (for example, a display of "SU5 guaranteed win, full spins" in FIG. 56), and a display of a "specific image 31e").
Before a predetermined timing (e.g., T12 in (a) of Figure 52) for announcing the result of the jackpot determination, it is possible to execute a first effect (e.g., pseudo-consecutive 2 effect, pseudo-consecutive 3 effect) by combining the first suggestion notification effect with the first suggestion effect, and a second effect (e.g., a dialogue preview effect and a normal reach effect) by combining the second suggestion notification effect with the second suggestion effect.
After a predetermined timing (e.g., T12 in (a) of Figure 52) at which the result of the jackpot determination is announced, a third effect (e.g., a background switching effect and a temporary stop display effect) can be executed by combining a third suggestion announcement effect (e.g., display of a specific image 31e) and a third suggestion effect (e.g., temporary stop display of the effect pattern 38 during the ``temporary stop display period'').
It has the following features:
As a result, before the timing of announcing the result of the jackpot determination, the suggestive notification effect and the suggestive effect can increase the sense of expectation for the jackpot.
In addition, after the timing at which the result of the big win determination is notified, it is possible to prevent excessive increases in expectations for a big win.

That is,
In the variable performance,
Suggestive effects according to the result of the jackpot judgment (for example, "Pseudo consecutive 2 fluctuation period", "Pseudo consecutive 3 fluctuation period", "Normal reach fluctuation period", "SP reach fluctuation period", "Full rotation fluctuation period", "Temporary reach fluctuation period") Temporary stop display of the production pattern 38 during the stop display period);
Suggestive notification effects that make you anticipate that the relevant suggestion effect will be executed (for example, ``Pseudo-Run 2 notification period'', ``Pseudo-Run 3 notification period'', the line image ``Reach!'' in ``Speech preview performance'', ``Roulette Selecting an option in "Preview Performance" (for example, selecting "SP" in FIG. 56), displaying the step-up preview performance image 31p in "SU Preview Performance" (for example, displaying "Probable SU5 Full Rotation" in FIG. 56), display of the “specific image 31e”).
Before the predetermined timing (for example, T12 in (a) of FIG. 52) to notify the result of the jackpot determination → the first suggestion notification performance (for example, "Pseudo consecutive 2 notification period") and the first suggestion performance (for example, " ``Pseudo-Run 2 Fluctuation Period'') may be executed.
After the predetermined timing (for example, T12 in FIG. 52 (a)) to notify the result of the jackpot determination → second suggestion notification effect (for example, display of specific image 31e) and second suggestion effect (for example, "Temporary stop") "Temporary stop display of the production pattern 38 during the display period" may be executed.
When executing the first suggestion notification performance (for example, "pseudo consecutive 2 notification period") -> advance notice performance (for example, dialogue notice performance) can be executed.
When executing the second suggestion notification effect (for example, displaying the specific image 31e) → the preview effect (for example, dialogue preview effect) is not executed.
It has such characteristics.
Thereby, in a situation where expectations for a jackpot are to be improved, by simultaneously executing other preview effects, it is possible to further improve expectations for a jackpot.
In addition, in the aspect of preventing excessive expectations for a jackpot from increasing, by not simultaneously executing other preview performances, it is possible to maintain prevention of increasing excessive expectations for a jackpot.

That is,
In the variable performance,
Suggestive effects according to the results of the jackpot determination (for example, a provisional stop display of the effect pattern 38 during the "pseudo consecutive 2 fluctuation period", "pseudo consecutive 3 fluctuation period", "normal reach fluctuation period", "SP reach fluctuation period", "full rotation fluctuation period", and "provisional stop display period");
It is possible to execute suggestive notification effects that anticipate the execution of the suggestive effect (for example, a "pseudo consecutive 2 notification period" or a "pseudo consecutive 3 notification period", a dialogue image such as "It's a reach!" in a "dialogue notification effect", a selection of an option in a "roulette notification effect" (for example, selection of "SP" in Figure 56), display of a step-up notification effect image 31p in a "SU notification effect" (for example, display of "SU5 confirmed win, full spins" in Figure 56), display of a "specific image 31e").
Before a predetermined timing (e.g., T12 in (a) of FIG. 52) for announcing the result of the jackpot determination, it is possible to execute a first effect (e.g., a pseudo-consecutive 2 effect) by combining a first suggestive effect (e.g., a "pseudo-consecutive 2 notification period") with a first suggestive effect (e.g., a "pseudo-consecutive 2 execution period"), and a second effect (e.g., a pseudo-consecutive 3 effect) by combining a second suggestive effect (e.g., a "pseudo-consecutive 3 notification period") with a second suggestive effect (e.g., a "pseudo-consecutive 3 execution period").
After a predetermined timing (e.g., T12 in (a) of Figure 52) at which the result of the jackpot determination is announced, a third effect (e.g., a background switching effect and a temporary stop display effect) can be executed by combining a third suggestion notification effect (e.g., display of a specific image 31e) and a third suggestion effect (e.g., temporary stop display of the effect pattern 38 during the ``temporary stop display period'').
The ratio of the first and third effects being executed is different from the ratio of the first, second and third effects being executed (for example, in FIG. 53, in the case of variable performance patterns 3, 9, 14 and 15 where a pseudo consecutive hit occurs once (pseudo consecutive hit 2 effects), a pseudo consecutive hit is executed but the specific image 31e may not be displayed, as in variable performance pattern 3, but in the case of variable performance patterns 10 to 12 and 16 to 18 where a pseudo consecutive hit occurs twice (pseudo consecutive hit 3 effects), the specific image 31e is displayed in both variable performance patterns, so that when the first and second effects are executed, the third effect is executed at a higher rate than when only the first effect is executed).
It has the following features:
This allows the player to clearly recognize that the reach performance has ended in a miss even if the performance content becomes complicated by the execution of an SP reach or the like.

That is,
In the variable performance,
Suggestive effects according to the result of the jackpot judgment (for example, "Pseudo consecutive 2 fluctuation period", "Pseudo consecutive 3 fluctuation period", "Normal reach fluctuation period", "SP reach fluctuation period", "Full rotation fluctuation period", "Temporary reach fluctuation period") Temporary stop display of the production pattern 38 during the "stop display period"),
Suggestive notification effects that make you anticipate that the relevant suggestion effect will be executed (for example, ``Pseudo-Run 2 notification period'', ``Pseudo-Run 3 notification period'', the line image ``Reach!'' in ``Speech preview performance'', ``Roulette Selecting an option in "Preview Performance" (for example, selecting "SP" in FIG. 56), displaying the step-up preview performance image 31p in "SU Preview Performance" (for example, displaying "Probable SU5 Full Rotation" in FIG. 56), display of the “specific image 31e”).
Before the predetermined timing (for example, T12 in FIG. 52 (a)) to notify the result of the jackpot determination → the first suggestion notification effect (for example, "pseudo series 2 notification period", "pseudo series 3 notification period") and It is possible to perform a first effect (for example, a pseudo-sequence 2 effect, a pseudo-sequence 3 effect) in combination with a first suggestive effect (for example, "pseudo-sequence 2 execution period", "pseudo-sequence 3 execution period").
After the predetermined timing (for example, T12 in FIG. 52 (a)) to notify the result of the jackpot determination → second suggestion notification effect (for example, display of specific image 31e) and second suggestion effect (for example, background switching effect) It is possible to perform a second effect (for example, a background switching effect and a temporary stop display effect) in combination with the second effect (for example, a background switching effect and a temporary stop display effect).
The ratio of executing the first performance and the second performance when the result of the jackpot determination is a loss is different from the ratio of executing the first performance and the second performance when the result of the jackpot determination is a jackpot (for example, , FIG. 53, variable performance patterns 7 to 18 are variable performance patterns that display a specific image 31e when there is a loss, and variable performance pattern 30 is a variable performance pattern that displays a specific image 31e when there is a jackpot. Therefore, the specific image 31e is more likely to be displayed in the case of a loss than in the case of a jackpot).
It has such characteristics.
This makes it easier for players to recognize that the display of the "specific image" = the result of the jackpot determination was a loss, and the display of the "specific image" makes it easier for the player to recognize that the reach effect has ended in a loss. It can be made easier.

That is,
In the variable performance,
Suggestive effects according to the result of the jackpot judgment (for example, "Pseudo consecutive 2 fluctuation period", "Pseudo consecutive 3 fluctuation period", "Normal reach fluctuation period", "SP reach fluctuation period", "Full rotation fluctuation period", "Temporary reach fluctuation period") Temporary stop display of the production pattern 38 during the stop display period);
Suggestive notification performances that make you anticipate that the relevant suggestion performance will be executed (for example, "Pseudo-Run 2 notification period", "Pseudo-Run 3 notification period", the line image "Reach!" in the "Speech preview performance", "Roulette") Selecting an option in "Preview Performance" (for example, selecting "SP" in FIG. 56), displaying the step-up preview performance image 31p in "SU Preview Performance" (for example, displaying "Probable SU5 Full Rotation" in FIG. 56), display of the “specific image 31e”).
Before the predetermined timing (for example, T12 in (a) of FIG. 52) to notify the result of the jackpot determination → the first suggestion notification performance (for example, "Pseudo consecutive 2 notification period") and the first suggestion performance (for example, " It is possible to execute a performance (for example, a pseudo-sequence 2 performance) consisting of a "pseudo-sequence 2 variable period").
After the predetermined timing (for example, T12 in FIG. 52 (a)) to notify the result of the jackpot determination → second suggestion notification effect (for example, display of specific image 31e) and second suggestion effect (for example, "Temporary stop") It is possible to perform a performance (for example, a background switching performance and a temporary stop display performance) (temporary stop display of the performance pattern 38 during the "display period").
Also, the execution times of the above effects are different.
It has such characteristics.
Thereby, for example, in the "first suggestion notification performance" to "first suggestion performance" that are performed before the timing of notifying the result of the jackpot determination, it is possible to maintain expectations for the jackpot.
On the other hand, for example, in the "second suggestion notification performance" to "second suggestion performance" that are performed after the timing of notifying the result of the jackpot determination, it is possible to prevent excessive expectations for the jackpot from increasing. can.

Next, the fourth characteristic portion related to the specific image will be explained using FIGS. 58 to 61.
Note that in Figures 58 to 61, there are some things that are omitted because they mainly refer to the pattern stimulation effect, but the contents described in Figures 42 to 46 and those described in Figures 47 to 51 are omitted. The contents described above and the contents described in FIGS. 52 to 57 can be used in appropriate combinations.

Figure 58(a) is a table showing the distribution of effect patterns 38 (when a normal reach is missed), and this table is stored, for example, in the sub-ROM 120b. For example, based on the received effect pattern designation command and variation pattern designation command, if the stop special pattern data indicated by the effect pattern designation command is "00" and the variation pattern indicated by the variation pattern designation command is "variation pattern 4", the sub-CPU 120a refers to the table for when a normal reach is missed shown in Figure 58(a) to determine which effect pattern 38 will be used to perform the reach performance and result in a miss.

As shown in FIG. 58(a), the allocation ratio for the "1 symbol" is "10%", the allocation ratio for the "2 symbol" is "20%", the allocation ratio for the "3 symbol" is "5%", the allocation ratio for the "4 symbol" is "15%", the allocation ratio for the "5 symbol" is "10%", the allocation ratio for the "6 symbol" is "15%", the allocation ratio for the "7 symbol" is not selected, the allocation ratio for the "8 symbol" is "15%", and the allocation ratio for the "9 symbol" is "10%".

FIG. 58(b) is a table showing the distribution of the performance symbols 38 (when SP reach or higher is lost), and the table is stored in, for example, the sub ROM 120b. For example, the sub CPU 120a determines that the stop special symbol data indicated by the effect pattern designation command is "00" and the variation pattern indicated by the variation pattern designation command is "00" based on the received effect pattern designation command and variation pattern specification command. If it is one of the "variation patterns 5 to 10", refer to the table shown in FIG. 58(b) for SP reach or higher loss, and determine which effect pattern 38 should be used to perform the reach effect and make it a loss. decide.

As shown in Figure 58(b), the distribution ratio for "1 symbol" is "10%", the distribution ratio for "2 symbols" is "15%", and the distribution ratio for "3 symbols" is "10%". The distribution ratio for ``Design'' is ``9%'', the distribution rate for ``4 symbols'' is ``15%'', and the distribution rate for ``5 symbols'' is ``10%''. The distribution ratio for "6 symbols" is "15%", the distribution ratio for "7 symbols" is "1%", and the "8 symbols" has a distribution percentage of "15%". The allocation ratio is "15%", and the allocation ratio for "9 symbols" is "10%".

For example, if you miss, a normal reach with the "7" symbol will not be executed, but there is room for an SP reach or higher with the "7" symbol to be executed, so when a reach state is reached with the "7" symbol, an SP reach or higher will always be executed.
In addition, if there is a miss after reaching SP reach or above, a "specific image" will be displayed, as shown in Figure 33. Therefore, when the reach state is reached with the "7 symbol", SP reach or above will always occur, and a specific image will always be displayed.

On the other hand, for example, if you miss and reach a "6" symbol, there is a possibility of either a "normal reach" or an "SP or higher reach." In other words, in the case of a "6" symbol, it may end in a "normal reach" and the "specific image" may not be displayed, or it may be that an "SP or higher reach" is executed and the "specific image" is displayed.

In other words, in the case of a loss, when it becomes a reach state with "6 symbols" and when it becomes a reach state with "7 symbols", the "7 symbols" always involve the display of a "specific image". , "specific images" tend to be more likely to be displayed.
Note that the distribution in FIG. 58 can be changed as appropriate according to the trend. For example, "7 symbols" may be selected when the normal reach is lost.

Here, in order to facilitate understanding of Figure 58, a supplementary explanation will be given using the animation in Figure 59 regarding the display mode when (a) a reach state is reached with the "6 symbol" and when (b) a reach state is reached with the "7 symbol."
FIG. 59 illustrates only the image display device 31, and the display elements of the image display device 31 are the same as those described in FIG. 43 and so on, so that the description thereof will be omitted.
Also, in FIG. 59, the temporary stop display is omitted.

(a) is when the "6" symbol is reached, in which case there are two cases: a normal reach miss (no specific image 31e displayed) as shown in (N1), and an SP reach or higher miss as shown in (SP1-1). If the SP reach or higher miss is reached, the specific image 31e is displayed as shown in (SP1-2).

(b) is a case where the player is in a reach state with "7 symbols", and in this case, there is only a case where the player loses more than SP reach. That is, as shown in (SP1-2), there are only cases where the specific image 31e is displayed.
Therefore, in the case of a loss, when it becomes a reach state with "6 symbols" and when it becomes a reach state with "7 symbols," the "7 symbols" always involve the display of a "specific image." , "specific images" tend to be more likely to be displayed.

FIG. 60(a) is a table showing the distribution of the performance symbols 38 when the symbol is successfully incited, and the table is stored in, for example, the sub-ROM 120b. For example, the sub CPU 120a determines one of "variable performance pattern 8", "variable performance pattern 20", and "variable performance pattern 27" (a variable performance pattern whose performance structure includes a symbol inciting success) as the variable performance pattern. In this case, with reference to the table shown in FIG. 60(a) showing the distribution of the production symbols 38 when the symbol promotion is successful, it is determined which production symbol 38 should be used to perform the symbol promotion and reach the reach state. .

As shown in FIG. 60(a), the allocation ratio for the "1 symbol" is "12%", the allocation ratio for the "2 symbol" is "12%", the allocation ratio for the "3 symbol" is "12%", the allocation ratio for the "4 symbol" is "12%", the allocation ratio for the "5 symbol" is "12%", the allocation ratio for the "6 symbol" is "12%", the allocation ratio for the "7 symbol" is "4%", the allocation ratio for the "8 symbol" is "12%", and the allocation ratio for the "9 symbol" is "12%".

FIG. 60(b) is a table showing the distribution of the performance symbols 38 when the symbol invocation fails, and the table is stored in, for example, the sub-ROM 120b. For example, when the sub CPU 120a determines "variable performance pattern 2" (a variable performance pattern whose performance configuration includes a symbol inciting failure) as the fluctuating performance pattern, the sub CPU 120a determines the performance symbol when the symbol inciting fails as shown in FIG. 60(b). With reference to a table showing the distribution of 38, it is determined which production pattern 38 is to be used to stimulate the pattern.

As shown in Figure 60(b), the distribution ratio for "1 symbol" is "10%", the distribution ratio for "2 symbols" is "10%", and the distribution ratio is "3". The distribution ratio for "Symbols" is "10%", the distribution ratio for "4 symbols" is "10%", and the distribution ratio for "5 symbols" is "10%". The distribution ratio for "6 symbols" is "10%", the distribution ratio for "7 symbols" is "20%", and the "8 symbols" has a distribution percentage of "10%". The distribution ratio is "10%", and the distribution ratio for "9 symbols" is "10%".

That is, the "7 symbol" tends to be more likely to fail and less likely to succeed than other symbols. For example, the "6 symbol" is more likely to be successful than the "7 symbol", and therefore more likely to form a reach state when the symbol is played.
In addition, the variable presentation pattern in which the symbol is successfully raised when a miss occurs is "variable presentation pattern 8", and this "variable presentation pattern 8" is a variable presentation pattern that accompanies the display of a specific image.
Therefore, when a symbol-raising effect using the "6 symbol" occurs, there is a higher possibility that "variable performance pattern 8" is being executed, and a specific image is more likely to be displayed, compared to when a symbol-raising effect using the "7 symbol" occurs.
In addition, the distribution of Fig. 60 can be changed as appropriate as long as it conforms to the tendency. For example, the "7 symbol" may be selected equally with the other symbols, or the "7 symbol" may be made easier to select than the other symbols when the symbol tilt is successful, and harder to select than the other symbols when the symbol tilt is unsuccessful.
In addition, the "odd number symbols" may be made easier to select than the "even number symbols" when the symbol tilt is successful, and may be made harder to select than the "even number symbols" when the symbol tilt is unsuccessful. In addition, the "even number symbols" and the "odd number symbols" may have an inverse relationship.

Here, in order to facilitate understanding of FIG. 60, a supplementary explanation will be given with reference to FIG. 61 of a display example of a failed pattern tilt using the "7" symbol and a display example of a successful pattern tilt using the "7" symbol.
FIG. 61 illustrates only the image display device 31, and each display element of the image display device 31 is the same as that described with reference to FIG. 43 etc., so a description thereof will be omitted.
Also, in FIG. 61, the temporary stop display is omitted.

In the case of a failed symbol tease, in (a), the "7 symbol" is displayed as a temporary stop as the left performance symbol 38a, and the "7 symbol" slowly descends from the top of the screen toward the temporary stop display position as the right performance symbol 38c, teasing whether or not it will stop at the temporary stop display position. At this time, the sound output device 32 also outputs the sound effect "Gogogo♪" teasing whether or not the "7 symbol" of the right performance symbol 38c will stop at the temporary stop display position.

Then, in (b), the sound effect changes (changes to the sound effect "Gowan♪") to further incite whether or not the "7 pattern" of the right presentation pattern 38c will stop at the temporary stop display position. Furthermore, as described in FIG. 58, the "7 symbol" is more difficult to be selected in the event of a loss than the SP reach, so when the "7 symbol" reaches the reach state, the expectation level for a jackpot is considerably improved. Therefore, when a symbol is positioned in this way, the symbol inciting performance is an effective performance in improving the game's interest.

In (c), a sound effect such as "Swoosh" is output from the audio output device 32, and at the same time, the "7 symbol" of the right performance symbol 38c is displayed moving downward on the screen. In other words, it indicates that the same symbol as the "7 symbol" as the left performance symbol 38a was not temporarily displayed as the right performance symbol 38c at the temporary stop display position, i.e., the symbol tilting has failed.

In (d), the "8 symbol" is temporarily stopped and displayed as the right effect symbol 38c, indicating that the ready-to-win state has not been reached.

Next, in the case of a successful symbol inciting, (a) and (b) are the same as in the case of a unsuccessful symbol inciting, but in (c), a sound effect such as "Kakeen♪" is output from the audio output device 32, and at the same time, This shows that the "7 symbol" of the right performance symbol 38c has been temporarily stopped and displayed at the temporary stop display position, that is, the symbol has been successfully stimulated. Then, in (d), the "7 symbol" is temporarily stopped and displayed as the right effect symbol 38c, indicating that the player is in a ready-to-reach state.

Note that the game state in which FIGS. 58 to 61 are executed does not matter. For example, it may be applied to all gaming states or to some gaming states.

(Summary of Figures 58 to 61)
That is, FIGS. 58 to 61 have the following features.

That is,
If the result of the jackpot determination is a miss (for example, step S311-1 of the jackpot determination process is negative),
The reach effect (variable presentation pattern) using a first specific symbol (e.g., 6-symbol presentation pattern 38) accompanied by the display of specific image 31e and the reach effect (variable presentation pattern) using a second specific symbol (e.g., 6-symbol presentation pattern 38) accompanied by the display of specific image 31e each have a different execution rate (for example, if the jackpot determination process is a miss, the 6 symbol is selected even in a normal reach, so the specific image 31e may not be displayed, but the 7 symbol is selected only when there is an SP reach or higher, so the specific image 31e is displayed. Therefore, the rate at which the specific image 31e is displayed differs between when a reach is reached with a 6 symbol and when a reach is reached with a 7 symbol).
It has the following features:
This makes it possible to increase interest in the game since the ratio at which a specific image is displayed varies depending on the design (performance design 38).

That is,
A first specific pattern (for example, the pattern 38 of 6 patterns) is used to execute a first suggestion effect (for example, a pattern teasing effect that teases whether or not to execute a reach effect using the 6 patterns) of whether or not to execute a reach effect.
There are cases where a second specific pattern (e.g., a seven-pattern performance pattern 38) is used to execute a second suggestion performance as to whether or not a reach performance will occur (e.g., a pattern teasing performance that teases whether or not a reach will occur using the seven pattern).
The execution rate of a variable performance (variable performance pattern) in which a first suggestive performance accompanied by the display of specific image 31e is executed and then a reach performance is different from that of a variable performance (variable performance pattern) in which a second suggestive performance accompanied by the display of specific image 31e is executed and then a reach performance is executed (for example, the pattern provoking performance is more likely to succeed with 6 symbols than with 7 symbols, and the pattern provoking performance is more likely to fail with 7 symbols than with 6 symbols. Therefore, the pattern 6 symbols are more likely to become a reach than the pattern 7 symbols, and since they are more likely to become a reach, the specific image 31e is more likely to be displayed, and the rate at which the specific image 31e is displayed is different between the pattern provoking performance that prompts the player as to whether or not to reach with the pattern 6 symbols and the pattern provoking performance that prompts the player as to whether or not to reach with the pattern 7 symbols).
It has the following features:
This makes it possible to increase interest in the game since the ratio at which a specific image is displayed varies depending on the symbol.

Next, a fifth characteristic feature related to a specific image will be described with reference to FIGS.
In addition, since Figures 62 to 67 mainly refer to operation promotion images, some descriptions have been omitted, but the contents described in Figures 42 to 46, the contents described in Figures 47 to 51, the contents described in Figures 52 to 57, and the contents described in Figures 58 to 61 can be used in appropriate combination.

FIG. 62 shows a display example of the operation promotion image in this embodiment.
FIG. 62 shows only the image display device 31 extracted and described, and since each display element of the image display device 31 is the same as described in FIG. 43 and the like, description thereof will be omitted.

The "first operation prompting image" refers to an operation prompting image corresponding to a state in which the effect button 35 is not protruding, as shown by 31q. Therefore, an image showing that the effect button 35 is not protruding upward is also displayed in the operation prompting image.
The "second operation prompting image" refers to an operation prompting image corresponding to a state in which the effect button 35 is in a protruding state, as shown by 31r. Therefore, the operation prompting image also displays an image showing the state in which the effect button 35 is protruding upward.

Note that (a) to (e) show the flow from the display of the operation prompting image to the confirmation stop display, and in particular, (c) shows that the specific image 31e is displayed.
In other words, the specific image 31e can be displayed both in the changing presentation in which the first operation prompting image 31q is displayed and in the changing presentation in which the second operation prompting image 31r is displayed, and the common specific image 31e is displayed.
As a result, just because the second operation prompting image 31r is displayed in a variable performance does not mean that a special specific image 31e is displayed, and even in the variable performance in which the second operation prompting image 31r is displayed, it can be clearly recognized that the reach performance has ended in a miss.
In addition, it is no longer necessary to prepare separate specific images 31e for the first operation prompting image 31q and the second operation prompting image 31r, which leads to a reduction in the area used in the CGROM 156.

In addition, in Figure 62, as examples of the "first operation promotion image" and the "second operation promotion image", an image in which the effect button 35 is in a non-protruding state and an image in which the effect button 35 is in a protruding state are used, but any form may be used as long as the degree of expectation of a jackpot differs between the "first operation promotion image" and the "second operation promotion image".
For example, in the case of a gaming machine in which the effect button 35 does not protrude, an image of the effect button 35 in a non-protruding state and in a normal color (e.g., blue) may be used as the "first operation promotion image," and an image of the effect button 35 in a non-protruding state and in a color different from the normal color (e.g., red) may be used as the "second operation promotion image."
In addition, in the case of a gaming machine that has another operating means (the above-mentioned performance lever) in addition to the performance button 35, the image corresponding to the performance button 35 may be used as the "first operation promotion image," and the image corresponding to the other operating means (the above-mentioned performance lever) may be used as the "second operation promotion image."

Next, with reference to FIG. 63, displayable operation promotion images and executable timings for each variable effect pattern in the event of a loss will be explained.
Note that the word "determined" in the corresponding performance corresponds to the notification period (for example, in FIG. 42, from (c) T4 to (c) T5) for notifying the result of the jackpot determination.
That is, during the notification period for notifying the result of the jackpot determination, the result of the jackpot determination can be notified by having the player operate the performance button 35 (if not operated, after a predetermined period of time has elapsed).
Note that in the following, "decision" may be referred to as "decision performance."
In addition, the "decision performance" is one in which the player operates the performance button 35 (if the player does not operate it, after a predetermined period of time has elapsed) and the result of the jackpot determination is notified, and the other in which the player operates the performance button 35. It may be possible to implement both the system and the system that notifies the result of the jackpot determination, or it may be possible to perform only one of them.

For example, in the case of variation effect pattern 1, the first operation promotion image is defined as the displayable (executable) operation promotion image, and the start of variation is defined as the executable timing. Furthermore, a dialogue preview performance is defined as a corresponding performance.
That is, in the case of the variation performance pattern 1, the first operation promotion image is displayed at the start of the variation, and when the performance button 35 is operated, the dialogue preview performance is executed.

For example, in the case of the variation performance pattern 7, the first operation prompt image is defined as the displayable (executable) operation prompt image, and the execution possible timing is defined as the time of variation start and the time of SP reach. Furthermore, the corresponding performance is defined as the dialogue notice performance and the deciding performance.
In other words, in the case of variation presentation pattern 7, when the variation starts, the first operation prompting image is displayed, and when presentation button 35 is operated, a dialogue preview presentation is executed, and when the decision presentation is performed, the first operation prompting image is displayed again, and when presentation button 35 is operated, the result of the jackpot determination is announced.

For example, in the case of variation effect pattern 12, a first operation promotion image and a second operation promotion image are defined as displayable (executable) operation promotion images, and executable timings include the start of variation and SP reach. The time is stipulated. Furthermore, a dialogue preview performance and a final performance are defined as corresponding performances.
That is, in the case of the variation performance pattern 12, the first operation promotion image is displayed at the start of the variation, the dialogue preview performance is executed when the performance button 35 is operated, and the second operation promotion image is displayed at the time of the final performance. This indicates that if the player operates the performance button 35, the result of the jackpot determination will be notified.

For example, in the case of variation effect pattern 16, the first operation promotion image is defined as the displayable (executable) operation promotion image, and the executable timings include the start of variation, SP reach, and SPSP reach. stipulated. Furthermore, a dialogue preview performance and a final performance are defined as corresponding performances.
That is, in the case of the variable performance pattern 16, the first operation promotion image is displayed at the start of the fluctuation, and if the performance button 35 is operated, the dialogue preview performance is executed, and at the time of the final performance at SP reach, the first operation promotion image is displayed again. When the 1-operation promotion image is displayed and you operate the performance button 35, you will be notified of the result of the jackpot judgment (in this case, a draw performance will occur and it will develop into SPSP reach), and at the time of the decisive performance at SPSP reach, you will be notified of the result of the jackpot judgment. , the first operation promotion image is displayed, indicating that if the effect button 35 is operated, the result of the jackpot determination will be notified.

For example, in the variation production pattern 18, a first operation promotion image and a second operation promotion image are defined as displayable (executable) operation promotion images, and executable timings include the start of variation and the SPSP reach. The time is stipulated. Furthermore, a dialogue preview performance and a final performance are defined as corresponding performances.
That is, in the case of the variation production pattern 18, the first operation promotion image is displayed at the start of variation, and when the production button 35 is operated, the dialogue preview production is executed, and at the time of the final production at SPSP reach, the second operation is displayed. The promotion image is displayed, and if the effect button 35 is operated, the result of the jackpot determination will be notified.
Note that the same applies to other variable effect patterns, so a detailed explanation will be omitted. Further, the corresponding performance is not limited to the dialogue preview performance or the final performance, but other performances may be applied as long as the performance involves operation of the performance button 35.

In other words, the losing variation presentation patterns include a variation presentation pattern involving the display of the first operation prompting image during the variation presentation, a variation presentation pattern involving the display of the first operation prompting image multiple times, and a variation presentation pattern involving the display of the first operation prompting image and the second operation prompting image.
Furthermore, while the change performance (change performance patterns 1-3, 5-18) that accompany the display of the first operation prompting image at least once during the change performance include change performance patterns that accompany the display of a specific image (change performance patterns 7-18) and change performance patterns that do not accompany the display of a specific image (change performance patterns 1-3, 5, 6), the change performance (change performance patterns 12, 18) that accompany the display of the second operation prompting image during the change performance includes only change performance patterns that accompany the display of a specific image (change performance patterns 12, 18). In other words, when the second operation prompting image is displayed during the change performance, there is no such thing as the specific image not being displayed.
As a result, even if a miss is notified with the display of the second operation prompting image, the specific image is displayed, allowing the player to clearly recognize that the reach performance has ended in a miss.

Next, using FIG. 64, the correspondence relationship between the first operation promotion image and the second operation promotion image for SP reach or higher (at the time of loss) will be explained.
FIG. 64(a) is an excerpt of the fluctuation performance patterns (variation performance patterns 7 to 18) of losses that are greater than or equal to the SP reach of losses.
That is, all of the variable effect patterns are variable effect patterns that involve displaying a specific image.

(a) shows the correspondence between the first operation promotion image and the second operation promotion image for SP reach or higher (at the time of loss), and shows the relationship with the operation promotion image displayed in the final performance in each variable performance pattern. It shows.
That is, in the first operation promotion image, variable effect patterns 7 to 11 and 13 to 17 are defined, whereas in the second operation promotion image, variable effect patterns 12 and 18 are defined. In addition, the variable performance pattern 12 has a distribution ratio of "10%" when the fluctuation pattern 7 is determined, and the fluctuation performance pattern 18 has a distribution ratio of "10%" when the fluctuation pattern 10 is determined. ”, it can be said that this is a variable performance pattern that is difficult to select.

(b) shows a comparison of the appearance rates of the first operation promotion image and the second operation promotion image of SP reach or higher (loss); for example, the operation promotion image displayed in the decisive performance is the first operation promotion image In the variable effect pattern, the overall distribution is "580/600", whereas in the variable effect pattern in which the operation promotion image displayed in the fixed effect is the second operation promotion image, the overall distribution is "580/600". is "20/600". That is, the appearance rate when SP reach or higher misses is "29/30" for the first operation promotion image and "1/30" for the second operation promotion image. In other words, when SP reach or more is lost, the first operation promotion image is more likely to be displayed than the second operation promotion image in the deciding performance.
That is, it can be said that it is less likely to appear when the second operation promotion image is displayed and the specific image is displayed than when the first operation promotion image is displayed and the specific image is displayed.
Note that the specific image may be less likely to appear when the first operation promotion image is displayed and the specific image is displayed than when the second operation promotion image is displayed and the specific image is displayed.

Furthermore, in the case of SP reach or above, the first operation prompting image is more likely to notify a miss than the second operation prompting image in the deciding performance, in other words, the second operation prompting image is more likely to notify a jackpot than the first operation prompting image in the deciding performance.
That is, the first operation prompting image indicates a relatively "low" probability of a big win, and the second operation prompting image indicates a relatively "high" probability of a big win.
Therefore, it can be said that a variable presentation pattern accompanied by the display of a specific image is more likely to appear when the first operation prompting image is displayed and less likely to appear when the second operation prompting image is displayed.
Furthermore, in the case of a miss of SP reach or above, the possibility of a miss is higher when the first operation prompting image is displayed than when the second operation prompting image is displayed, so it can be said that the specific image is more likely to be displayed when the first operation prompting image is displayed than when the second operation prompting image is displayed.
Note that the specific image may be more likely to be displayed when the second operation prompting image is displayed than when the first operation prompting image is displayed.

Next, a comparison between a high probability game state and a low probability game state will be explained using FIG. 65. FIG. 65(a) is a diagram showing the percentage of misses and big wins when the first operation prompt image or the second operation prompt image is displayed in the deciding performance in SP reach or higher, and FIG. 65(b) is a diagram showing the percentage of misses and big wins when the second operation prompt image is displayed in the deciding performance in SP reach or higher.

(a) is a comparison between a high-probability game state and a low-probability game state. In the high-probability game state, if SP reach or higher is reached, the first operation promotion image or the second operation promotion image is displayed in the decisive effect. The rate of losing is 10/100, and the rate of winning is 90/100. On the other hand, in a low-probability gaming state, if SP reach or higher is reached, the ratio of losing when the first operation promotion image or second operation promotion image is displayed in the decisive performance is "70/100", and the ratio of winning the jackpot. is "30/100".
In other words, in the high-probability gaming state, if you reach the final performance with SP reach or higher (if any operation promotion image is displayed in the final performance), you are more likely to hit the jackpot, and in the low-probability gaming state, you are more likely to hit the SP If you reach a winning performance with a reach or higher (if any of the operation promotion images are displayed in the winning performance), you tend to lose.
In other words, it is easier to lose when an operation promotion image is displayed in a decision performance in a low probability game state than when an operation promotion image is displayed in a decision performance in a high probability game state, so the specific image is displayed more easily. It can be said that it is easy.

Note that the selection ratio shown in FIG. 65(a) is only an example and can be changed arbitrarily. For example, in a high probability gaming state, if the game is a loss, the selection ratio may be set to "50/100", and in a high probability gaming state, if it is a jackpot, the selection ratio may be set to "50/100".
Further, for example, in a high probability gaming state, if the game is a loss, the selection ratio may be set to "70/100", and in a high probability gaming state, if it is a jackpot, the selection ratio may be set to "30/100".
Further, for example, in the low probability gaming state, if the game is a loss, the selection ratio may be set to "50/100", and in the low probability gaming state, if it is a jackpot, the selection ratio may be set to "50/100".
Further, for example, in the low probability gaming state, if the game is a loss, the selection ratio may be set to "70/100", and in the low probability gaming state, if it is a jackpot, the selection ratio may be set to "30/100".

(b) is a comparison when the operation prompting image displayed in the deciding effect is the second operation prompting image, and in a high probability game state, when the SP reach is reached or higher, the probability of the second operation prompting image being displayed in the deciding effect resulting in a miss is "1/100", and the probability of a jackpot is "99/100". On the other hand, in a low probability game state, when the SP reach is reached or higher, the probability of the second operation prompting image being displayed in the deciding effect resulting in a miss is "20/100", and the probability of a jackpot is "80/100".
In other words, in either game state, if the second operation prompting image is displayed in the deciding effect, there is a tendency for a jackpot to be announced; however, in a high probability game state, if the deciding effect is reached after the SP reach or above (when the second operation prompting image is displayed in the deciding effect), a jackpot is more likely to be announced, whereas in a low probability game state, if the deciding effect is reached after the SP reach or above (when the second operation prompting image is displayed in the deciding effect), a miss is more likely to be announced compared to the high probability game state.
In other words, it can be said that when the second operation promotion image is displayed in a deciding performance in a low probability game state, the specific image is more likely to be displayed because it is more likely to miss than when the second operation promotion image is displayed in a deciding performance in a high probability game state.

The selection ratio shown in Fig. 65(b) is merely an example and can be changed arbitrarily. For example, in a high probability game state, if there is a loss, the selection ratio may be "30/100", and in a high probability game state, if there is a big win, the selection ratio may be "70/100", or in a high probability game state, if there is a loss, the selection ratio may be "50/100", and in a high probability game state, if there is a big win, the selection ratio may be "50/100".
Also, for example, in a low probability game state, if there is a miss, the selection ratio may be "40/100", and in a low probability game state, if there is a jackpot, the selection ratio may be "60/100". Alternatively, in a low probability game state, if there is a miss, the selection ratio may be "50/100", and in a low probability game state, if there is a jackpot, the selection ratio may be "50/100".

Next, using Figures 66, 67, and 75, the number of vibrations of the performance button and the execution timing for each variable performance pattern will be explained.
In Fig. 66, "start" indicates the start of the variable performance, that is, the performance button 35 vibrates at the start of the variable performance. Also, "decision" indicates a decisive performance of SP reach or more, and indicates that the performance button 35 vibrates after the decisive performance, for example, at timing T0 shown in Fig. 67.
In addition, Figure 66 shows an excerpt of a variable presentation pattern that involves operating the presentation button 35 in a deciding presentation of SP reach or above.

As shown in FIG. 66, the number of vibrations of the performance button is such that in the case of a loss, vibration is possible for "start", but vibration for "decision" is disabled. Specifically, in the variable performance patterns 12, 16 to 18, the performance button 35 vibrates at "start", and the performance button 35 does not vibrate at "decision". For other losing variable performance patterns, the performance button 35 does not vibrate for both "start" and "decision".
On the other hand, in the case of a jackpot, both the "start" vibration and the "clinch" vibration are possible. Specifically, in the variable performance patterns 19 to 24, 26, 27, and 30, the performance button 35 does not vibrate in "start", but the performance button 35 vibrates in "decision". Further, in the variable performance patterns 25, 28, 29, and 31, the performance button 35 vibrates both in "start" and "decision".
Therefore, in the case of a loss, the performance button 35 can vibrate "0" times or "1" time in the 1st variable performance, and in the case of a jackpot, the performance button 35 can vibrate "1" in the 1st variable performance. It is possible to vibrate twice or twice.
In other words, when the number of vibrations of the production button 35 is large (jackpot = 1 or 2 times), the specific image is less likely to be displayed (loss is more likely to occur) than when it is small (loss = 0 or 1). (easily displayed).

In addition, in FIG. 66, the vibration frequency of the performance button is simply shown, and the vibration frequency can be changed as appropriate as long as it conforms to the above-mentioned tendency. For example, there may be more points to vibrate in one variation performance. For example, it may be vibrated in the middle of the variation performance (for example, when transitioning to SP Reach).
A specific example is shown in Fig. 75. In Fig. 75, "midway" refers to the middle of the variable performance (for example, when transitioning to SP reach) as described above.
As shown in Figure 75, in terms of the "number of times" of vibration, in the case of a jackpot, it is configured to vibrate at least once at "decisive", and since it also has a variable presentation pattern that vibrates at all of "start", "midway", and "decisive", similarly to Figure 66, the presentation button 35 is more likely to vibrate compared to in the case of a miss.
Therefore, as in Figure 66, when the number of vibrations of the effect button 35 is high (jackpot = 1 to 3 times), it tends to be harder for a specific image to be displayed (misses are more likely to be displayed) than when the number of vibrations is low (miss = 0 to 2 times).
On the other hand, in the example of Figure 75, depending on the variation presentation pattern, the number of vibrations may be greater in the case of a miss than in the case of a jackpot.
For example, the variable presentation patterns 15, 17, and 18 for misses vibrate at "start" and "during", respectively, so the number of vibrations is two. In contrast, the variable presentation patterns 19, 20, and 21 for big wins vibrate only at "decision", so the number of vibrations is one. Therefore, there may be cases where a specific image is more likely to be displayed when the presentation button 35 vibrates more (miss = two times) than when it vibrates less (big win = one time).
In other words, if it vibrates at the "decision" time, it will be a jackpot, so the expectation of a jackpot is "decision">"start" ≒ "halfway through," and from the perspective of the "timing" of the vibration,
(a) When the vibration is "decide" (the number of vibrations is 1), for example, "variable performance pattern 19"
(B) When the vibration occurs other than "decision" (vibration count is 2 times), for example, "variable performance pattern 18"
Even if the number of vibrations in the above (b) exceeds that in the above (a), the specific image is more likely to be displayed in the above (b).
In this way, the relationship between the number of vibrations and the display ratio of a specific image may change depending on whether you look at the "number of vibrations" as in Figure 66 or the "timing" of vibration as in Figure 75.

FIG. 67 is a time chart 7 showing the timing of vibrating the effect button 35.
An example in which the effect button 35 does not vibrate will be described using (a) variable effect pattern 7, and an example in which the effect button 35 vibrates (b) using variable effect pattern 21.

(a) is a variation effect pattern 7, in which, for example, an operation prompting image shown in FIG. 62 is displayed (a button image + "Push!" is displayed) just before the timing of notifying the result of the jackpot determination at timing T0. Note that the effect of displaying a button image + "Push!" just before the timing of notifying the result of the jackpot determination at timing T0 is the "decisive effect" described above.
Then, at timing T0, it is announced that the result of the big win determination is a miss.

Then, from timing T1 to timing T2, a specific image is displayed for 2S, after which it transitions to a "provisional stop display period" and then a "confirmed stop display period", but the effect button 35 does not vibrate until timing T4.
In other words, in a losing variable presentation pattern, the presentation button 35 does not vibrate.

(b) is a variable presentation pattern 21, in which, for example, an operation prompting image as shown in FIG. 62 is displayed (a button image + Press! is displayed) immediately before the result of the jackpot determination at timing T0 is announced.
Then, at timing T0, the result of the jackpot determination is announced as a jackpot.
Then, at timing T0, a big win is announced, and the effect button 35 vibrates until timing T3.
This can further boost the excitement of the player who has already won the jackpot.
The specific image will not be displayed until timing T3.
That is, in the variable presentation pattern for a jackpot, for example, the presentation button 35 vibrates at timing T0 when the result of the jackpot determination is announced.
In the above example, the explanation is given of a mode in which the effect button 35 is vibrated, but it is not limited to vibration and other modes may be used. For example, the effect button 35 may simply change from a first position to a second position, or the effect button 35 may change from a first light emitting color to a second light emitting color.

Note that the game state in which FIGS. 62 to 67 are executed does not matter. For example, it may be applied to all gaming states or to some gaming states.

In addition, during the revival performance of the variable performance pattern 30, the first operation prompting image or the second operation prompting image may be displayed.
Even if the first operation promotion image or the second operation promotion image may be displayed even after the specific image 31e is displayed in this manner, the first operation promotion image and the second operation promotion image may be distributed such that they are more likely to be displayed before the specific image 31e is displayed than after the specific image 31e is displayed.

(Summary of Figures 62 to 67)
That is, FIGS. 62 to 67 have the following features.

That is,
There is a first operation promotion effect (e.g., the first operation promotion image in FIG. 62) that displays a first operation promotion image, and a second operation promotion effect (e.g., the second operation promotion image in FIG. 62) that displays a second operation promotion image that has a higher expectation of a special game being executed than when the first operation promotion image is executed.
The variable performance (e.g., Figure 64) that executes a first operation promotion performance accompanied by the display of specific image 31e and the variable performance (e.g., Figure 64) that executes a second operation promotion performance accompanied by the display of specific image 31e each have a different execution rate (e.g., the first operation promotion performance is more likely to be executed when a miss occurs, and the second operation promotion performance is less likely to be executed when a miss occurs, and accordingly the execution rates of the variable performances accompanied by the display of specific image 31e also differ).
It has the following features:
As a result, for example, when the first operation prompting image is executed, the specific image is often displayed and it is a miss, whereas when the second operation prompting image is executed, the specific image is often not displayed and it is a jackpot. Therefore, it is possible to understand that the display of the specific image indicates a miss, and the result of the jackpot determination can be guessed from such a display, so that the interest in the game can be improved.

That is,
There is a first operation promotion effect (e.g., the first operation promotion image in FIG. 62) that displays a first operation promotion image, and a second operation promotion effect (e.g., the second operation promotion image in FIG. 62) that displays a second operation promotion image that has a higher expectation of a special game being executed than when the first operation promotion image is executed.
A specific image 31e can be displayed both in a variable performance that executes a first operation promotion performance (e.g., Figures 62 and 63) and in a variable performance that executes a second operation promotion performance (e.g., Figures 62 and 63) (e.g., in a variable performance involving the first operation promotion performance and in a variable performance involving the second operation promotion performance).
It has the following features:
This allows the player to clearly recognize that the reach effect has ended in a miss, regardless of the type of variable effect.
In addition, it is no longer necessary to prepare separate specific images for the first operation prompting image and the second operation prompting image, which leads to a reduction in the area used in the CGROM 156 .

That is,
There is a first operation promotion effect (e.g., the first operation promotion image in FIG. 62) that displays a first operation promotion image, and a second operation promotion effect (e.g., the second operation promotion image in FIG. 62) that displays a second operation promotion image that has a higher expectation of a special game being executed than when the first operation promotion image is executed.
A variable performance accompanied by the first operation prompting performance may or may not display specific image 31e (for example, variable performance pattern 7 is capable of displaying the first operation prompting image and specific image 31e. On the other hand, variable performance pattern 1 is capable of displaying the first operation prompting image, but does not display specific image 31e).
A variable performance accompanied by a second operation prompting performance → a specific image 31e is displayed (for example, variable performance pattern 12 and variable performance pattern 18 are capable of displaying a second operation prompting image and a specific image 31e is capable of being displayed).
It has the following features:
This allows the player to clearly recognize that the reach performance has ended in a miss.

That is,
It is possible to execute a judgment result notification effect (e.g., a decision effect) that notifies the result of the judgment along with the execution of an operation promotion effect (e.g., a first operation promotion effect that displays a first operation promotion image and a second operation promotion effect that displays a second operation promotion image) that prompts the user to operate an operating means (e.g., the effect button 35).
In the normal game state, the rate at which a judgment result notification effect (e.g., a deciding effect) accompanied by the display of the specific image 31e is executed is different from the rate at which a judgment result notification effect (e.g., a deciding effect) accompanied by the display of the specific image 31e is executed in the high-probability game state (for example, the rate at which a jackpot is determined to be in the normal game state (1/300) is different from the rate at which a jackpot is determined to be in the high-probability game state (1/60), and since a missing SP reach or higher is more likely to be executed in the normal game state, the rate at which a deciding effect accompanied by the display of the specific image 31e is executed is also different).
It has the following features:
This allows the frequency of appearance of specific images to change depending on the game state, thereby increasing interest in the game.

That is,
There is a first operation promotion effect (e.g., the first operation promotion image in FIG. 62) that displays a first operation promotion image, and a second operation promotion effect (e.g., the second operation promotion image in FIG. 62) that displays a second operation promotion image that has a higher expectation of a special game being executed than when the first operation promotion image is executed.
If the result of the jackpot judgment is a miss,
The execution ratio of a variable performance that executes a first operation promotion performance accompanied by the display of specific image 31e and a variable performance that executes a second operation promotion performance accompanied by the display of specific image 31e is different from that of a variable performance that executes a second operation promotion performance accompanied by the display of specific image 31e (for example, the display of the first operation promotion image is more likely to result in a miss than the display of the second operation promotion image, and the more likely it is to result in a miss, the more likely it is that specific image 31e is displayed. Therefore, the execution ratio of a variable performance that executes a specific performance using a first operation promotion performance accompanied by the display of specific image 31e and a variable performance that executes a specific performance using a second operation promotion performance accompanied by the display of specific image 31e are different from that of a variable performance).
It has the following features:
As a result, when the first operation prompting image is executed, the specific image is displayed and it often results in a miss, whereas when the second operation prompting image is executed, the specific image is not displayed and it often results in a jackpot. Therefore, it is possible to understand that the display of the specific image indicates a miss, and the result of the jackpot determination can be guessed from such a display, thereby improving the interest in the game.

That is,
A first operation promotion effect that displays a first operation promotion image (for example, the first operation promotion image in FIG. 62), and the degree of expectation that the special game will be executed is higher than when the first operation promotion image is executed. There is a second operation promotion effect that displays a second operation promotion image (for example, the second operation promotion image shown in FIG. 62).
A variation effect that executes a second operation promotion effect accompanied by the display of a specific image 31e in the normal gaming state, and a variation effect that executes a second operation promotion effect accompanied by the display of the specific image 31e in the high probability game state. Each performance has a different execution rate (for example, the proportion of jackpots determined to be a jackpot in the normal gaming state and the proportion of jackpots judged to be a jackpot in a high probability gaming state are different, but the percentage of winnings in the normal gaming state is higher than the loss SP reach) Since it is easy to execute, a variable performance that executes a specific performance using a second operation promotion performance accompanied by the display of a specific image 31e in the first gaming state, and a display of the specific image 31e in the second gaming state. (The execution rate is different from the variable performance that executes the specific performance using the second operation promotion performance that accompanies this).
It has such characteristics.
As a result, the degree of appearance of the specific image changes depending on the gaming state, so it is possible to improve the interest in the game.

That is,
During execution of the reach effect, there are operation promotion effects (for example, a first operation promotion effect that displays a first operation promotion image, and a second operation promotion effect that displays a second operation promotion image) that prompts the operation of the operation means (for example, the effect button 35). 2 operation promotion effect) can be executed.
The operating means (for example, the effect button 35) can be changed from a first mode (for example, a non-vibrating mode) to a second mode (for example, a vibrating mode).
When the number of times the operating means (for example, the production button 35) is set to the second mode (for example, the vibrating mode) is the first number (for example, 0 times), and when the operation means (for example, the production button 35) is set to the second mode (for example, the vibrating mode) The rate at which the specific image 31e is displayed differs depending on the number of times the image is displayed in two modes (for example, in the vibrating mode) (for example, once). If the number of vibrations is 0 and it is a jackpot, the number of vibrations of the production button 35 is 1, and if the number of vibrations is 0, the specific image 31e is more likely to be displayed to compensate for the loss. Therefore, the ratio at which the specific image 31e is displayed differs between when the operating means is not vibrated and when the operating means is vibrated).
It has such characteristics.
Thereby, by displaying the specific image and the number of vibrations of the effect button 35, it is possible to clearly recognize that the reach effect has ended in a loss.

Next, relevant features will be described with reference to Figures 68 to 74.
Incidentally, regarding the display elements of the image display device 31, those that are the same as those described in FIG. 43 will not be described.

FIG. 68 shows an example of the display on the image display device 31 when "volume adjustment" is performed during the varying display, particularly at the timing when the specific image 31e is being displayed.
In the gaming machine 1 according to this embodiment, "volume adjustment" is possible using the cross button 36 even during a changing display or while waiting for customers.
When "volume adjustment" is performed, a level image 31s indicating the current volume level is displayed, as shown in FIG. 68(b).
Also, as described above, when the specific image 31e is displayed, no music is output, but the audio output device 32 outputs a volume adjustment sound ("beep ♪") at a volume value corresponding to the current volume level.
The display mode (size, display position, color, etc.) of the level image 31s during the varying display and the display mode of the level image 31s during the customer waiting state may be the same display mode or different display modes. For example, the level image 31s during the varying display may be displayed in a smaller size than the level image 31s during the customer waiting state, may be displayed in a different display position, may be displayed in a lighter color, or may not be displayed at all.
Also, during the variable display, the volume adjustment sound ("beep") may not be output, and notification may be given only by displaying the level image 31s.

That is, according to FIG. 68, when "volume adjustment" is performed using the cross button 36 at the timing when the specific image 31e is displayed, the level image 31s is displayed at the right corner of the image display device 31 along with the specific image 31e. That will happen.
In this way, even if the level image 31s is displayed together with the specific image 31e, the display area of the specific image 31e is larger than the display area of the level image 31s, so it is possible to prevent the specific image 31e from becoming inconspicuous. .
Note that the example in FIG. 68 shows that the current volume value is "2", and if no operation is performed with the cross button 36 for a predetermined period of time after the level image 31s is displayed, the example in FIG. 68 ( As shown in d), the level image 31s is erased.

In this way, if "volume adjustment" is performed at the timing when the specific image 31e is displayed, the level image 31s is displayed together with the specific image 31e.
This allows for greater freedom in the timing of "volume adjustment," and also allows the player to clearly recognize that the reach effect has ended.
In addition, "volume adjustment" in FIG. 68 may be read as "light intensity adjustment."

Time chart 8 in Figure 69 shows (a) an example in which a decorative component announcement (decorative component announcement effect in Figure 38) is performed in variable presentation pattern 7, (b) an example in which the power to gaming machine 1 is turned off while a "specific image" is being displayed in variable presentation pattern 7, and (c) an example in which an effect is performed using start port lamp 14b.

(a) is a variation effect pattern 7, and timing (a) T0 is the timing at which the variation display is started. Note that the "decorative member preview" is not executed and the "specific image" is not displayed until timing (a) T2.
Then, when timing (a) T2 is reached, the "decorative member notice" is executed once at a predetermined timing until timing (a) T4 when the result of the jackpot determination is announced. That is, the first decorative member 33a and the second decorative member 33b are operated from the initial position to the operating position, and after a predetermined period of time, are returned to the initial position.

Then, "missing notification" is performed from timing (a) T4 to timing (a) T5, and "decorative member notice" is not executed after timing (a) T4 (0 times).
Then, a "specific image" is displayed from timing (a) T5 to timing (a) T6, and thereafter, the display shifts to a "temporary stop display period" and a "determined stop display period".
That is, before the "specific image" is displayed from timing (a) T5 to timing (a) T6, the "specific image" is displayed from timing (a) T5 to timing (a) T6. , the first decorative member 33a and the second decorative member 33b are easily moved to the operating position.
Thereby, before the timing of notifying the result of the jackpot determination, the anticipation for the jackpot can be improved by the decorative member advance notice performance.
Further, after the timing of notifying the result of the jackpot determination, it is possible to prevent excessive expectations for the jackpot from increasing.

In addition, before timing (a) T5 to timing (a) T6 at which the "specific image" is displayed, the first decorative member 33a and the second decorative member 33b may be activated multiple times, not just once.
In addition, in a losing variation presentation pattern, the first decorative member 33a and the second decorative member 33b do not operate after timing (a) T4, but in a winning variation presentation pattern 30, the first decorative member 33a and the second decorative member 33b may operate as part of the revival presentation, for example, at timing (f) T7 in Figure 50.
In other words, in the case of a miss,
Before the "specific image" is displayed, it will work (you will win the decoration material preview), and after the "specific image" is displayed, it will not work.
There are cases where it doesn't work before the "specific image" is displayed (you don't win the decoration material preview), and cases where it doesn't work after the "specific image" is displayed.
In case of a big win,
Before the "specific image" is displayed, it will work (you will win the decoration material preview), and after the "specific image" is displayed, it will not work.
Before the "specific image" is displayed → It does not work (you are not selected for the decoration material preview), after the "specific image" is displayed → It does not work,
Before the "specific image" is displayed, it does not work (you do not win the decoration material announcement), and after the "specific image" is displayed, it works (revival performance).
There are cases where the "specific image" is displayed before it is activated (winning the decoration material announcement), and cases where the "specific image" is displayed after it is activated (revival performance).
There will be.

(b) is a variation effect pattern 7, which mainly shows the characteristic part of the "background switching" scene.
Timing (b) T0 is the timing at which the "specific image" is displayed.
At this time, the power of the gaming machine 1 is ON (power is supplied via the power plug 141).
Then, at timing (b) T1 while the "specific image" is being displayed (for example, before 2S elapses), a power outage occurs and the gaming machine 1 is powered off (power is not supplied via the power plug 141). becomes. In this case, since the image display device 31 is also turned off, the "specific image" is not displayed either.

Then, at timing (b) T2, the power outage is resolved, power is restored, and the power source of the gaming machine 1 is turned ON. Note that timing (b) T2 is during "background switching" and is the display period of the "specific image" (e.g., before 2 seconds have elapsed). Therefore, although it is conceivable that the "specific image" that was displayed before the power outage would be displayed again, the image displayed on the image display device 31 at the time of power recovery (power restoration in progress, please wait) takes priority over the redisplay of the "specific image".
That is, at timing (b) T2, the "specific image" is not displayed, and the power recovery image (power restoration in progress, please wait) is displayed.

In this way, even if a power outage occurs while the "specific image" is being displayed (for example, before 2S elapses), the "specific image" will not be displayed again, but rather the image when the power is restored (please wait for a while while the power is being restored). ) is displayed on the image display device 31 with priority.
This makes it possible to accurately notify the player of the content that should be given the highest priority, depending on the current situation of the gaming machine 1.

(c) shows that in successive change presentations, a presentation is performed using the hold icon and the start lamp 14b, and that change presentation pattern 1 is executed as the first change (first game), and change presentation pattern 7 is executed as the second change (second game).
In addition, only the main parts of each changing effect will be explained.

Timing (c) T0 is the timing of the "determined stop display period" of the variation effect pattern 1 in the first variation.
At this timing, the final still image is displayed on the image display device 31. Further, a game ball enters the first starting port 14, and "Hold" is updated from "0" to "1" (stored in the first storage section).
In addition, based on the ball entering the first starting port 14, the player wins the execution of a pre-reading effect using the hold icon and the starting port lamp 14b, and as the holding icon, the green color starts from the time the ball enters the first starting port 14. It is assumed that a pre-read effect has been executed in which a hold icon is displayed and the starting port lamp 14b is lit (light-emitted) in green.
That is, from this timing, the "starting port lamp" changes from off to on (green), and the "image display device" displays a green pending icon image.
Note that the "specific image" is not displayed.
These aspects continue until timing (c) T1.

Timing (c) T1 is the timing at which the first variation effect pattern 1 ends and the second variation effect pattern 7 starts.
At this timing, the "normal fluctuation period" in the second fluctuation effect pattern 7 starts, and the "image display device" displays the normal fluctuation image and the green pending icon image (shifted to the relevant fluctuation icon display area 31a). ) is displayed.
Incidentally, with the start of the second variation, "Hold" becomes "0" (no memory in the first storage section to second storage section), and the starting port lamp 14b continues to be lit (green). That is, the green pending icon image of the "image display device" and the lighting (green) of the starting port lamp 14b are continuously performed over at least two fluctuations.
Note that the "specific image" is not displayed.
Then, these aspects continue until timing (c) T2, and from timing (c) T2, the green hold icon image is hidden and becomes invisible to the player, but the starting gate lamp 14b is It continues to be lit (green) and remains visible to players. In other words, even if the green pending icon image is hidden due to the transition to the "SP reach variation period", the starting gate lamp 14b emits light in the color corresponding to the green pending icon image that is hidden. By visually recognizing the starting lamp 14b, the player can grasp the degree of expectation for a jackpot.

Timing (c) T3 is the timing when the "SP reach variation period" has started, and at this timing, the SP reach image is displayed on the "image display device".
Further, the starting port lamp 14b continues to be lit (green).
Note that the "specific image" is not displayed.
Thereafter, "loss notification" is performed at the timing of notifying the result of the jackpot determination, and reaches timing (c) T4.

Timing (c) T4 is the timing of transition from the "SP reach variation period" to the "background switching", and at this timing, the "specific image" is displayed on the "image display device" for "2S period".
Further, the starting port lamp 14b continues to be lit (green).
These aspects continue until timing (c) T5.
Then, at timing (c) T5, the "specific image" is hidden, but the starting port lamp 14b remains lit (green) until the "determined stop display period" (not shown) is completed. continue.
That is, in a look-ahead effect using a hold icon and the starting gate lamp 14b, the hold icon may be hidden and become unrecognizable during the fluctuating performance, but the starting gate lamp 14b may not be displayed during the fluctuating performance. It never becomes visible and is always visible.
Therefore, even if the "specific image" is displayed by "background switching", the light emitting effect (for example, lighting (green)) by the starting port lamp 14b will not become invisible due to the display of the "specific image". There is no mutual interference.
Thereby, by displaying the "specific image", it is clearly recognized that the reach effect has ended, and at the same time, by the start lamp 14b, it is made to understand the degree of expectation for a jackpot in the finished reach effect. I can do it.

FIG. 70 shows a case where the "design confirmation command" transmitted from the main control board 110 is normally received by the production control board 120, and a case where it is not normally received.
Note that the timing at which the "symbol confirmation command" is received by the production control board 120 is approximately the timing (c).
Therefore, the display mode is the same in all cases until the "missing notification" is performed in (a) and the "specific image 31e" is displayed in (b).
In addition, the temporary stop display in (c) will have the same display mode up to the middle, but if the "symbol confirmation command" is not received normally, the production pattern will not be displayed as a fixed stop and will remain in the temporary stop display. becomes.

That is, in any case, since the "specific image 31e" is displayed, it is possible to clearly recognize that the reach effect has ended.
In addition, if the production symbol in FIG. 70(d) is not displayed as a fixed stop and the "design confirmation command" is not received as shown in , the temporary display of the production symbol continues, and the result of the jackpot determination is There has been a problem in that the game is not determined and the player feels troubled.
However, in either case, since the "specific image 31e" is displayed, it can be inferred that the reach effect has ended in a loss by displaying the "specific image 31e", so the "design confirmation command" is not received. If not, it is possible to prevent the player from being bothered even if the result of jackpot determination is not finalized.

FIG. 71 is a table excerpting error-related commands related to errors that may occur in the gaming machine 1 and the priority order of the error-related commands.
In FIG. 71, "priority" refers to which error notification should be given priority when multiple errors occur at the same time, or whether notification should be given at the same time as other displays, etc. It stipulates the following.
For example, when a "big winning slot abnormal winning error" and a "dish full error" occur at the same time, priority is given to the error notification related to the "big winning opening abnormal winning error".
In addition, if it is "specified when power is restored", as shown in FIG. If it is "dish full error end designation", as shown in FIG. 72, which will be described later, for example, an ejection promotion image 31u that urges ejecting game balls from the tray 40 is displayed at the same time as the specific image 31e (other displays, etc. (can be notified at the same time).

The error-related commands include "power on designation" (power on with operation of the RAM clear SW) with a priority of "1" (highest priority), "power recovery designation" (power on without operation of the RAM clear SW) with a priority of "2", "big prize entrance abnormal prize error" (for example, the big prize entrance detection SW is ON even though there is no big prize), "board abnormality error start designation" with a priority of "4" (for example, a magnetic sensor or radio wave sensor not shown detects an abnormal magnetism or abnormal radio waves), "door open error start designation door open error end designation" with a priority of "5" (for example, the door opening switch 133 detects that the door is open), "tray full error start designation tray full error end designation" (for example, it is detected that the tray 40 has more than a predetermined amount of game balls stored), and "switch unconnected error start designation switch unconnected error end designation" with a priority of "7" (for example, it is detected that one of the switches is unconnected).

FIG. 72 shows a case (hereinafter referred to as case 1) in which a power outage occurs and the gaming machine 1 is turned off due to a power failure while displaying a "specific image", and a case in which a predetermined amount of This is an animation showing a case in which the above game balls are stored and a plate full error occurs (hereinafter referred to as case 2).
Note that FIG. 72 corresponds to a time chart explaining the (b) variable effect pattern 7 described in FIG. 69.

The timing (b) to T0 corresponds to the timing (b) to T0 in FIG. 69, and in both cases, a "miss notification" is given.
In case 1, a "specific image" is displayed from timing (b) T0 to timing (b) T1, and at timing (b) T1, a power outage occurs, the power to the gaming machine 1 is turned off, and the image display device 31 is turned off (the screen goes black).
Then, at timing (b) T2, power is restored and the gaming machine 1 is turned ON, and the specific image 31e is not displayed again on the image display device 31, and the power restoration image (power restoration in progress, please wait) is displayed.

On the other hand, in case 2, the "specific image" is displayed from timing (b) T0 to timing (b) T3.
Although not shown in FIG. 69, if a plate full error (low priority error) occurs between timing (b) T0 and timing (b) T3, the front side of the specific image 31e The discharge promotion image 31u is displayed superimposed on the section.
That is, the specific image 31e and the discharge promotion image 31u are displayed at the same time.
Then, from timing (b) T3 onwards, a temporary stop display is performed.

In other words, if a power outage occurs while the specific image 31e is being displayed, and a high-priority "specify when power is restored" command is received during the period in which the specific image 31e is being displayed, the specific image 31e is not displayed again, and a power-restore image (please wait while power is being restored) is displayed with priority.
On the other hand, if a "plate full error start designation" command with a lower priority is received while the specific image 31e is being displayed, the display of the specific image 31e is continued and at the same time, the discharge prompting image 31u is displayed.
As a result, according to the established priority order, items with high priority are notified on the entire display area of the image display device 31, and items with low priority are notified on only a part of the display area of the image display device 31, thereby enabling accurate display according to the priority order.
In other words, for high priority items such as "designation upon power restoration," the process until the gaming machine 1 is restored can be clearly notified, thereby preventing the player from feeling uncomfortable.

For example, if a "switch unconnected error" with a priority level of "7" occurs during the display period of the specific image 31e, the display will be in the same manner as the dish full error in FIG.
That is, together with the display of the specific image 31e, an image notifying the user of a switch unconnected error is displayed.
Here, to resolve a switch unconnected error, it is necessary to turn off the power to the gaming machine 1 and check for switches that are not connected.
Therefore, when an image notifying a switch unconnection error is displayed together with the specific image 31e, the power may be turned off by the administrator of the gaming machine 1 in order to carry out the above-mentioned check.
In such a case, when the switch disconnection is resolved and the power supply of the gaming machine 1 is turned ON again, the specific image 31e is not displayed again, and the power recovery image (power restoration, please wait) is displayed preferentially.
In other words, even if the situation before the power of the gaming machine 1 is turned off is one in which an image notifying a switch unconnected error is displayed together with the specific image 31e, or even if only the specific image 31e is displayed, when power is restored, the specific image 31e is not displayed again, but the power restoration image (Power being restored, please wait) is displayed with priority.
This makes it possible to notify across the entire display area of the image display device 31 that power to the gaming machine 1 has been restored, regardless of the display status before the power outage.

FIG. 73 shows a case where there is no "change pending icon" and a case where there is a "change pending icon".
Note that the description before the "loss notification" in (a) is omitted, but for example, in a case where there is a "change pending icon", when the fluctuation effect is started, " The following explanation assumes that the "change pending icon" is displayed.

In the case where there is no "change pending icon", even after the specific image 31e is displayed in (b), the pending icon display area 31b in the normal color is displayed as shown in (c) and (d). A hold icon (indicated by a circle) is displayed.
In the case where there is a "change pending icon", even after the specific image 31e is displayed in (b), the pending icon display area 31b has a pending color different from the normal color, as shown in (c) and (d). An icon (pending icon indicated by "●" in the figure) is displayed.
That is, before the specific image 31e is displayed, for example, at the start of the variation in the variation effect, a pending icon of a color different from the normal color (the pending icon indicated by "●" in the figure) is displayed in the pending icon display area 31b. In this case, after the specific image 31e is displayed, it is displayed again in the pending icon display area 31b in the same display mode (the pending icon indicated by "●" in the figure).
This can prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable.
Note that if a pending icon of a color different from the normal color (the pending icon indicated by "●" in the figure) is displayed in the pending icon display area 31b before the specific image 31e is displayed, after the specific image 31e is displayed, A normal color pending icon (the pending icon indicated by "○" in the figure) may be displayed in the pending icon display area 31b (default display after the specific image 31e is displayed).
Furthermore, if a pending icon of a color different from the normal color (the pending icon indicated by "●" in the figure) is displayed in the pending icon display area 31b before the specific image 31e is displayed, after the specific image 31e is displayed, Furthermore, the pending icon may be changed to a color with a high expectation of a jackpot (for example, the pending icon displayed as "●" may be displayed as "◎").

Note that the normal color pending icon may be changed to the "change pending icon" through various effects. For example, the pending icon itself may be displayed in a large size, and the change may be made through an effect that encourages whether or not to change to the "change pending icon", or a character image (so-called mini-character image) that is approximately the same size as the pending icon may be displayed. The mini-character image may be displayed and the mini-character image may be displayed to prompt whether or not to change to the "change pending icon."
However, in the scenes shown in FIGS. 73(b), (c), and (d), effects that encourage whether or not to change to the "change pending icon" are not performed.
Thereby, in particular, it is possible to prevent the display of the specific image 31e from being obstructed, and it is possible to clearly recognize that the reach effect has ended.

FIG. 74 shows a modification.
In addition, in any gaming state of the gaming machine 1 in this embodiment, when SP reach or SPSP reach is not executed, a variable display is performed on one performance symbol line (single line), and SP reach is not executed. , or in SPSP reach, a reach effect may be performed with a plurality of effect symbol lines.
In such a gaming machine, for example, as shown in (a), a so-called double reach effect is performed in which a reach effect using "2 symbols" and a reach effect using "3 symbols" are performed simultaneously during the "SP reach variation period". (Multiple production pattern lines), as shown in (b), after displaying the specific image 31e and blocking the production pattern 38, as shown in (c) and (d), "normal variation It may be possible to return to the first effect pattern line when the "Period" etc. are performed.
Thereby, it is possible to return to the first performance symbol line after a pause in the display of the specific image 31e, so that switching can be performed without giving the player a sense of discomfort.

Furthermore, the specific image 31e is not limited to an image imitating a shutter as shown in Figure 43 etc., but may also be an image imitating a curtain as shown in Figure 74, an image showing the motif (model name, etc.) of the gaming machine 1 not shown, an image of a character not shown, an image imitating smoke, fog or mist not shown, or a whiteout image or blackout image not shown.
In addition, even if the specific image 31e is the same, the display time of the specific image 31e may be different depending on the type of the variable performance pattern. For example, the display time of the specific image 31e may be longer in a variable performance pattern accompanied by the execution of an SPSP reach than in a variable performance pattern accompanied by the execution of an SP reach.
In addition, there may be two or more types of specific images 31e. In that case, different types may be used depending on the game state, mode, etc.
In addition, there may be a plurality of types of specific images 31e for each of the low probability game state and the high probability game state.
In addition, a plurality of specific images 31e may be provided, and specific images 31e corresponding to the modes in the same gaming state may be displayed.
In addition, a plurality of specific images 31e may be provided, and the plurality of specific images 31e may include a special specific image 31e that is selected with a high probability when the variable performance pattern 30 is executed. This allows a player to have an expectation that a revival performance will occur when the special specific image 31e is displayed.

74, when the specific image 31e is used for shielding, the specific image 31e may be designed to shield from the right side of the screen of the image display device 31, for example, by using a curtain-like specific image 31e. Also, the shielding may be performed from the left side of the screen of the image display device 31, from the upper side of the screen of the image display device 31, or from the lower side of the screen of the image display device 31.
In this way, the performance pattern 38 and the like are gradually covered up, which adds visual interest.

Further, as shown in FIG. 74, when canceling the shielding by the specific image 31e, similarly to the case of shielding, it is canceled from the left side of the screen of the image display device 31, and the display elements displayed on the left side of the screen are exposed. It may be released from the right side of the screen of the image display device 31 and exposed from the display elements displayed on the right side of the screen, or it may be released from the top of the screen of the image display device 31. The image may be released from the bottom of the screen of the image display device 31 and exposed from the display elements displayed at the bottom of the screen. You can do as you like.

In addition, in this embodiment, for example, as shown in FIG. 5, the jackpot probability in the jackpot lottery is one probability each in the low probability gaming state and the high probability gaming state, but it is not limited to this. It may be a so-called setting-equipped gaming machine that has different jackpot probabilities for each set value in multiple stages.
For example, as shown in FIG. 5, setting value 1 is a jackpot probability of 1/300 in the low probability gaming state and jackpot probability of 1/60 in the high probability gaming state, and setting value 6 is the jackpot probability in the low probability gaming state. A game parlor can set arbitrary set values, such as a jackpot probability of 1/240 in a high probability game state and a jackpot probability of 1/40 in a high probability game state (the probabilities of set values 2 to 5 are omitted).
By installing setting values in this way, players can play games while guessing whether an advantageous jackpot probability or an unfavorable jackpot probability has been set. It can contribute to improving interest.

When such setting values are installed, the specific image 31e may be used to suggest which setting value is set among the multiple levels of setting values (the specific image 31e , it has the role of so-called setting suggestion direction).
Specifically, when a setting value is set, a command indicating which setting value has been set is transmitted, and therefore setting value information based on the command is stored in the sub-RAM 120c.
Further, a plurality of types of specific images 31e are stored in the CGROM 156, for example, with different designs and colors.
For example, when the sub CPU 120a determines a variable effect pattern for displaying the specific image 31e, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not to execute the setting suggestion effect, and if not, determines to display the normal specific image 31e. Then, when executed, it is decided to display a special specific image 31e according to the setting value information stored in the sub-RAM 120c.

For example, when setting value 1 is set and a setting suggestion effect is executed, it is suggested that there is a high possibility that setting value 1, setting value 3, or setting value 5 (odd number setting value) is set. It is decided to display a special specific image 31e.
On the other hand, when setting value 6 is set and a setting suggestion effect is executed, it is suggested that there is a high possibility that setting value 2, setting value 4, or setting value 6 (even setting value) is set. A special specific image 31e, a special specific image 31e, or a special specific image 31e that suggests that there is a high possibility that one of setting value 4, setting value 5, and setting value 6 (so-called high setting value) is set, and setting value 6. It is decided to display a special specific image 31e that definitively indicates that .
Note that when the setting value 6 is set and a setting suggestion effect is executed, it is easy to decide to display a special specific image 31e that suggests that an even number setting value is likely to be set, and the setting value 6 It may be made so that it is difficult to decide to display a special specific image 31e that definitively indicates that .

In this way, by giving the specific image 31e the role of a so-called setting suggestion effect, useful information can be given to a player who is disappointed because the SP reach has failed, for example, thereby stimulating his/her desire to play.
In addition, the player can play the game with a higher hope of achieving the SP reach or higher.

Furthermore, the distribution ratio of the variable effect pattern shown in FIG. 33 may be changed for each set value in multiple stages. For example, if the allocation ratio in FIG. 33 is set to 1, and set to 6, another variable effect pattern determination table may be stored in the sub ROM 120b. For example, in FIG. 33, the distribution ratio of the variable performance pattern 16 is 70%, the distribution ratio of the variable performance pattern 17 is 20%, and the distribution ratio of the variable performance pattern 18 is 10%. In the variable performance pattern determination table with value 6, the distribution ratio of variable performance pattern 16 is 30%, the distribution ratio of variable performance pattern 17 is 30%, and the distribution ratio of variable performance pattern 18 is 40%. You can. Furthermore, there may be a variable performance pattern that is likely to appear for each set value in multiple stages.
With this configuration, it is possible to give the player the pleasure of guessing the set value from the executed variable performance pattern, and thus it is possible to improve the interest in the game.
Note that if the distribution ratio of the variable effect pattern of FIG. 33 is configured to change for each set value of multiple stages, the appearance ratio of the specific image 31e will naturally also change for each set value of multiple stages. . In this way, it is possible to give the player the pleasure of guessing the set value from the specific image 31e whose appearance ratio changes for each set value in a plurality of stages, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

Also, while it has been mentioned above that the specific image 31e may have the role of a so-called setting suggestion effect, it may also have the role of a preview effect that warns of the possibility of a big win occurring.
Specifically, the expected probability of the "revival effect" being executed in the variable effect pattern 30 of FIG. 33 may be indicated by the specific image 31e.
In this case, multiple types of specific images 31e are stored in CGROM 156, and, for example, in variable presentation pattern 18 (miss), the normal specific image 31e is made easier to select than the special specific image 31e, and in variable presentation pattern 30 (jackpot), the special specific image 31e is made easier to select than the normal specific image 31e, so that when the special specific image 31e is displayed, the player has hope that the ``revival presentation'' will be executed.
This makes it possible to prevent the display of the specific image 31e from simply serving the role of switching the background, thereby making the player desire the special specific image 31e to be displayed, thereby further increasing interest in the game.
In addition, the specific image 31e may simultaneously serve as a setting suggestion effect and a preview effect.
This makes it possible to instantly attract the player's attention to the display of the specific image 31e, thereby further increasing the player's interest in the game.

In this embodiment, the gaming machine has been described as having a normal gaming state, a time-saving gaming state, and a high-probability gaming state, but the gaming states provided can be changed as appropriate.
For example, the gaming machine may have a normal game state and a high probability game state but not a time-saving game state, or it may be a gaming machine that has a normal game state and a time-saving game state (for example, a type 1/type 2 type gaming machine) but not a high probability game state.
In addition, even in such a gaming machine, a common specific image 31e may be used in different gaming states, or a different specific image 31e may be used for each gaming state.

(Content 1 of the invention described in this embodiment)
In conventional gaming machines, in order to make the player clearly recognize that the reach performance has been developed, some machines perform the reach performance after performing the development performance (for example, the "sliding door performance" in FIG. 14 of JP2013-121404A). However, since no performance is performed after the reach performance ends (for example, it ends with announcing a loss), some players cannot clearly recognize that the reach performance has ended, which is one of the reasons for the decline in interest in the game.

◆ A first configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine equipped with a main control means (e.g., the main control board 110) and a performance control means (e.g., the performance control board 120), in which the main control means includes a determination means (e.g., the main CPU 110a) that determines whether or not to play a special game (e.g., a jackpot game) advantageous to the player when a start condition is satisfied (e.g., step S310-2 of the special symbol memory determination process is affirmative, or step S310-4 of the special symbol memory determination process is affirmative), an identification information display control means (e.g., the first special symbol display device 20, the second special symbol display device 21) that, when the determination is made, displays identification information (e.g., a special symbol) in a variable manner and then stops displaying it, thereby displaying the result of the determination, and a command transmission means (e.g., the main CPU 110a that performs step S700 of the main control board timer interrupt process) that transmits a predetermined command (e.g., various commands that are set and transmitted in each process executed by the main CPU 110a). a), the performance control means is capable of receiving the predetermined command from the command transmission means (e.g., step S1400 of the performance control board timer interrupt process), and is capable of executing a variable performance (e.g., variable performance pattern 1 to variable performance pattern 33) that changes a pattern (e.g., performance pattern 38, small performance pattern 38d) corresponding to the identification information and stops the pattern, and the pattern includes a first pattern (e.g., performance pattern 38) and a second pattern (e.g., small performance pattern 38a) that is different in size from the first pattern. The variable presentation includes a specific presentation (for example, SP reach, SPSP reach), and when the specific presentation is performed (for example, T4 to T5 in (c) of FIG. 43), a specific image (for example, specific image 31e) can be displayed. While the specific image is being displayed (for example, T5 to T6 in (c) of FIG. 43), the second pattern is visibly displayed, and after the specific image is displayed (for example, T6 to T7 in (c) of FIG. 43), both the first pattern and the second pattern are visibly displayed.
As a result, the display of the specific image 31e allows the player to clearly recognize that the reach effect has ended, preventing a decline in interest in the game.

◆ A second configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine equipped with a main control means (e.g., the main control board 110) and a presentation control means (e.g., the presentation control board 120), in which the main control means comprises a determination means (e.g., the main CPU 110a) that, when a start condition is satisfied (e.g., step S310-2 of the special symbol memory determination process is affirmative, or step S310-4 of the special symbol memory determination process is affirmative), determines whether or not to play a special game (e.g., a jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player (e.g., a jackpot determination process), and When the determination is made, identification information display control means (e.g., the first special pattern display device 20, the second special pattern display device 21) displays the result of the determination by varying and then stopping the display of identification information (e.g., special patterns), and command transmission means (e.g., the main CPU 110a that performs step S700 of the main control board timer interruption process) transmits a predetermined command (e.g., various commands that are set and transmitted in each process executed by the main CPU 110a). The performance control means The predetermined command can be received from the means (for example, step S1400 of the performance control board timer interrupt processing), and a variable performance (for example, variable performance pattern 1 to variable performance pattern 33) that changes a pattern (for example, performance pattern 38, small performance pattern 38d) corresponding to the identification information and stops the pattern can be executed, and the pattern includes a first pattern (for example, performance pattern 38) and a second pattern (for example, small performance pattern 38d) that is different in size from the first pattern, and the variable performance includes a specific performance (for example, SP reach, SPSP reach, It is possible to execute a specific performance (e.g., T4-T5 in (c) of FIG. 43), and when the specific performance is executed (e.g., T4-T5 in (c) of FIG. 43), a specific image (e.g., specific image 31e) can be displayed. Before (e.g., T4-T5 in (c) of FIG. 43) and after (e.g., T7-T8 in (c) of FIG. 43) the specific image is displayed, the display mode of the second pattern does not change (e.g., only a pattern consisting of numbers), but the display mode of the first pattern can change (e.g., from only a pattern consisting of numbers to a pattern consisting of numbers and a character).
As a result, the display of the specific image 31e allows the player to clearly recognize that the reach effect has ended, preventing a decline in interest in the game.

◆ A third configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine equipped with a main control means (e.g., the main control board 110) and a presentation control means (e.g., the presentation control board 120), in which the main control means includes a determination means (e.g., the main CPU 110a) that, when a start condition is satisfied (e.g., step S310-2 of the special symbol memory determination process is affirmative, or step S310-4 of the special symbol memory determination process is affirmative), determines whether or not to play a special game (e.g., a jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player (e.g., a jackpot determination process), and, when the determination is made, The display control means includes an identification information display control means (e.g., the first special symbol display device 20, the second special symbol display device 21) for displaying the result of the judgment by displaying different information (e.g., a special symbol) in a variable manner and then stopping the display, and a command transmission means (e.g., the main CPU 110a for performing step S700 of the main control board timer interruption process) for transmitting a predetermined command (e.g., various commands set and transmitted in each process executed by the main CPU 110a). The performance control means receives the predetermined command from the command transmission means. It is possible to execute a variable performance (e.g., variable performance pattern 1 to variable performance pattern 33) in which a pattern (e.g., performance pattern 38, small performance pattern 38d) corresponding to the identification information is changed, the pattern is temporarily stopped (e.g., performance pattern 38 is stopped in a state where it is slightly swayed) and then the pattern is stopped (e.g., performance pattern 38 and small performance pattern 38d are completely stopped without moving), and a specific performance (e.g., SP reach, SPSP reach) can be executed in the variable performance. When the specific effect is executed (for example, T4 to T5 in (c) of Figure 44), a specific image (for example, specific image 31e) can be displayed, and when the specific image is displayed (for example, (c) of Figure 44) and the pattern is temporarily stopped (for example, T6 to T7 in (c) of Figure 44), a predetermined effect (for example, an action effect by a character pattern) is not executed, but when the specific image is not displayed (for example, (a) of Figure 44), and the pattern is temporarily stopped (for example, T1 to T2 in (a) of Figure 44), a predetermined effect (for example, an action effect by a character pattern) can be executed.
As a result, the display of the specific image 31e allows the player to clearly recognize that the reach effect has ended, preventing a decline in interest in the game.

◆ A fourth configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine equipped with a main control means (e.g., the main control board 110) and a presentation control means (e.g., the presentation control board 120), in which the main control means comprises a determination means (e.g., the main CPU 110a) that determines whether or not to play a special game (e.g., a jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player (e.g., a jackpot determination process) when a start condition is satisfied (e.g., step S310-2 of the special symbol memory determination process is affirmative, or step S310-4 of the special symbol memory determination process is affirmative), and a reserve memory means (e.g., a reserve memory means) that can reserve and store a predetermined number of the rights to make the determination (e.g., the 0th memory unit to the 4th memory unit shown in FIG. 12(a)). and a main RAM 110c), an identification information display control means (e.g., the first special pattern display device 20, the second special pattern display device 21) which, when the determination is made, displays identification information (e.g., a special pattern) in a variable manner and then stops the display to display the result of the determination, and a command transmission means (e.g., the main CPU 110a which performs step S700 of the main control board timer interrupt processing) which transmits a predetermined command (e.g., various commands which are set and transmitted in each process executed by the main CPU 110a), and the performance control means is capable of receiving the predetermined command from the command transmission means (e.g., the step S700 of the performance control board timer interrupt processing). The present invention is a step S1400) that can execute a variable performance (e.g., variable performance pattern 1 to variable performance pattern 33) that changes a pattern (e.g., performance pattern 38, small performance pattern 38d) corresponding to the identification information and stops the pattern, and can execute a reserved display performance (e.g., display of 0 to 4 displayed in the first special pattern reserved number display area 31c, display of 0 to 4 displayed in the second special pattern reserved number display area 31d) that displays a reserved image (e.g., the first special pattern reserved number (U1) displayed in the first special pattern reserved number display area 31c, the second special pattern reserved number (U2) displayed in the second special pattern reserved number display area 31d) corresponding to the right reserved and stored by the reserved storage means. It is possible to execute a specific performance (e.g., SP reach, SPSP reach) in the variable performance, and when the specific performance is executed (e.g., T4 to T5 in (c) of Figure 43), a specific image (e.g., specific image 31e) can be displayed. Before (e.g., T4 to T5 in (c) of Figure 43) and after (e.g., T7 to T8 in (c) of Figure 43), the display mode of the reserved image does not change (e.g., the size, design, etc. do not change), but the display mode of the pattern can change (e.g., it can change from only a pattern consisting of numbers to a pattern consisting of numbers and a pattern consisting of characters, i.e., the size, design, etc. can change).
As a result, the display of the specific image 31e allows the player to clearly recognize that the reach effect has ended, preventing a decline in interest in the game.

A fifth configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine equipped with a main control means (e.g., the main control board 110) and a presentation control means (e.g., the presentation control board 120), in which the main control means comprises a determination means (e.g., the main CPU 110a) that determines whether or not to play a special game (e.g., a jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player (e.g., a jackpot determination process) when a start condition is satisfied (e.g., step S310-2 of the special symbol memory determination process is affirmative, or step S310-4 of the special symbol memory determination process is affirmative), and a pre-determining means (e.g., the pre-determining means) that performs a determination process (e.g., a jackpot determination process) When the above-mentioned determination is made, identification information display control means (e.g., the first special symbol display device 20, the second special symbol display device 21) which displays the result of the determination by variably displaying identification information (e.g., a special symbol) and then stopping the display, game state control means (e.g., the main CPU 110a) capable of controlling a first game state (e.g., a normal game state) and a second game state different from the first game state (e.g., a high probability game state, a time-saving game state), and a predetermined command (e.g., in each process executed by the main CPU 110a), and a command transmission means (for example, a main CPU 110a that performs step S700 of the main control board timer interruption process) that transmits the predetermined command from the command transmission means (for example, step S1400 of the performance control board timer interruption process), and the performance control means is capable of receiving the predetermined command from the command transmission means (for example, step S1400 of the performance control board timer interruption process), and is capable of changing a pattern (for example, performance pattern 38, small performance pattern 38d) corresponding to the identification information and stopping the pattern (for example, variable performance pattern 1 to variable performance pattern 33). It is possible to execute a specific effect (e.g., SP reach, SPSP reach) in the variable effect, and when the specific effect is executed (e.g., Figure 45(c) T4 to T5 (normal), Figure 45(c) T4 to T5 (high probability)), a specific image (e.g., specific image 31e) can be displayed, and the specific image that can be displayed in the first game state can also be displayed in the second game state (e.g., a common specific image 31e can be displayed in Figure 45(c) T5 to T6 (normal), Figure 45(c) T5 to T6 (high probability)).
As a result, the display of the specific image 31e allows the player to clearly recognize that the reach effect has ended, preventing a decline in interest in the game.

◆ A sixth configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine including a main control means (for example, main control board 110) and a performance control means (for example, performance control board 120), the main control The means executes a special game advantageous to the player (for example, a jackpot) when the starting condition is satisfied (for example, step S310-2 of the special symbol memory determination process is affirmative, or step S310-4 of the special symbol memory determination process is affirmative). A determining means (e.g., main CPU 110a) that determines whether or not to perform a game (e.g., jackpot determination process); and when the determination is made, identifying information (e.g., special symbols) is displayed in a variable manner, and then the system stops. An identification information display control means (for example, the first special symbol display device 20, the second special symbol display device 21) that displays the result of the determination by displaying the result, and a predetermined command (for example, each command executed by the main CPU 110a). a command transmitting means (for example, the main CPU 110a that performs step S700 of the main control board timer interrupt processing) for transmitting various commands set and transmitted in the process, and the effect control means receives commands from the command transmitting means. It is possible to receive the predetermined command (for example, step S1400 of the production control board timer interrupt processing), and to change the symbol corresponding to the identification information (for example, production symbol 38, small production symbol 38d), It is possible to execute a variable effect (for example, variable effect pattern 1 to variable effect pattern 33) that stops mode (for example, mode B in FIG. 46), and in the variable performance, it is possible to execute a specific performance (for example, SP reach, SPSP reach), and the specific performance can be executed. When executed (for example, FIG. 46(c) T4 to T5 (mode A), FIG. 46(c) T4 to T5 (mode B)), a specific image (for example, specific image 31e) can be displayed, and the The specific image that can be displayed in the first mode can also be displayed in the second mode (for example, common in FIG. 46(c) T5 to T6 (mode A) and FIG. 46(c) T5 to T6 (mode B)). (can display a specific image 31e).
Thereby, by displaying the specific image 31e, it becomes possible to clearly recognize that the ready-to-win effect has ended, and it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game.

◆ A seventh configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine equipped with a main control means (e.g., the main control board 110) and a presentation control means (e.g., the presentation control board 120), in which the main control means comprises a determination means (e.g., the main CPU 110a) which, when a start condition is satisfied (e.g., step S310-2 of the special symbol memory determination process is affirmative, or step S310-4 of the special symbol memory determination process is affirmative), determines whether or not to play a special game (e.g., a jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player (e.g., a jackpot determination process), and, when the determination is made, displays identification information (e.g., a special symbol) in a variable manner and then stops the display, thereby The display control means includes an identification information display control means (e.g., the first special symbol display device 20, the second special symbol display device 21) that displays the result of the judgment, and a command transmission means (e.g., the main CPU 110a that performs step S700 of the main control board timer interrupt processing) that transmits a predetermined command (e.g., various commands set and transmitted in each process executed by the main CPU 110a), and the performance control means is capable of receiving the predetermined command from the command transmission means (e.g., step S1400 of the performance control board timer interrupt processing), and displays a pattern (e.g., performance pattern 38, small performance pattern 38d) corresponding to the identification information. and a variable performance (e.g., variable performance pattern 1 to variable performance pattern 33) in which the symbol is changed and the symbol is stopped can be executed, and in the variable performance, a specific performance accompanied by music (e.g., variable performance pattern 5 to variable performance pattern 18) can be executed, and when the specific performance is executed (e.g., variable performance pattern 7 to variable performance pattern 18), a specific image (e.g., specific image 31e) can be displayed, and in the variable performance, the specific performance consisting of a plurality of music pieces can be executed (e.g., variable performance pattern 5 to variable performance pattern 18), and the result of not playing the special game (e.g., a step of the jackpot determination process In the case where the result is that the special game is not performed (for example, step S311-1 of the jackpot determination process is denied) and the specific image is displayed (for example, variable presentation pattern 7 to variable presentation pattern 18), it is easier to execute the specific presentation consisting of the multiple songs (for example, variable presentation pattern 1 is a variable presentation in which a specific image is not displayed and the number of songs is 1, whereas variable presentation pattern 7 is a variable presentation in which a specific image is displayed and the number of songs is 3 (the number of songs in the reach presentation is 2)) compared to the case where the result is that the special game is not performed (for example, step S311-1 of the jackpot determination process is denied) and the specific image is not displayed (for example, variable presentation pattern 1 to variable presentation pattern 6).
As a result, the display of the specific image 31e allows the player to clearly recognize that the reach effect has ended, preventing a decline in interest in the game.

◆An eighth configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine equipped with a main control means (e.g., the main control board 110) and a presentation control means (e.g., the presentation control board 120), in which the main control means includes a determination means (e.g., the main CPU 110a) that, when a start condition is satisfied (e.g., step S310-2 of the special symbol memory determination process is affirmative, or step S310-4 of the special symbol memory determination process is affirmative), determines whether or not to play a special game (e.g., a jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player (e.g., a jackpot determination process), and, when the determination is made, The present invention is provided with an identification information display control means (e.g., the first special pattern display device 20, the second special pattern display device 21) for displaying the result of the judgment by varying and then stopping information (e.g., a special pattern) and a command transmission means (e.g., the main CPU 110a performing step S700 of the main control board timer interruption processing) for transmitting a predetermined command (e.g., various commands set and transmitted in each process executed by the main CPU 110a), and the performance control means is capable of receiving the predetermined command from the command transmission means (e.g., step S1400 of the performance control board timer interruption processing), and is capable of executing a variable performance (e.g., variable performance pattern 1 to variable performance pattern 33) that varies a pattern (e.g., performance pattern 38, small performance pattern 38d) corresponding to the identification information and stops the pattern, and in the variable performance, it is possible to execute a specific performance (e.g., variable performance pattern 5 to variable performance pattern 18, variable performance pattern 30) accompanied by music, and when the specific performance is executed (e.g., variable performance pattern 7 to variable performance pattern 18, variable performance pattern 3 0) can display a specific image (for example, specific image 31e), and among the specific effects, a first specific effect (for example, variable performance pattern 7) and a second specific effect (for example, variable performance pattern 16) different from the first specific effect have different numbers of songs (for example, variable performance pattern 7 has three songs (the number of songs in the reach performance is two), and variable performance pattern 16 has four songs (the number of songs in the reach performance is three)), and there are cases where the specific image is displayed after the first specific effect is executed, and cases where the specific image is displayed after the second specific effect is executed.
As a result, the display of the specific image 31e allows the player to clearly recognize that the reach effect has ended, preventing a decline in interest in the game.

◆ A ninth configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine equipped with a main control means (e.g., the main control board 110) and a presentation control means (e.g., the presentation control board 120), in which the main control means comprises a determination means (e.g., the main CPU 110a) that, when a start condition is satisfied (e.g., step S310-2 of the special symbol memory determination process is affirmative, or step S310-4 of the special symbol memory determination process is affirmative), determines whether or not to play a special game (e.g., a jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player (e.g., a jackpot determination process), and a control means (e.g., the main CPU 110b) that performs a determination process for determining whether or not to play a special game (e.g., a jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player when the start condition is satisfied (e.g., step S310-2 of the special symbol memory determination process is affirmative, or step S310-4 of the special symbol memory determination process is affirmative). When the determination is made, the display control means (e.g., the first special symbol display device 20, the second special symbol display device 21) displays the result of the determination by varying and then stopping the display of the identification information (e.g., special symbols), and the command transmission means (e.g., the main CPU 110a that performs step S700 of the main control board timer interruption process) transmits a predetermined command (e.g., various commands that are set and transmitted in each process executed by the main CPU 110a). It is possible to receive the predetermined command from the stage (for example, step S1400 of the performance control board timer interrupt processing), to execute a variable performance (for example, variable performance pattern 1 to variable performance pattern 33) that changes a pattern corresponding to the identification information (for example, performance pattern 38, small performance pattern 38d) and stops the pattern, and in the variable performance, it is possible to execute a specific performance accompanied by music (for example, variable performance pattern 5 to variable performance pattern 18, variable performance pattern 30), and when the specific performance is executed (for example, variable performance pattern 7 to variable performance pattern 18, variable performance pattern 30), it is possible to display a specific image (for example, specific image 31e), and at least a part of the period of the specific performance (for example, the "background switching" between the "normal reach fluctuation period" and the "SP reach fluctuation period" in the variable performance pattern 7) and the period during which the specific image is displayed (for example, the "background switching" between the "SP reach fluctuation period" and the "temporary stop display period" in the variable performance pattern 7) are periods that do not include the music (for example, periods during which music is not output).
As a result, the display of the specific image 31e allows the player to clearly recognize that the reach effect has ended, preventing a decline in interest in the game.

◆A tenth configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine including a main control means (for example, main control board 110) and a performance control means (for example, performance control board 120), The means executes a special game advantageous to the player (for example, a jackpot) when the starting condition is satisfied (for example, step S310-2 of the special symbol memory determination process is affirmative, or step S310-4 of the special symbol memory determination process is affirmative). A determining means (e.g., main CPU 110a) that determines whether or not to perform a game (e.g., jackpot determination process); and when the determination is made, identifying information (e.g., special symbols) is displayed in a variable manner, and then the system stops. An identification information display control means (for example, the first special symbol display device 20, the second special symbol display device 21) that displays the result of the determination by displaying the result, and a predetermined command (for example, each command executed by the main CPU 110a). a command transmitting means (for example, the main CPU 110a that performs step S700 of the main control board timer interrupt processing) for transmitting various commands set and transmitted in the process, and the effect control means receives commands from the command transmitting means. It is possible to receive the predetermined command (for example, step S1400 of the production control board timer interrupt processing), and to change the symbol corresponding to the identification information (for example, production symbol 38, small production symbol 38d), It is possible to execute a variable performance (for example, variable performance pattern 1 to variable performance pattern 33) that stops ), and when the specific effect is executed (for example, variable effect pattern 7 to variable effect pattern 18, variable effect pattern 30), a specific image (for example, specific image 31e) can be displayed. , before the specific image is displayed, the song is accompanied by the song (for example, in the case of variable production pattern 7, song A, song B, and song C are output), and after the specific image is displayed, the song is accompanied by the song. No music (for example, no music is output).
Thereby, by displaying the specific image 31e, it becomes possible to clearly recognize that the ready-to-win effect has ended, and it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game.

◆An eleventh configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine including a main control means (for example, main control board 110) and a performance control means (for example, performance control board 120), the main control The means executes a special game advantageous to the player (for example, a jackpot) when the starting condition is satisfied (for example, step S310-2 of the special symbol memory determination process is affirmative, or step S310-4 of the special symbol memory determination process is affirmative). A determining means (e.g., main CPU 110a) that determines whether or not to perform a game (e.g., jackpot determination process); and when the determination is made, identifying information (e.g., special symbols) is displayed in a variable manner, and then the system stops. An identification information display control means (for example, the first special symbol display device 20, the second special symbol display device 21) that displays the result of the determination by displaying the result, and a predetermined command (for example, each command executed by the main CPU 110a). a command transmitting means (for example, the main CPU 110a that performs step S700 of the main control board timer interrupt processing) for transmitting various commands set and transmitted in the process, and the effect control means receives commands from the command transmitting means. It is possible to receive the predetermined command (for example, step S1400 of the production control board timer interrupt processing), and to change the symbol corresponding to the identification information (for example, production symbol 38, small production symbol 38d), A variable effect (for example, a variable effect) that temporarily stops (for example, stops with the effect pattern 38 slightly swaying) and then makes a main stop (for example, stops completely without moving the effect pattern 38 or the small effect pattern 38d). Pattern 1 to variable performance pattern 33) can be executed, and in the variable performance, it is possible to execute a specific performance (for example, variable performance pattern 5 to variable performance pattern 18, variable performance pattern 30), and the specific performance When executing (for example, variable effect pattern 7 to variable effect pattern 18, variable effect pattern 30), a specific image (for example, specific image 31e) can be displayed, and a variable effect accompanied by the display of the specific image (for example, During the temporary stop of the symbol (for example, during the temporary stop display period) in the variable production pattern 7), a production sound (for example, the stop sound of the production pattern 38) is not output, and the variation production that does not involve the display of the specific image (for example, When the symbol is temporarily stopped (for example, during a temporary stop display period) in the variable performance pattern 1), a performance sound (for example, the stop sound of the performance pattern 38) is output.
Thereby, by displaying the specific image 31e, it becomes possible to clearly recognize that the ready-to-win effect has ended, and it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game.

◆ A twelfth configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine comprising a main control means (for example, main control board 110) and a production control means (for example, production control board 120), the main control The means executes a special game advantageous to the player (for example, a jackpot) when the starting condition is satisfied (for example, step S310-2 of the special symbol memory determination process is affirmative, or step S310-4 of the special symbol memory determination process is affirmative). A determining means (for example, the main CPU 110a) that determines whether or not to play a game (for example, a jackpot determination process), and a determining means that executes the special game according to a determination result that the special game is to be played. A special game execution control means (for example, the main CPU 110a) capable of controlling the above, and when the judgment is made, the result of the judgment is displayed by displaying the identification information (for example, the special symbol) in a variable manner and then stopping the display. Identification information display control means (for example, the first special symbol display device 20, second special symbol display device 21) and predetermined commands (for example, various commands set and transmitted in each process executed by the main CPU 110a) The production control means is capable of receiving the predetermined command from the command transmission means (for example, the main CPU 110a that performs step S700 of the main control board timer interrupt processing). This is step S1400 of the production control board timer interrupt processing, and is a variation production (for example, a variation production pattern) in which the symbols corresponding to the identification information (for example, production symbols 38, small production symbols 38d) are varied and the symbols are stopped. 1 to variable performance pattern 33), and in the variable performance, it is possible to execute a specific performance (for example, variable performance pattern 5 to variable performance pattern 18), and when the specific performance is executed (for example, , a specific image (for example, the specific image 31e) can be displayed in the variable effect pattern 7 to variable effect pattern 18), and the result of the determination is that the special game will not be played (for example, step S311 of the jackpot determination process). −1), and a variable production that executes a specific production using a first symbol (for example, the production pattern 38 of 6 symbols) accompanied by the display of the specific image; The variable performance that executes a specific performance using the second symbol (for example, the production symbol 38 of 7 symbols) has a different execution rate (for example, if the jackpot judgment process is a loss, the 6 symbol is The specific image 31e may not be displayed because the symbol 7 is also selected, but the specific image 31e is displayed because the 7 symbol is selected only when it is equal to or higher than the SP reach. Therefore, the ratio at which the specific image 31e is displayed differs between when it is a reach with 6 symbols and when it is a reach with 7 symbols).
Thereby, by displaying the specific image 31e, it becomes possible to clearly recognize that the ready-to-win effect has ended, and it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game.

◆ A thirteenth configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine equipped with a main control means (e.g., the main control board 110) and a presentation control means (e.g., the presentation control board 120), in which the main control means comprises a determination means (e.g., the main CPU 110a) that determines whether or not to play a special game (e.g., a jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player when a start condition is satisfied (e.g., step S310-2 of the special symbol memory determination process is affirmative, or step S310-4 of the special symbol memory determination process is affirmative), and a special game execution control means (e.g., The main CPU 110a), identification information display control means (e.g., the first special pattern display device 20, the second special pattern display device 21) for displaying the result of the judgment by varying and then stopping the display of identification information (e.g., special patterns) when the judgment is made, and command transmission means (e.g., the main CPU 110a for performing step S700 of the main control board timer interrupt processing) for transmitting a predetermined command (e.g., various commands set and transmitted in each process executed by the main CPU 110a), and the performance control means is capable of receiving the predetermined command from the command transmission means (e.g., the main CPU 110a for performing step S700 of the performance control board timer interrupt processing). The display device is a step S1400), which is capable of executing a variable performance (e.g., variable performance pattern 1 to variable performance pattern 33) that changes a pattern (e.g., performance pattern 38, small performance pattern 38d) corresponding to the identification information and stops the pattern, and in the variable performance, it is possible to execute a specific performance (e.g., variable performance pattern 5 to variable performance pattern 18, variable performance pattern 30), and when the specific performance is executed (e.g., variable performance pattern 7 to variable performance pattern 18, variable performance pattern 30), it is possible to display a specific image (e.g., specific image 31e), and a first indication of whether or not to execute the specific performance using a first pattern (e.g., performance pattern 38 of 6 patterns) is provided. There are cases where a suggestion effect (for example, a pattern prompting effect that prompts whether or not to go for a reach with a 6 symbol) is executed, and cases where a second suggestion effect (for example, a pattern prompting effect that prompts whether or not to go for a reach with a 7 symbol) is executed using a second symbol (for example, the performance symbol 38 of the 7 symbol) to indicate whether or not to execute the specific effect. The execution rate of the variable effect in which the first suggestion effect is executed and then a specific effect is executed, which is accompanied by the display of the specific image, and the execution rate of the variable effect in which the second suggestion effect is executed and then a specific effect is executed, which is accompanied by the display of the specific image, are different from each other (for example, the pattern prompting effect is more likely to succeed with the 6 symbol than with the 7 symbol, and the pattern prompting effect is more likely to fail with the 7 symbol than with the 6 symbol. Therefore, the 6 symbol is more likely to be a reach than the 7 symbol, and since it is more likely to be a reach, the specific image 31e is more likely to be displayed, and the rate at which the specific image 31e is displayed is different between the pattern prompting effect that prompts whether or not to go for a reach with the 6 symbol and the pattern prompting effect that prompts whether or not to go for a reach with the 7 symbol).
As a result, the display of the specific image 31e allows the player to clearly recognize that the reach effect has ended, preventing a decline in interest in the game.

◆ A fourteenth configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine equipped with a main control means (e.g., the main control board 110) and a presentation control means (e.g., the presentation control board 120), in which the main control means includes a determination means (e.g., the main CPU 110a) for determining (e.g., a jackpot determination process) whether or not to play a special game (e.g., a jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player when a start condition is satisfied (e.g., step S310-2 of the special symbol memory determination process is affirmative, or step S310-4 of the special symbol memory determination process is affirmative), and a determination means for determining (e.g., a jackpot determination process) whether or not to play a special game (e.g., a jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player when the ... determination is made, by variably displaying identification information (e.g., a special symbol) and then stopping the display. The display control means includes an identification information display control means (e.g., the first special symbol display device 20, the second special symbol display device 21) for displaying the result of the judgment, and a command transmission means (e.g., the main CPU 110a performing step S700 of the main control board timer interrupt processing) for transmitting a predetermined command (e.g., various commands set and transmitted in each process executed by the main CPU 110a). The performance control means is capable of receiving the predetermined command from the command transmission means (e.g., step S1400 of the performance control board timer interrupt processing), and varies a pattern (e.g., the performance pattern 38, the small performance pattern 38d) corresponding to the identification information. , a variable performance (e.g., variable performance pattern 1 to variable performance pattern 33) that stops the pattern can be executed, and in the variable performance, a specific performance (e.g., variable performance pattern 5 to variable performance pattern 18, variable performance pattern 30) can be executed, and when the specific performance is executed (e.g., variable performance pattern 7 to variable performance pattern 18, variable performance pattern 30), a specific image (e.g., specific image 31e) can be displayed, and during the execution of the variable performance, an operation prompting performance (e.g., display of a first operation prompting image or display of a second operation prompting image) that prompts the operation of an operation means (e.g., performance button 35) can be executed, and The advancing effects include a first operation promotion effect (e.g., display of a first operation promotion image) and a second operation promotion effect (e.g., display of a second operation promotion image) which has a higher expectation of the special game being executed than when the first operation promotion effect is executed, and the variable effect which executes the first operation promotion effect accompanied by the display of the specific image and the variable effect which executes the second operation promotion effect accompanied by the display of the specific image each have a different execution rate (e.g., the first operation promotion effect is more likely to be executed when a miss occurs, and the second operation promotion effect is less likely to be executed when a miss occurs, and accordingly the execution rate of the variable effect which executes the display of the specific image 31e also differs).
As a result, the display of the specific image 31e allows the player to clearly recognize that the reach effect has ended, preventing a decline in interest in the game.

◆ A fifteenth configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine comprising a main control means (for example, main control board 110) and a performance control means (for example, performance control board 120), wherein the main control The means executes a special game advantageous to the player (for example, a jackpot) when the starting condition is satisfied (for example, step S310-2 of the special symbol memory determination process is affirmative, or step S310-4 of the special symbol memory determination process is affirmative). A determining means (e.g., main CPU 110a) that determines whether or not to perform a game (e.g., jackpot determination process); and when the determination is made, identifying information (e.g., special symbols) is displayed in a variable manner, and then the system stops. An identification information display control means (for example, the first special symbol display device 20, the second special symbol display device 21) that displays the result of the determination by displaying the result, and a predetermined command (for example, each command executed by the main CPU 110a). a command transmitting means (for example, the main CPU 110a that performs step S700 of the main control board timer interrupt processing) for transmitting various commands set and transmitted in the process, and the effect control means receives commands from the command transmitting means. It is possible to receive the predetermined command (for example, step S1400 of the production control board timer interrupt processing), and to change the symbol corresponding to the identification information (for example, production symbol 38, small production symbol 38d), It is possible to execute a variable performance (for example, variable performance pattern 1 to variable performance pattern 33) that stops When the specific effect is executed (for example, variable effect pattern 5 to variable effect pattern 18, variable effect pattern 30), a specific image (for example, specific image 31e) can be displayed, During execution of the performance, it is possible to perform an operation promotion performance (for example, displaying a first operation promotion image or displaying a second operation promotion image) that prompts the operation of the operation means (for example, the performance button 35), and the operation promotion The performance includes a first operation promotion performance (for example, displaying a first operation promotion image), and a second operation promotion performance that has a higher expectation that the special game will be executed than when the first operation promotion performance is executed. (For example, displaying a second operation promotion image) images can be displayed (for example, in a variable effect in which the first operation promotion image in FIG. 62 is displayed, or in a variable effect in which the second operation promotion image in FIG. 62 is displayed, in FIG. 62(c), a specific image 31e).
Thereby, by displaying the specific image 31e, it becomes possible to clearly recognize that the ready-to-win effect has ended, and it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game.

◆ A sixteenth configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine comprising a main control means (for example, main control board 110) and a performance control means (for example, performance control board 120), the main control The means executes a special game advantageous to the player (for example, a jackpot) when the starting condition is satisfied (for example, step S310-2 of the special symbol memory determination process is affirmative, or step S310-4 of the special symbol memory determination process is affirmative). A determining means (e.g., main CPU 110a) that determines whether or not to perform a game (e.g., jackpot determination process); and when the determination is made, identifying information (e.g., special symbols) is displayed in a variable manner, and then the system stops. An identification information display control means (for example, the first special symbol display device 20, the second special symbol display device 21) that displays the result of the determination by displaying the result, and a predetermined command (for example, each command executed by the main CPU 110a). a command transmitting means (for example, the main CPU 110a that performs step S700 of the main control board timer interrupt processing) for transmitting various commands set and transmitted in the process, and the effect control means receives commands from the command transmitting means. It is possible to receive the predetermined command (for example, step S1400 of the production control board timer interrupt processing), and to change the symbol corresponding to the identification information (for example, production symbol 38, small production symbol 38d), It is possible to execute a variable performance (for example, variable performance pattern 1 to variable performance pattern 33) that stops When the specific effect is executed (for example, variable effect pattern 5 to variable effect pattern 18, variable effect pattern 30), a specific image (for example, specific image 31e) can be displayed, During execution of the performance, it is possible to perform an operation promotion performance (for example, displaying a first operation promotion image or displaying a second operation promotion image) that prompts the operation of the operation means (for example, the performance button 35), and the operation promotion The performance includes a first operation promotion performance (for example, displaying a first operation promotion image), and a second operation promotion performance that has a higher expectation that the special game will be executed than when the first operation promotion performance is executed. (e.g. display of a second operation promotion image), and in a variable effect accompanied by the first operation promotion effect, the specific image may or may not be displayed (for example, The variable effect pattern 7 can display the first operation promotion image, and can display the specific image 31e. On the other hand, in the variation effect pattern 1, the first operation promotion image can be displayed, but the specific image 31e is not displayed), and in the variation effect accompanied by the second operation promotion effect, the specific image is displayed (for example, The variable effect pattern 12 and the variable effect pattern 18 can display the second operation promotion image, and can display the specific image 31e).
Thereby, by displaying the specific image 31e, it becomes possible to clearly recognize that the ready-to-win effect has ended, and it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game.

◆ A seventeenth configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine comprising a main control means (for example, main control board 110) and a performance control means (for example, performance control board 120), The means executes a special game advantageous to the player (for example, a jackpot) when the starting condition is satisfied (for example, step S310-2 of the special symbol memory determination process is affirmative, or step S310-4 of the special symbol memory determination process is affirmative). A determining means (e.g., main CPU 110a) that determines whether or not to perform a game (e.g., jackpot determination process); and when the determination is made, identifying information (e.g., special symbols) is displayed in a variable manner, and then the system stops. An identification information display control means (for example, the first special symbol display device 20, the second special symbol display device 21) that displays the result of the determination by displaying the first game state (for example, the normal game state) and the above-mentioned A gaming state control means (for example, main CPU 110a) capable of controlling a second gaming state (for example, high probability gaming state, time saving gaming state) different from the first gaming state, and a predetermined command (for example, executed by main CPU 110a). command transmitting means (for example, main CPU 110a that performs step S700 of the main control board timer interrupt processing), and the effect control means transmits various commands that are set and transmitted in each process. It is possible to receive the predetermined command from the transmitting means (for example, step S1400 of the production control board timer interrupt processing), and to change the symbol (for example, production symbol 38, small production symbol 38d) corresponding to the identification information. , it is possible to execute a variable performance that stops the symbol (for example, variable performance pattern 1 to variable performance pattern 33), and in the variable performance, a specific performance (for example, variable performance pattern 5 to variable performance pattern 18, variable performance pattern 30) ), and when the specific effect is executed (for example, variable effect pattern 5 to variable effect pattern 18, variable effect pattern 30), a specific image (for example, specific image 31e) can be displayed. , a determination result that notifies the result of the determination with execution of an operation promotion effect (for example, display of a first operation promotion image or display of a second operation promotion image) that prompts the operation of the operation means (for example, the effect button 35); It is possible to execute a notification performance (for example, a decision performance), and the rate at which the determination result notification performance accompanied by the display of the specific image is executed in the first gaming state, and the rate at which the judgment result notification performance accompanied by the display of the specific image is executed in the second gaming state are determined. This is different from the rate at which the judgment result notification effect accompanied by the display is executed (for example, the rate at which a jackpot is determined to be a jackpot in a normal gaming state and the rate at which a jackpot is determined to be a jackpot in a high probability gaming state are different; Since SP reach or higher is likely to be executed for a loss, the ratio of execution of the deciding performance accompanied by the display of the specific image 31e is also different).
Thereby, by displaying the specific image 31e, it becomes possible to clearly recognize that the ready-to-win effect has ended, and it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game.

◆An eighteenth configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine comprising a main control means (for example, main control board 110) and a performance control means (for example, performance control board 120), The means executes a special game advantageous to the player (for example, a jackpot) when the starting condition is satisfied (for example, step S310-2 of the special symbol memory determination process is affirmative, or step S310-4 of the special symbol memory determination process is affirmative). A determining means (e.g., main CPU 110a) that determines whether or not to perform a game (e.g., jackpot determination process); and when the determination is made, identifying information (e.g., special symbols) is displayed in a variable manner, and then the system stops. An identification information display control means (for example, the first special symbol display device 20, the second special symbol display device 21) that displays the result of the determination by displaying the result, and a predetermined command (for example, each command executed by the main CPU 110a). a command transmitting means (for example, the main CPU 110a that performs step S700 of the main control board timer interrupt processing) for transmitting various commands set and transmitted in the process, and the effect control means receives commands from the command transmitting means. It is possible to receive the predetermined command (for example, step S1400 of the production control board timer interrupt processing), and to change the symbol corresponding to the identification information (for example, production symbol 38, small production symbol 38d), It is possible to execute a variable performance (for example, variable performance pattern 1 to variable performance pattern 33) that stops the , and it is possible to execute a specific performance (for example, variable performance pattern 5 to variable performance pattern 18) in the variable performance. A specific image (e.g., specific image 31e) can be displayed when the specific effect is executed (e.g., variable effect pattern 5 to variable effect pattern 18), and during execution of the variable effect, the operating means (e.g. , the performance button 35) (for example, displaying a first operation promotion image or displaying a second operation promotion image), the operation promotion effect includes a first operation promotion effect. (for example, displaying a first operation promotion image), and a second operation promotion effect (for example, displaying a second operation promotion image) that has a higher expectation that the special game will be executed than when the first operation promotion image is executed. display of a promotion image), and if the result of the determination is not to play the special game (for example, denying step S311-1 of the jackpot determination process), the first game with the display of the specific image A variable performance that executes the specific performance using the first operation promotion performance and a variable performance that executes the specific performance using the second operation promotion performance that is accompanied by display of the specific image have different execution rates. (For example, when the first operation promotion image is displayed, it is more likely to result in a loss than when the second operation promotion image is displayed, and the specific image 31e is more likely to be displayed because it is more likely to result in a loss. Therefore, a variable effect that executes a specific effect that uses a first operation promotion effect that involves displaying the specific image 31e, and a variable effect that executes a specific effect that uses a second operation promotion effect that involves the display of the specific image 31e. (The execution rate is different for each).
Thereby, by displaying the specific image 31e, it becomes possible to clearly recognize that the ready-to-win effect has ended, and it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game.

◆ A nineteenth configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine comprising a main control means (for example, main control board 110) and a performance control means (for example, performance control board 120), The means executes a special game advantageous to the player (for example, a jackpot) when the starting condition is satisfied (for example, step S310-2 of the special symbol memory determination process is affirmative, or step S310-4 of the special symbol memory determination process is affirmative). A determining means (e.g., main CPU 110a) that determines whether or not to perform a game (e.g., jackpot determination process); and when the determination is made, identifying information (e.g., special symbols) is displayed in a variable manner, and then the system stops. An identification information display control means (for example, the first special symbol display device 20, the second special symbol display device 21) that displays the result of the determination by displaying the first game state (for example, the normal game state) and the above-mentioned A gaming state control means (for example, main CPU 110a) capable of controlling a second gaming state (for example, high probability gaming state, time saving gaming state) different from the first gaming state, and a predetermined command (for example, executed by main CPU 110a). command transmitting means (for example, main CPU 110a that performs step S700 of the main control board timer interrupt processing), and the effect control means transmits various commands that are set and transmitted in each process. It is possible to receive the predetermined command from the transmitting means (for example, step S1400 of the production control board timer interrupt processing), and to change the symbol (for example, production symbol 38, small production symbol 38d) corresponding to the identification information. , it is possible to execute a variable performance that stops the symbol (for example, variable performance pattern 1 to variable performance pattern 33), and in the variable performance, a specific performance (for example, variable performance pattern 5 to variable performance pattern 18, variable performance pattern 30) ), and when the specific effect is executed (for example, variable effect pattern 5 to variable effect pattern 18, variable effect pattern 30), a specific image (for example, specific image 31e) can be displayed. , during execution of the fluctuation effect, it is possible to perform an operation promotion effect (for example, displaying a first operation promotion image or displaying a second operation promotion image) that prompts the operation of the operation means (for example, the effect button 35); The operation promotion performance includes a first operation promotion performance (for example, displaying a first operation promotion image) and a level of expectation that the special game will be executed compared to when the first operation promotion performance is executed. and a high second operation promotion effect (for example, displaying a second operation promotion image), and the specification using the second operation promotion effect accompanied by the display of the specific image in the first gaming state. The variable performance that executes the performance and the variable performance that executes the specific performance that uses the second operation promotion performance that is accompanied by the display of the specific image in the second game state have different execution rates ( For example, the percentage of jackpots determined to be a jackpot in the normal gaming state and the percentage of jackpots determined to be a jackpot in a high-probability gaming state are different.In the normal gaming state, it is more likely to execute a loss SP reach or higher, so in the first gaming state. A variable performance that executes a specific performance using a second operation promotion performance accompanied by the display of a specific image 31e, and a second operation promotion performance accompanied by the display of the specific image 31e in the second game state. (The execution rate is different from the variable performance that executes a specific performance.)
Thereby, by displaying the specific image 31e, it becomes possible to clearly recognize that the ready-to-win effect has ended, and it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game.

◆ A twentieth configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine equipped with a main control means (e.g., the main control board 110) and a presentation control means (e.g., the presentation control board 120), in which the main control means includes a determination means (e.g., the main CPU 110a) that, when a start condition is satisfied (e.g., step S310-2 of the special symbol memory determination process is affirmative, or step S310-4 of the special symbol memory determination process is affirmative), determines whether or not to play a special game (e.g., a jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player (e.g., a jackpot determination process), and, when the determination is made, displays identification information (e.g., a special symbol) in a variable manner and then displays a stop display. and a command transmission means (for example, the main CPU 110a which performs step S700 of the main control board timer interruption processing) which transmits a predetermined command (for example, various commands set and transmitted in each process executed by the main CPU 110a). The performance control means is capable of receiving the predetermined command from the command transmission means (for example, step S1400 of the performance control board timer interruption processing), and displays a pattern (for example, the performance It is possible to execute a variable performance (for example, variable performance pattern 1 to variable performance pattern 33) that changes the pattern 38, small performance pattern 38d) and stops the pattern, and in the variable performance, it is possible to execute a specific performance (for example, variable performance pattern 5 to variable performance pattern 18, variable performance pattern 30). When the specific performance is executed (for example, variable performance pattern 5 to variable performance pattern 18, variable performance pattern 30), it is possible to display a specific image (for example, specific image 31e). During the execution of the specific performance, an operation promotion performance (for example, display of a first operation promotion image or or a second operation prompting image) can be executed, and the operation means can be changed from a first state (e.g., a non-vibrating state) to a second state (e.g., a vibrating state), and the rate at which the specific image is displayed differs between a first number of times (e.g., 0 times) at which the operation means is changed to the second state and a second number of times (e.g., 1 time) that is different from the first number of times (e.g., in the case of a miss, the number of vibrations of the effect button 35 is 0, and in the case of a jackpot, the number of vibrations of the effect button 35 is 1, and in the case of a miss, the specific image 31e is more likely to be displayed when the number of vibrations is 0. Therefore, the rate at which the specific image 31e is displayed differs between a case where the operation means is not vibrated and a case where the operation means is vibrated).
As a result, the display of the specific image 31e allows the player to clearly recognize that the reach effect has ended, preventing a decline in interest in the game.

(Contents of the invention described in this embodiment 2)
In conventional gaming machines, when a game ball enters the starting hole, a special game judgment is made to determine whether or not to generate a special game advantageous to the player, and a variable performance is performed based on the result of the special game judgment. There is a game that performs a suggestive performance that suggests the result of the special game determination while the variable performance is being performed (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2017-221253). However, there was a problem that interest in the game was likely to decrease.

◆ The first configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine equipped with a main control means (e.g., the main control board 110) and a presentation control means (e.g., the presentation control board 120), in which the main control means, when a start condition is satisfied (e.g., step S310-2 of the special symbol memory determination process is affirmative, or step S310-4 of the special symbol memory determination process is affirmative), determines whether or not to play a special game (e.g., a jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player (e.g., a jackpot determination process) (e.g., the main CPU 110a), and and an identification information display control means (e.g., the first special pattern display device 20, the second special pattern display device 21) for displaying the result of the judgment by varying and then stopping the display of identification information (e.g., special patterns), and a command transmission means (e.g., the main CPU 110a for performing step S700 of the main control board timer interruption process) for transmitting a predetermined command (e.g., various commands set and transmitted in each process executed by the main CPU 110a). The performance control means is provided with the predetermined command from the command transmission means. The present invention is capable of receiving a command (e.g., step S1400 of the performance control board timer interrupt process), varying a pattern (e.g., performance pattern 38, small performance pattern 38d) corresponding to the identification information, and executing a variable performance (e.g., variable performance pattern 1 to variable performance pattern 33) in which the pattern is stopped, and notifying the result of the judgment at a predetermined timing in the variable performance (e.g., timing of T12 in (a) in FIG. 52), and in the variable performance, suggestive performance according to the result of the judgment (e.g., "pseudo consecutive 2 variable period" or "pseudo consecutive 3 variable period"). 56 ) and the display of the step-up notice effect image 31p in the "SU notice effect" (for example, the selection of an option in the "pseudo consecutive 2 notice period" or the "pseudo consecutive 3 notice period", the "reach!" in the "speech notice effect", the selection of an option in the "roulette notice effect" (for example, the selection of "SP" in FIG. 56 ), the display of the step-up notice effect image 31p in the "SU notice effect" (for example, the selection of "SU5 in FIG. 56 After the suggestive notification effect is executed (for example, from (a) T1 to (a) T3 in FIG. 52), when the timing for executing the suggestive effect (for example, from (a) T4 in FIG. 52) comes, the suggestive effect is executed (for example, a pseudo-repeat 2 variation is executed at (a) T4 to (a) T5 in FIG. 52). The number of suggestive notification effects and suggestive effects that can be executed before the specified timing differs from that after the specified timing (for example, before the specified timing, suggestive notification effects of a "pseudo-repeat 2 notification period", a "pseudo-repeat 3 notification period", a "dialogue preview effect", a "roulette preview effect", and a "SU preview effect" can be executed, and suggestive effects corresponding to each of these can be executed. On the other hand, after the specified timing, only the suggestive notification effect of the display of the "specific image 31e" can be executed, and only the suggestive effect of the temporary stop display of the performance pattern 38 in the "temporary stop display period" corresponding to the display of the "specific image 31e" can be executed).
This can prevent a decline in interest in the game.

◆ A second configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine equipped with a main control means (e.g., the main control board 110) and a presentation control means (e.g., the presentation control board 120), in which the main control means, when a start condition is satisfied (e.g., step S310-2 of the special symbol memory determination process is affirmative, or step S310-4 of the special symbol memory determination process is affirmative), determines whether or not to play a special game (e.g., a jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player (e.g., a jackpot determination process), and controls the main control means to perform the determination. and an identification information display control means (e.g., the first special pattern display device 20, the second special pattern display device 21) for displaying the result of the judgment by varying and then stopping the display of identification information (e.g., special patterns), and a command transmission means (e.g., the main CPU 110a for performing step S700 of the main control board timer interruption process) for transmitting a predetermined command (e.g., various commands set and transmitted in each process executed by the main CPU 110a). The performance control means is provided with the predetermined command from the command transmission means. The present invention is capable of receiving a command (e.g., step S1400 of the performance control board timer interrupt process), varying a pattern (e.g., performance pattern 38, small performance pattern 38d) corresponding to the identification information, and executing a variable performance (e.g., variable performance pattern 1 to variable performance pattern 33) in which the pattern is stopped, and notifying the result of the judgment at a predetermined timing in the variable performance (e.g., timing of T12 in (a) in FIG. 52), and in the variable performance, suggestive performance according to the result of the judgment (e.g., "pseudo consecutive 2 variable period" or "pseudo consecutive 3 variable period"). 56 ) and the display of the step-up notice effect image 31p in the "SU notice effect" (for example, the selection of an option in the "pseudo consecutive 2 notice period" or the "pseudo consecutive 3 notice period", the "reach!" in the "speech notice effect", the selection of an option in the "roulette notice effect" (for example, the selection of "SP" in FIG. 56 ), the display of the step-up notice effect image 31p in the "SU notice effect" (for example, the selection of "SU5 in FIG. 56 After the suggestive notification performance is executed (for example, from (a) T1 to (a) T3 in FIG. 52), when the timing for executing the suggestive performance (for example, from (a) T4 in FIG. 52) arrives, the suggestive performance is executed (for example, a pseudo-consecutive 2 fluctuation is executed at (a) T4 to (a) T5 in FIG. 52). Prior to the specified timing, a combination of a first suggestive notification performance (for example, a "pseudo-consecutive 2 notification period" or a "pseudo-consecutive 3 notification period") and a first suggestive performance (for example, a "pseudo-consecutive 2 fluctuation period" or a "pseudo-consecutive 3 fluctuation period") and a second suggestive notification performance (for example, "It's a reach! in a "dialogue preview performance") are executed. ") and a second suggestive effect (for example, a "normal reach fluctuation period") can be executed, and after the specified timing, a combination of a third suggestive notification effect (for example, display of "specific image 31e") and a third suggestive effect (for example, a temporary stop display of effect pattern 38 in the "temporary stop display period") can be executed.
This can prevent a decline in interest in the game.

◆ A third configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine including a main control means (for example, main control board 110) and a performance control means (for example, performance control board 120), The means executes a special game advantageous to the player (for example, a jackpot) when the starting condition is satisfied (for example, step S310-2 of the special symbol memory determination process is affirmative, or step S310-4 of the special symbol memory determination process is affirmative). A determining means (e.g., main CPU 110a) that determines whether or not to perform a game (e.g., jackpot determination process); and when the determination is made, identifying information (e.g., special symbols) is displayed in a variable manner, and then the system stops. An identification information display control means (for example, the first special symbol display device 20, the second special symbol display device 21) that displays the result of the determination by displaying the result, and a predetermined command (for example, each command executed by the main CPU 110a). a command transmitting means (for example, the main CPU 110a that performs step S700 of the main control board timer interrupt processing) for transmitting various commands set and transmitted in the process, and the effect control means receives commands from the command transmitting means. It is possible to receive the predetermined command (for example, step S1400 of the production control board timer interrupt processing), and to change the symbol corresponding to the identification information (for example, production symbol 38, small production symbol 38d), It is possible to execute a variable performance (for example, variable performance pattern 1 to variable performance pattern 33) that stops the special game, and in the variable performance, a preview performance (for example, a dialogue preview performance) that foretells the possibility that the special game will occur can be executed. The result of the determination can be announced at a predetermined timing in the fluctuating performance (for example, the timing of (a) T12 in FIG. 52), and the suggestive performance according to the result of the determination can be performed in the fluctuating performance. (For example, the temporary stop display of the production pattern 38 in the "pseudo series 2 variation period", "pseudo series 3 variation period", "SP reach variation period", "full rotation variation period", "temporary stop display period"), Selection of options in the suggestion notification performance (for example, "Pseudo series 2 notification period", "Pseudo series 3 notification period", "Roulette notice performance") that makes you expect that the suggestion production will be executed (for example, "SP ”), displaying the step-up preview performance image 31p in the “SU preview performance” (for example, displaying “Probable SU5 Full Rotation” in FIG. 56), and displaying the “specific image 31e”). , After the suggestion notification effect has been executed (for example, (a) T1 to (a) T3 in FIG. 52), when the execution timing of the suggestion effect (for example, (a) T4 in FIG. 52) comes, the suggestion effect is executed. (for example, execute the pseudo continuous 2 variation from (a) T4 to (a) T5 in FIG. 52), and before the predetermined timing, the first suggestion notification effect (for example, "pseudo continuous 2 notification period") is executed. or "pseudo series 3 notification period") and the first suggestion effect (for example, "pseudo series 2 variable period" or "pseudo series 3 variable period"), and after the predetermined timing, There are cases where a second suggestion notification effect (for example, display of the "specific image 31e") and a second suggestion effect (temporary stop display of the effect pattern 38 in the "temporary stop display period") are executed, When executing the suggestion notification effect of 1, the preview effect is executable (for example, in FIG. (Yes), when executing the second suggestion notification effect, the preview effect is not executed (for example, in FIG. 52, in the "background switching" that displays the "specific image 31e", the line preview effect is not executed). .
This can prevent the player from losing interest in the game.

◆ A fourth configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine comprising a main control means (for example, main control board 110) and a performance control means (for example, performance control board 120), the main control The means executes a special game advantageous to the player (for example, a jackpot) when the starting condition is satisfied (for example, step S310-2 of the special symbol memory determination process is affirmative, or step S310-4 of the special symbol memory determination process is affirmative). A determining means (e.g., main CPU 110a) that determines whether or not to perform a game (e.g., jackpot determination process); and when the determination is made, identifying information (e.g., special symbols) is displayed in a variable manner, and then the system stops. An identification information display control means (for example, the first special symbol display device 20, the second special symbol display device 21) that displays the result of the determination by displaying the result, and a predetermined command (for example, each command executed by the main CPU 110a). a command transmitting means (for example, the main CPU 110a that performs step S700 of the main control board timer interrupt processing) for transmitting various commands set and transmitted in the process, and the effect control means receives commands from the command transmitting means. It is possible to receive the predetermined command (for example, step S1400 of the production control board timer interrupt processing), and to change the symbol corresponding to the identification information (for example, production symbol 38, small production symbol 38d), It is possible to execute a fluctuating performance (for example, fluctuating performance pattern 1 to fluctuating performance pattern 33) that stops the process, and to notify the result of the determination at a predetermined timing in the fluctuating performance (for example, the timing of (a) T12 in FIG. 52). In the fluctuating performance, a suggestive performance (for example, "Pseudo-Run 2 fluctuation period", "Pseudo-Run 3 fluctuation period", "SP reach fluctuation period", "Full rotation fluctuation period", " Temporary stop display of the production pattern 38 during the "temporary stop display period"), and suggestion notification performances that make you anticipate that the relevant suggestion production will be executed (for example, "Pseudo series 2 notification period", "Pseudo series 3 notification period", " Selecting an option in "Roulette Preview Performance" (for example, selecting "SP" in FIG. 56), displaying the step-up preview performance image 31p in "SU Preview Performance" (for example, displaying "Probable SU5 Full Spin" in FIG. 56) , display of "specific image 31e"), and after the suggestion notification effect is executed (for example, (a) T1 to (a) T3 in FIG. 52), the execution timing of the suggestion effect ( For example, at (a) T4) in FIG. 52, the suggestion effect is executed (for example, the pseudo continuous 2 fluctuation is executed at (a) T4 to (a) T5 in FIG. 52), and before the predetermined timing, A first performance (for example, a pseudo series 2 performance) consisting of a first suggestion notification performance (for example, "pseudo series 2 notification period") and a first suggestion production (for example, "pseudo series 2 variable period"), A second performance (for example, a pseudo series 3 performance) consisting of a second suggestion notification performance (for example, "pseudo series 3 notification period") and a second suggestion production (for example, "pseudo series 3 variation period"), After the predetermined timing, the third suggestion notification effect (for example, the display of the "specific image 31e") and the third suggestion effect (for example, the display of the effect pattern 38 in the "temporary stop display period") can be executed. It is possible to execute a third effect (for example, a background switching effect and a temporary stop display effect) consisting of a temporary stop display), and a ratio of executing the first effect and the third effect, and a ratio between the first effect and the third effect. The rate at which the second performance and the third performance are performed is different (for example, in the number of pseudo consecutive runs of variable performance patterns 3, 9, 14, and 15 in FIG. Although the sequence is executed, the specific image 31e may not be displayed, but in the two pseudo-sequences of variable effect patterns 10 to 12 and 16 to 18, the specific image 31e is displayed in any of the variable effect patterns, so the first When the performance and the second performance are executed, the third performance is executed at a higher rate than when only the first performance is executed).
This can prevent the player from losing interest in the game.

◇A fifth configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine equipped with a main control means (e.g., the main control board 110) and a presentation control means (e.g., the presentation control board 120), in which the main control means is a determination means (e.g., the main CPU 110a) that determines whether or not to play a special game (e.g., a jackpot game) advantageous to the player (e.g., a jackpot determination process) when a start condition is established (e.g., step S310-2 of the special symbol memory determination process is affirmative, or step S310-4 of the special symbol memory determination process is affirmative). and an identification information display control means (e.g., the first special pattern display device 20, the second special pattern display device 21) for displaying the result of the judgment by varying and then stopping the display of identification information (e.g., a special pattern) when the judgment is made, and a command transmission means (e.g., the main CPU 110a performing step S700 of the main control board timer interrupt processing) for transmitting a predetermined command (e.g., various commands set and transmitted in each process executed by the main CPU 110a). The performance control means is capable of receiving the predetermined command from the command transmission means (e.g., step S1400 of the performance control board timer interrupt processing), and is capable of executing a variable performance (e.g., variable performance pattern 1 to variable performance pattern 33) that varies a pattern corresponding to the identification information (e.g., performance pattern 38, small performance pattern 38d) and stops the pattern, and notifies the result of the judgment at a predetermined timing in the variable performance (e.g., the timing of T12 in (a) in FIG. 52), and in the variable performance, Suggestive effects according to the results (for example, a temporary stop display of the effect pattern 38 in the "pseudo consecutive 2 fluctuation period", "pseudo consecutive 3 fluctuation period", "SP reach fluctuation period", "full rotation fluctuation period", and "temporary stop display period"), and suggestive notification effects that anticipate the execution of the suggestive effects (for example, the selection of an option in the "pseudo consecutive 2 notification period" and "pseudo consecutive 3 notification period", "roulette notice effect" (for example, the selection of "SP" in FIG. 56), the display of a step-up notice effect image 31p in the "SU notice effect" (for example, the selection of "SU5 in FIG. 56" After the suggestive notification performance is executed (for example, at (a) T1 to (a) T3 in FIG. 52), when the timing for executing the suggestive performance (for example, at (a) T4 in FIG. 52) arrives, the suggestive performance is executed (for example, at (a) T4 to (a) T5 in FIG. 52). Before the predetermined timing, a first performance (for example, a pseudo-consecutive performance) consisting of a first suggestive notification performance (for example, a "pseudo-consecutive-2 notification period", "pseudo-consecutive-3 notification period") and a first suggestive performance (for example, a "pseudo-consecutive-2 change period", "pseudo-consecutive-3 change period") can be executed. After the predetermined timing, a second suggestive notification performance (for example, display of a "specific image 31e") and a second suggestive performance (for example, "temporary stop It is possible to execute a second effect (e.g., a background switching effect and a temporary stop display effect) consisting of a first effect and a second effect (a temporary stop display of the effect pattern 38 during a "stop display period"), and the ratio of executing the first effect and the second effect when the result of the determination is that the special game will not be played (e.g., a negative result in step S311-1 of the jackpot determination process) is different from the ratio of executing the first effect and the second effect when the result of the determination is that the special game will be played (e.g., an affirmative result in step S311-1 of the jackpot determination process) (e.g., variable effect patterns 7 to 18 in FIG. 53 are variable effect patterns that display a specific image 31e in the event of a miss, and variable effect pattern 30 is a variable effect pattern that displays a specific image 31e in the event of a jackpot. Therefore, the specific image 31e is more likely to be displayed in the event of a miss than in the event of a jackpot).
This can prevent a decline in interest in the game.

◆ A sixth configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine including a main control means (for example, main control board 110) and a performance control means (for example, performance control board 120), the main control The means executes a special game advantageous to the player (for example, a jackpot) when the starting condition is satisfied (for example, step S310-2 of the special symbol memory determination process is affirmative, or step S310-4 of the special symbol memory determination process is affirmative). A determining means (e.g., main CPU 110a) that determines whether or not to perform a game (e.g., jackpot determination process); and when the determination is made, identifying information (e.g., special symbols) is displayed in a variable manner, and then the system stops. An identification information display control means (for example, the first special symbol display device 20, the second special symbol display device 21) that displays the result of the determination by displaying the result, and a predetermined command (for example, each command executed by the main CPU 110a). a command transmitting means (for example, the main CPU 110a that performs step S700 of the main control board timer interrupt processing) for transmitting various commands set and transmitted in the process, and the effect control means receives commands from the command transmitting means. It is possible to receive the predetermined command (for example, step S1400 of the production control board timer interrupt processing), and to change the symbol corresponding to the identification information (for example, production symbol 38, small production symbol 38d), It is possible to execute a fluctuating performance (for example, fluctuating performance pattern 1 to fluctuating performance pattern 33) that stops the process, and to notify the result of the determination at a predetermined timing in the fluctuating performance (for example, the timing of (a) T12 in FIG. 52). In the fluctuating performance, a suggestive performance (for example, "Pseudo-Run 2 fluctuation period", "Pseudo-Run 3 fluctuation period", "SP reach fluctuation period", "Full rotation fluctuation period", " Temporary stop display of the production pattern 38 during the "temporary stop display period"), and suggestion notification performances that make you anticipate that the relevant suggestion production will be executed (for example, "Pseudo series 2 notification period", "Pseudo series 3 notification period", " Selecting an option in "Roulette Preview Performance" (for example, selecting "SP" in FIG. 56), displaying the step-up preview performance image 31p in "SU Preview Performance" (for example, displaying "Probable SU5 Full Spin" in FIG. 56) , display of "specific image 31e"), and after the suggestion notification effect is executed (for example, (a) T1 to (a) T3 in FIG. 52), the execution timing of the suggestion effect ( For example, at (a) T4) in FIG. 52, the suggestion effect is executed (for example, the pseudo continuous 2 fluctuation is executed at (a) T4 to (a) T5 in FIG. 52), and before the predetermined timing, Execute a first performance (e.g., a pseudo-series 2 performance) consisting of a first suggestion notification performance (e.g., "pseudo-sequence 2 notification period") and a first suggestion performance (e.g., "pseudo-sequence 2 variable period") This is possible, and after the predetermined timing, the second suggestion notification effect (for example, the display of the "specific image 31e") and the second suggestion effect (for example, the temporary stop of the effect pattern 38 in the "temporary stop display period") display)) can be executed (e.g., a background switching effect and a temporary stop display effect), and the execution time of the first effect (e.g., from the "pseudo series 2 notification period" to the "pseudo series 2 fluctuation period") can be executed. '') is different from the execution time of the second effect (for example, the time from the display of the ``specific image 31e'' to the temporary stop display of the effect pattern 38 in the ``temporary stop display period''). The time from the display of "31e" to the temporary stop display of the effect pattern 38 in the "temporary stop display period" is shorter.
This can prevent the player from losing interest in the game.

The gaming machine of the present invention is not limited to pachinko gaming machines, but can also be used in reel-type gaming machines (so-called slot machines). Furthermore, it can also be used in jan-ball gaming machines and arrange-ball gaming machines.

1 Gaming machine 31 Image display device 32 Audio output device 110 Main control board 110a Main CPU
110b main ROM
110c Main RAM
120 Performance control board 120a Sub-CPU
120b Sub ROM
120c Sub RAM
150 Display/audio control unit 155 Image control unit

Claims (1)

A gaming machine comprising a main control means , an effect control means , and an operation means operable by a player ,
The main control means includes:
a determining means for determining whether or not to perform a special game advantageous to the player;
When the determination is made, an identification information display control means displays the result of the determination by displaying the identification information in a variable manner and then stopping the display;
a command transmitting means for transmitting a predetermined command;
The performance control means is
capable of receiving the predetermined command from the command transmitting means;
It is possible to perform a variation effect in which a symbol corresponding to the identification information is varied and the symbol is stopped;
The music can be audibly output from the sound output means,
In the variable performance, it is possible to execute a reach performance according to the result of the determination,
Notifying the result of the determination at a predetermined timing after starting the reach effect;
After the reach effect is terminated by notification of the result of the determination,
It is possible to perform a predetermined performance that is different from the reach performance and that is responsive to the result of the determination,
While the reach performance is being executed, the music can be output audibly,
While the predetermined performance is being performed, the music may not be audibly output;
The pattern includes a first pattern and a second pattern different from the first pattern,
Before the execution of the predetermined effect, both the first symbol and the second symbol can be visually recognized,
During the execution of the predetermined performance, it is difficult to make the first symbol visible, but it is possible to make the second symbol visible,
It is possible to execute an operation performance that makes the player expect it in response to the operation of the operation means during the validity period that occurs during the execution of the variable performance,
Before the execution of the predetermined performance, it is possible to generate the validity period related to the operation performance,
While the predetermined performance is being executed, generation of the validity period related to the operation performance is restricted,
During the execution of the predetermined performance,
A gaming machine in which it is possible not to output the music audibly, but the volume can be adjusted by a predetermined player operation .